WO2000056527A1

WO2000056527A1 - Plastic lens systems, compositions, and methods

Info

Publication number: WO2000056527A1
Application number: PCT/US2000/007110
Authority: WO
Inventors: Omar M. Buazza; Stephen C. Luetke; Galen R. Powers; Matthew C. Lattis; Larry H. Joel
Original assignee: Optical Dynamics Corporation
Priority date: 1999-03-19
Filing date: 2000-03-17
Publication date: 2000-09-28
Also published as: US20010038890A1; US6964479B2; US20020018824A1; CN1137027C; EP1163107B1; US6634879B2; AU4014100A; US20010048002A1; US6557734B2; EP1163107A1; CN1351537A; US6729866B2; US20020006452A1; US20030169400A1; US7079920B2; AU763288B2; US20010047217A1; ATE284780T1; US6419873B1; DE60016723D1

Abstract

An apparatus for preparing a plastic eyeglass lens includes a coating unit (20) and a lens curing unit (30). The apparatus is preferably configured to allow the operation of both the coating unit and the lens curing unit. The apparatus may also include a post-cure unit (40) and a controller (50). The controller is configured to control the operation of the coating unit, the lens curing unit and the post-cure unit. A lens forming composition may include an aromatic containing polyether polyethylenic functional monomer, a photoinitiator, and a coiinitiator. The lens forming composition may be cured by the application of activating light or activating light and heat.

Description

TITLE: PLASTIC LENS SYSTEMS, COMPOSITIONS. AND METHODS

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

1 Field of the Invention

The present invention relates generally to eyeglass lenses More particularly, the invention relates to a lens forming composition, system and method for making photochromic, ultraviolet/visible light absorbing, and colored plastic lenses by curmg the lens forming composition using activating light

2 Description of the Relevant Art

It is conventional in the art to produce optical lenses by thermal curing techniques from the polymer of diethylene glycol bιs(allyl)-carbonate (DEG-BAC) In addition, optical lenses may also be made usmg ultraviolet ("UV") light curing techniques See, for example, U S Patent Nos 4,728,469 to Lipscomb et al , 4,879,318 to Lφscomb et al , 5,364,256 to Lipscomb et al , 5,415,816 to Buazza et al , 5,529,728 to Buazza et al , 5,514,214 to Joel et al , 5,516,468 to Lipscomb, et al , 5,529,728 to Buazza et al , 5,689,324 to Lossman et al , and U S patent application serial nos 07/425,371 filed October 26, 1989, 08/439,691 filed May 12, 1995, 08/454,523 filed May 30, 1995, 08/453,770 filed May 30, 1995, 08/636,510 filed Apnl 19, 1996, 08/663,703 filed June 14, 1996, 08/666,062 filed June 14, 1996, 08/853,134 filed May 8, 1997, 08/844,557 filed Apnl 18, 1997, 08/904,289 filed July 31, 1997, and 08/959,973 filed October 29, 1997, all of which are hereby specifically incorporated by reference

Curing of a lens by ultraviolet light tends to present certain problems that must be overcome to produce a viable lens Such problems mclude yellowing of the lens, crackmg of the lens or mold, optical distortions in the lens, and premature release of the lens from the mold In addition, many of the useful ultraviolet light-curable lens forming compositions exhibit certain characteπstics that mcrease the difficulty of a lens curing process For example, due to the relatively rapid nature of ultraviolet light initiated reactions, it is a challenge to provide a composition that is ultraviolet light curable to form an eyeglass lens Excessive exothermic heat tends to cause defects m the cured lens To avoid such defects, the level of photoinitiator may be reduced to levels below what is customaπly employed rn the ultraviolet curmg art

While reducmg the level of photoinitiator addresses some problems, it may also cause others For instance, lowered levels of photoinitiator may cause the mateπal in regions near an edge of the lens and proximate a gasket wall in a mold cavity to incompletely cure due to the presence of oxygen in these regions (oxygen is believed to inhibit curmg of many lens forming compositions or mateπals) Uncured lens forming composition tends to result in lenses with "wet" edges covered by sticky uncured lens forming composition Furthermore, uncured lens forming composition may migrate to and contaminate the optical surfaces of the lens upon demolding The contaminated lens is then often unusable

Uncured lens forming composition has been addressed by a variety of methods (see, e g , the methods described in U S Patent No 5,529,728 to Buazza et al) Such methods may include removing the gasket and applying either an oxygen barrier or a photoinitiator enriched liquid to the exposed edge of the lens, and then re- irradiating the lens with a dosage of ultraviolet light sufficient to completely dry the edge of the lens prior to αemoldmg Dunng such irradiation, however, higher than desirable levels of irradiation, or longer than desirable periods of irradiation, may be required The additional ultraviolet irradiation may m some circumstances cause defects such as yellowing m the lens

The low photoinitiator levels utilized m many ultraviolet curable lens forming compositions may produce a lens that, while fully-cured as measured by percentage of remaining double bonds, may not possess sufficient cross-link density on the lens surface to provide desirable dye absorption characteristics durmg the tinting process Vaπous methods of increasing the surface density of such ultraviolet light curable lenses are descπbed in

U.S. Patent No. 5,529,728 to Buazza et al In one method, the lens is demolded and then the surfaces of the lens are exposed directly to ultraviolet light. The relatively short wavelengths (around 254 nm) provided by some ultraviolet light sources (e g , a mercury vapor lamp) tend to cause the matenal to cross-link quite rapidly. An undesirable effect of this method, however, is that the lens tends to yellow as a result of such exposure Further, any contaminants on the surface of the lens that are exposed to short wavelengths of high intensity ultraviolet light may cause tmt defects.

Another method involves exposing the lens to relatively high intensity ultraviolet radiation while it is still withm a mold cavity formed between glass molds. The glass molds tend to absorb the more effective short wavelengths, while transmittmg wavelengths of about 365 nm This method generally requires long exposure times and often the infrared radiation absorbed by the lens mold assembly will cause premature release of the lens from a mold member. The lens mold assembly may be heated pπor to exposure to high intensity ultraviolet light, thereby reducmg the amount of radiation necessary to attain a desired level of cross-link density This method, however, is also associated with a higher rate of premature release. It is well known m the art that a lens mold/gasket assembly may be heated to cure the lens formmg composition from a liquid monomer to a solid polymer. It is also well known that such a lens may be thermally postcured by applymg convective heat to the lens after the molds and gaskets have been removed from the lens.

In this application the terms "lens formmg mateπal" and "lens formmg compositions" are used mterchangeably SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

An embodiment of an apparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens is descπbed The apparatus includes a coating unit and a lens curing unit The coatmg unit may be configured to coat either mold members or lenses.

Preferably, the coatmg unit is a spin coatmg unit. The lens curing unit may be configured to direct activatmg light toward mold members. The mold members are part of a mold assembly that may be placed withm the lens curmg unit. Dependmg on the type of lens formmg composition used, the apparatus may be used to form photochroimc and non-photochromic lenses The apparatus is preferably configured to allow the operation of both the coatmg umt and the lens curing unit substantially simultaneously

The coatmg unit is preferably a spin coatmg umt The spm coatmg unit preferably compnses a holder for holdmg an eyeglass lens or a mold member The holder is preferably coupled to a motor that is preferably configured to rotate the holder An activatmg light source may be incorporated into a cover The cover may be drawn over the body of the lens curmg unit, covering the coatmg units The activating light source is preferably positioned, when the cover is closed, such that activating light may be applied to the mold member or lens positioned withm the coatmg unit An activating light source may be an ultraviolet light source, an actinic light source (e g , a light source producmg light havmg a wavelength between about 380 nm to 490 nm), a visible light source and/or an mfra-red light source Preferably, the activating light source is an ultraviolet light source

The lens curmg unit includes at least one, preferably two activatmg light sources for irradiating a mold assembly Mold assembly holders may be positionable within the lens formmg apparatus such that the activatmg light may be applied to the mold member durmg use A filter is preferably positioned between the mold assemblies and the activating light source The filter is preferably configured to manipulate the mtensity of activating light that is directed toward the mold members The filter may be a hazy filter that mcludes a frosted glass member Alternatively, the filter may be a liquid crystal display ("LCD") panel

An LCD panel for use as a filter is preferably a monochrome trans-flective panel with the back light and reflector removed The mtensity of the light is preferably reduced as the light passes through the LCD panel The LCD panel is preferably programmable such that the light transmissibi ty of the LCD panel may be altered In use, a predetermined pattern of light and dark regions may be displayed on the LCD panel to alter the mtensity of light passmg through the panel One advantage of an LCD panel filter is that a pattern may be altered durmg a curmg cycle For example, the pattern of light and dark regions may be manipulated such that a lens is initially cured from the center of the lens, then the curmg may be gradually expanded to the outer edges of the lens This type of cuπng pattern may allow a more uniformly cured lens to be formed

Another advantage is that the LCD panel may be used as a partial shutter to reduce the mtensity of light reachmg the mold assembly By blackenmg the entire LCD panel the amount of light reaching any portion of the mold assembly may be reduced In this manner, the LCD may be used to create "pulses" of light by alternating between a transmissive and darkened mode

In another embodiment, an LCD panel may be used to allow different patterns and/or intensities of light to reach two separate mold assemblies If the mold assemblies are bemg used to create lenses havmg significantly different powers, each mold assembly may require a significantly different light irradiation pattern and/or mtensity The use of an LCD filter may allow the irradiation of each of the mold assemblies to be controlled individually When non-LCD type filters are used, it may be necessary to mamtam a library of filters for use m the production of different types of prescnption lenses Typically, each individual prescπption will need a particular filter pattern to obtam a high quality lens Smce an LCD panel is programmable m a vaπety of patterns, it is believed that one may use a smgle LCD panel, rather than a library of filters The LCD panel may be programmed to fit the needs of the specific type of lens bemg formed The LCD panel filters may be coupled to a programmable logic device that may be used to design and store patterns for use duπng curmg Fig 7-10 show a number of patterns that may be generated on an LCD panel and used to filter activatmg light Each of these patterns is preferably used for the production of a lens havmg a specific prescnption power

The lens formmg apparatus may include a post-cure unit The post-cure unit is preferably configured to apply heat and activatmg light to mold assemblies or lenses disposed withm the post-cure unit

The lens formmg apparatus may also include a programmable controller configured to substantially simultaneously control the operation of the coatmg unit, the lens cunng unit and the post-cure unit The apparatus may mclude a number of light probes and temperature probes disposed withm the coatmg unit, lens curing unit, and the post-cure unit These probes preferably relay information about the operation of the individual units to the controller. The information relayed may be used to control the operation of the individual units. The operation of each of the units may also be controlled based on the prescnption of the lens bemg formed

The controller may be configured to control various operations of the coatmg unit For example, when a spm coatmg unit is used the controller may control the rotation of the lens or mold member dunng a coatmg process (e.g., whether the lens or mold members are rotated or not and/or the speed of rotation) and the operation of the coatmg unit lamps (e.g., whether the lamps are on or off and/or the time the lamps are on).

The controller may also be configured to control the vaπous operations of the lens curmg unit. Some of the operations that may be controlled or measured by the controller include: (1) measuring the ambient room temperature; (n) determining the dose of light (or initial dose of light m pulsed curing applications) required to cure the lens formmg composition, based on the ambient room temperature; (in) applying the activatmg light with an intensity and duration sufficient to equal the determined dose; (IV) measuring the composition's temperature response dunng and subsequent to the application of the dose of light; (v) calculating the dose required for the next application of activatmg light (in pulsed cuπng applications); (vi) applying the activatmg light with an mtensity and duration sufficient to equal the determined second dose; (vn) determining when the cuπng process is complete by monitormg the temperature response of the lens formmg composition duπng the application of activatmg light; (vui) turning the upper and lower light sources on and off mdependently; (IX) momtoπng the lamp temperature, and controlling the temperature of the lamps by activatmg coolmg fans proximate the lamps; and (x) turning the fans on/off or controlling the flow rate of an air stream produced by a fan to control the composition temperature;

The controller may also be configured to control the operation of the post-cure unit. Some of the operations that may be controlled mclude control of the operation of the lamps (e.g., whether the lamps are on or off and the time the lamps are on); and operation of the heatmg device (e.g., whether the heatmg unit is turned on or off and or the amount of heat produced by the heatmg device).

Additionally, the controller provides system diagnostics and information to the operator of the apparatus. The controller may notify the user when routine mamtenance is due or when a system error is detected The controller may also manage an mterlock system for safety and energy conservation purposes. The controller may prevent the lamps from operating when the operator may be exposed to light from the lamps.

The controller may also be configured to mteract with the operator. The controller preferably mcludes an mput device and a display screen. A number of operations controlled by the controller, as descπbed above, may be dependent on the mput of the operator. The controller may prepare a sequence of instructions based on the type of lens (clear, ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg, photochroimc, colored, etc.), prescnption, and type of coatmgs (e.g., scratch resistant, adhesion promoting, or tint) inputted by an operator.

A vaπety of lens formmg compositions may be cured to form a plastic eyeglass lens m the above descnbed apparatus. Colored lenses, photochromic lenses, and ultraviolet/visible light absorbing colorless lenses may be formed. The lens formmg compositions may be formulated such that the conditions for formmg the lens (e g., curmg conditions and post cure conditions) may be similar without regard to the lens being formed. In an embodiment, a clear lens may be formed under similar conditions used to form photochromic lenses by addmg a colorless, non-photochromic ultraviolet visible light absorbing compound to the lens forming composition. The cuπng process for forming a photochromic lens is such that higher doses of activatmg light than are typically used for the formation of a clear, non-ultraviolet/visible light absorbing lens may be required In an embodiment, ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds mav be added to a lens formmg composition to produce a substantially clear lens under the more mtense dosmg requirements used to form photochromic lenses The ultraviolet visible light absorbmg compounds may take the place of the photochromic compounds, makmg curing at higher doses possible for clear lenses An advantage of addmg the ultraviolet/visible light absorbers to the lens formmg composition is that the clear lens formed may offer better protection agamst ultraviolet/visible light rays than a clear lens formed without such compounds

An embodiment relates to an improved gasket for engagmg a mold The gasket is preferably configured to engage a first mold set for forming a first lens of a first power The gasket preferably includes at least four discrete projections for spacmg mold members of a mold set The projections are preferably arranged on an mteπor surface of the gasket The projections are preferably evenly spaced around the mtenor surface of the gasket, m a preferred embodiment, the spacmg between each projection is about 90 degrees

In another embodiment, an unproved gasket includes a fill port for receivmg a lens formmg composition while fully engaged to a mold set The fill port preferably extends from an inteπor surface of the gasket to an exteπor surface of the gasket Consequently, the gasket need not be partially disengaged from a mold member of a mold set in order to receive a lens formmg composition

In another embodiment, a mold/gasket assembly for makmg plastic prescnption lenses preferably mcludes a first mold set for formmg a first lens of a first power and a gasket for engagmg the first mold set The first mold set may contam a front mold member and a back mold member The back mold member is also known as the convex mold member The back mold member preferably defines the concave surface of a convex lens The gasket is preferably characterized by at least four discrete projections for spacmg the front mold member from the back mold member A mold cavity for retammg a lens formmg composition is preferably at least partially defined by the front mold member, the back mold member, and the gasket The back mold member preferably has a steep axis and a flat axis Each of the projections preferably forms an oblique angle with the steep and the flat axis of the mold members In a preferred embodiment, these angles may each be about 45 degrees Smce the gasket does not mclude a contmuous lip along its interior surface for spacmg mold members, as is conventional m the art, the gasket may be configured to engage a large vanety of mold sets For example, the gasket may be configured to engage a second mold set for formmg a second lens of a second power

In another embodiment, a mold gasket assembly for making plastic prescription lenses mcludes a mold set for formmg a lens and a gasket configured to engage the mold set The gasket is preferably characterized by a fill port for receivmg a lens formmg composition while the gasket is fully engaged to the mold The fill port preferably extends from an mteπor surface to an exteπor surface of the gasket The mold set preferably contains at least a front mold member and a back mold member A mold cavity for retammg a lens formmg composition is preferably at least partially defined by the front mold member, the back mold member, and the gasket

A method for makmg a plastic eyeglass lens is descπbed The method preferably includes engagmg a gasket with a first mold set for formmg a first lens of a first power The first mold set preferably contains at least a front mold member and a back mold member A mold cavity for retammg a lens forming composition may be at least partiallv defined by the front mold member, the back mold member, and the gasket The gasket is preferably characteπzed by at least four discrete projections arranged on an mtenor surface thereof for spacmg the front and back mold members Engagmg the gasket with the mold set preferably mcludes positioning the back mold members such that each of the projections forms an oblique angle with the steep and flat axis of the back mold member. In a preferred embodiment, this angle is about 45 degrees The method preferably further mcludes introducing a lens formmg composition mto the mold cavity and curmg the lens forming composition

An additional embodiment provides a method for makmg a plastic eyeglass lens. The method preferably includes engagmg a gasket with a first mold set for formmg a first lens of a first power The first mold set preferably contams at least a front mold member and a back mold member. A mold cavity for retammg a lens formmg composition may be at least partially defined by the front mold member, the back mold member, and the gasket Preferably, the method further mcludes introducing a lens formmg composition through a fill port, wherein the front and back mold members remam fully engaged with the gasket duπng the introduction of the lens formmg composition. The lens forming composition may then be cured.

In an embodiment, a composition that mcludes two or more photochromic compounds may further mclude a light effector composition to produce a lens that exhibits an activated color that differs from an activated color produced by the photochromic compounds without the light effector composition. The activated color is defined as the color a lens achieves when exposed to a photochromic activatmg light source (e g., sunlight) A photochromic activating light source is defined as any light source that produces light havmg a wavelength that causes a photochromic compound to become colored Photochromic activatmg light is defined as light that has a wavelength capable of causmg a photochromic compound to become colored The photochromic activatmg wavelength band is defined as the region of light that has a wavelength that causes coloring of photochromic compounds The light effector composition may mclude any compound that exhibits absorbance of at least a portion of the photochromic activatmg wavelength band. Light effector compositions may mclude photomitiators, ultraviolet/visible light absorbers, ultraviolet light stabilizers, and dyes. In this manner, the activated color of a lens may be altered without altering the ratio and or composition of the photochromic compounds By usmg a light effector composition, a smgle lens formmg composition may be used as a base solution to which a light effector may be added m order to alter the activated color of the formed lens. The addition of a light effector composition that absorbs photochromic activatmg light may cause a change m the activated color of the formed lens The change in activated color may be dependent on the range of photochromic activating light absorbed by the light effector composition. The use of different light effector compositions may allow an operator to produce photochromic lenses with a wide variety of activated colors (e g , red, orange, yellow, green, blue, mdigo, violet, gray, or brown). In an embodiment, an ophthalmic eyeglass lens may be made from an activatmg light curable lens forming composition compπsmg a monomer composition and a photoinitiator composition. The monomer composition preferably mcludes a polyethylenic functional monomer Preferably, the polyethylenic functional monomer composition mcludes an aromatic containing polyether polyethylenic functional monomer In one embodiment, the polyethylenic functional monomer is preferably an ethoxylated bisphenol A dι(meth) aery late The monomer composition may mclude additional monomers to modify the properties of the formed eyeglass lens and or the lens forming composition. Monomers which may be used in the monomer composition mclude polyethylenic functional monomers containing groups selected from acrylyl or methacrylyl

In one embodiment, the photoinitiator composition preferably mcludes phenyl bιs(2,4,6-tπmethylbenzoyl) phosphme oxide, commercially available from Ciba Additives m Tarrytown, New York under the trade name of Irgacure 819 In another embodiment, the photoinitiator composition may mclude a mixture of photommators Preferably, a mixture of Irgacure 819 and 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenyl ketone, commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Irgacure 184, is used

In another embodiment, an ophthalmic eyeglass lens may be made from an activating light curable lens formmg composition compπsmg a monomer composition, a photoinitiator composition and a co-mitiator composition An activatmg light absorbmg compound may also be present. An activating light absorbing compound is herein defined as a compound which absorbs at least a portion of the activating light. The monomer composition preferably mcludes a polyethylenic functional monomer. Preferably, the polyethylenic functional monomer is an aromatic contammg polyether polyethylenic functional monomer. In one embodiment, the polyethylenic functional monomer is preferably an ethoxylated bisphenol A dι(meth)acrylate.

The co-initiator composition preferably mcludes amine co-initiators. Preferably, acrylyl amrnes are included in the co-initiator composition In one embodiment, the co-initiator composition preferably mcludes a mixture of CN-384 and CN-386

Examples of activatmg light absorbmg compounds includes photochromic compounds, UV stabilizers, UV absorbers, and/or dyes

In another embodiment, the controller is preferably configured to run a computer software program which, upon input of the eyeglass prescnption, will supply the identification markmgs of the appropπate front mold, back mold and gasket The controller may also be configured to store the prescnption data and to use the prescnption data to determine curmg conditions. The controller may be configured to operate the curmg unit to produce the appropπate cuπng conditions.

In one embodiment, the lens formmg composition may be irradiated with contmuous activated light to initiate cuπng of the lens forming composition. Subsequent to initiating the cuπng, the lens formmg composition may be treated with additional activatmg light and heat to further cure the lens formmg composition

In another embodiment, the lens formmg composition may be irradiated with contmuous activated light in a heated curmg chamber to initiate cuπng of the lens formmg composition. Subsequent to initiating the cuπng, the lens formmg composition may be treated with additional activatmg light and heat to further cure the lens formmg composition

In another embodiment, an apparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens is descπbed. The apparatus mcludes a coatmg unit and a lens cuπng unit. The coatmg unit may be configured to coat either mold members or lenses Preferably, the coatmg unit is a spm coatmg unit. The lens cuπng unit may be configured to substantially simultaneously direct activatmg light and heat toward mold members The mold members are part of a mold assembly that may be placed withm the lens cuπng unit. Dependmg on the type of lens formmg composition used, the apparatus may be used to form photochromic and non-photochromic lenses The apparatus is preferably configured to allow the operation of both the coatmg unit and the lens curmg unit substantially simultaneously The apparatus is also configured to allow curing, post-cure and anneal processes to be performed m the lens curmg unit. The curmg or post-cure processes may be performed substantially simultaneously with an anneal process withm the lens cuπng apparatus

In another embodiment, a system for dispensing a heated polymeπzable lens forming composition is descnbed The dispensmg system includes a body configured to hold the lens forming composition, a heatmg system coupled to the body for heatmg the monomer solution, a conduit coupled to the body for transferring the lens forming composition out of the body, and an elongated member positioned withm the conduit for controlling the flow of the lens forming composition through the conduit. The elongated member is positionable withm the conduit m a closed position such that flow of the lens formmg composition through the conduit is inhibited The elongated member may also be positioned withm the conduit m an open position such that the lens formmg composition flows through the conduit. An elastic member is preferably coupled to the elongated member The elastic member exerts a force on the elongated member that causes the elongated member moves from the closed position positioned to the open position A movable member is preferably coupled to the conduit and the elongated member. The movable member is preferably configured to control the position of the elongated member In another embodiment, a procedure for formmg flat-top bifocal lenses is descnbed Flat-top bifocals mclude a far vision correction zone and a near vision coπection region. The far vision correction zone is the portion of the lens which allows the user to see far away objects more clearly The near vision correction zone is the region that allows the user to see nearby objects clearer The near vision correction zone is characterized by a semicircular protrusion which extends out from the outer surface of an eyeglass lens. To reduce the mcidence of premature release in flat-top bifocal lenses, it is preferred that polymerization of the lens formmg composinon m the front portion of the near vision correction zone is initiated before the portion of the lens formmg composition in the far vision correction zone proximate the back mold member is substantially gelled. Preferably, this may be achieved by irradiating the front mold with activatmg light pnor to irradiating the back mold with activatmg light. Alternatively, the mcidence of premature release may also be reduced if the front portion of the near vision correction zone is gelled before gelation of the lens for mg composition extends from the back mold member to the front mold member.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

The above bπef descπption as well as further objects, features and advantages of the methods and apparatus of the present invention will be more fully appreciated by reference to the following detailed descπption of presently preferred but nonetheless illustrative embodiments m accordance with the present mvention when taken m conjunction with the accompanymg drawings in which:

Fig. 1 depicts a perspective view of a plastic lens formmg apparatus. Fig. 2 depicts a perspective view of a spm coatmg unit

Fig. 3 depicts a cut-away side view of a spm coatmg unit.

Fig. 4 depicts a perspective view of a plastic lens formmg apparatus with a portion of the body removed

Fig 5 depicts a perspective view of the components of a lens cunng unit

Fig. 6 depicts a perspective view of a plastic lens formmg apparatus with a portion of the body removed and the coatmg units removed.

Fig 7-10 depict vaπous LCD filter patterns

Fig 11 depicts a mold assembly

Fig. 12 depicts a post-cure unit

Fig 13 depicts a view of an embodiment of a heat source and a heat distributor Fig. 14 depicts a view of various embodiments of a heat source and heat distnbutors.

Fig 15 depicts a view of an embodiment of a heat source and a heat distπbutor

Fig 16 depicts a view of an embodiment of two mold members and a gasket

Fig 17 depicts a plot of the temperature of the lens forming composition versus time durmg the application of activatmg light pulses

Fig 18 depicts a schematic diagram of a lens curmg apparatus with a light sensor and controller.

Fig. 19 depicts a view of an embodiment of a system simultaneously employmg both a flash light source and a contmuous activatmg (e.g., fluorescent) light source.

Fig. 20 depicts an embodiment of a system simultaneously employing two flash light sources. Fig. 21 depicts an embodiment of a system employing an activating light controller.

Fig. 22 depicts a graph illustratmg a temperature profile of a contmuous radiation cycle.

Fig. 23 depicts a graph illustrating temperature profiles for a contmuous irradiation cycle and a pulse irradiation cycle employed with a mold gasket set having a 3. OOD base curve, and while applying cooled air at 58 ° F to the mold/gasket set Fig. 24 depicts a chart illustrating qualitative relationships among cunng cycle vanables.

Fig. 25 depicts a graph illustratmg temperature profiles for one curmg cycle for a mold/gasket set havmg a 6 OOD base curve and used with three different light levels.

Fig. 26 depicts a graph illustratmg contmuous and pulsed temperature profiles for a cuπng cycle employmg a mold/gasket set with a 6 OOD base curve Fig. 27 depicts a graph illustratmg contmuous and pulsed temperature profiles for a curing cycle employmg a mold gasket set with a 4.50D base curve

Fig. 28 depicts a graph illustratmg contmuous and pulsed temperature profiles for a cuπng cycle employmg a mold gasket set with a 3. OOD base curve

Fig. 29 depicts a cross sectional view of a flat-top bifocal mold Fig. 30 depicts a plot of % transmittance of light versus wavelength for a photochromic lens.

Fig. 31 depicts a plot of % transmittance of light versus wavelength for both a colorless lens contammg ultraviolet/visible light absorbers and a lens contammg no ultraviolet/visible light absorbers

Fig. 32 depicts an isometπc view of an embodiment of a gasket

Fig. 33 depicts a top view of the gasket of Fig 1 Fig. 34 depicts a cross-sectional view of an embodiment of a mold/gasket assembly

Fig. 35 depicts an lsometnc view of an embodiment of a gasket

Fig. 36 depicts a top view of the gasket of Fig 4

Fig. 37 depicts a graph showmg the absorption ranges of a vaπety of photochromic compounds and light effectors Fig. 38 depicts a plastic lens formmg apparatus which mcludes two lens curing units

Fig 39 depicts chemical structure of acrylated amines

Figs 40 - 42 depict a front panel of a controller with a display screen depicting vaπous display menus

Fig 43 depicts a cross-sectional side view of a heated polymeπzable lens formmg composition dispensmg system Fig. 44-46 depict cross-sectional side views of a conduit for a heated polymeπzable lens formmg composition dispensmg system

Fig 47 depicts a cross-sectional perspective view of a movable member for a heated polymeπzable lens formmg composition dispensing system Fig 48 depicts a cross-sectional side view of a movable member for a heated polymenzable lens formmg composition dispensmg system.

Fig. 49 depicts a topographical view of a groove formed m a movable member for a heated polymenzable lens forming composition dispensmg system.

Fig. 50 depicts a side view of a heated polymenzable lens forming composition dispensmg system mounted on a platform.

Fig. 51 depicts a front view of a lens cuπng unit.

Fig. 52 depicts a top view of a lens curmg unit.

Fig. 53 depicts a mold assembly for makmg flat-top bifocal lenses.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS

Apparatus, operatmg procedures, equipment, systems, methods, and compositions for lens cunng usmg activatmg light are available from Rapid Cast, Inc., Q2100, Inc., and Fast Cast, Inc. m Louisville, Kentucky.

Referring now to Fig. 1, a plastic lens curmg apparatus is generally indicated by reference numeral 10. As shown m Fig. 1, lens formmg apparatus 10 mcludes at least one coatmg unit 20, a lens curmg unit 30, a post-cure unit 40, and a controller 50. Preferably, apparatus 10 mcludes two coatmg units 20. Coatmg unit 20 is preferably configured to apply a coatmg layer to a mold member or a lens. Preferably, coatmg unit 20 is a spm coatmg unit. Lens cunng unit 30 mcludes an activatmg light source for producmg activatmg light. As used herem "activatmg light" means light that may affect a chemical change Activatmg light may mclude ultraviolet light (e.g., light havmg a wavelength between about 300 nm to about 400 nm), actmic light, visible light or mfrared light Generally, any wavelength of light capable of affectmg a chemical change may be classified as activatmg. Chemical changes may be manifested m a number of forms. A chemical change may mclude, but is not limited to, any chemical reaction that causes a polymerization to take place. Preferably the chemical change causes the formation of an initiator species withm the lens forming composition, the initiator species bemg capable of initiating a chemical polymerization reaction. The activatmg light source is preferably configured to direct light toward a mold assembly. Post-cure unit 40 is preferably configured to complete the polymerization of plastic lenses Post-cure unit 40 preferably includes an activatmg light source and a heat source. Controller 50 is preferably a programmable logic controller. Controller 50 is preferably coupled to coatmg units 20, lens cunng unit 30, and post-cure unit 40, such that the controller is capable of substantially simultaneously operating the three units 20. 30, and 40. Controller 50 may be a computer A coatmg unit for applying a coating composition to a lens or a mold member and then curing the coatmg composition is described m U.S. Patents 4,895,102 to Kachel et al, 3,494,326 to Upton, and 5,514,214 to Joel et al (all of which are incorporated herein by reference) In addition, the apparatus shown m Figs 2 and 3 may also be used to apply coatings to lenses or mold members.

Fig. 2 depicts a pair of spm coatmg units 102 and 104 These spm coatmg units may be used to apply a scratch resistant coating or a tint coating to a lens or mold member. Each of the coating units mcludes an opening through which an operator may apply lenses and lens mold assemblies to a holder 108. Holder 108 is preferably partially surrounded by barrier 114. Barrier 114 is preferably coupled to a dish 115. As shown in Fig. 3, the dish edges may be inclined to form a peripheral sidewall 121 that merges with barrier 114. The bottom 117 of the dish is preferably substantially flat. The flat bottom preferably has a circular opening that allows an elongated member 109 coupled to lens holder 108 to extend through the dish 115.

Holder 108 is preferably coupled to a motor 112 via elongated member 109. Motor 112 is preferably configured to cause rotation of holder 108. In such a case, motor 112 is preferably configured to cause rotation of elongated member 109, that in turn causes the rotation of holder 108. The coating unit 102/104, may also include an electronic controller 140. Electronic controller 140 is preferably coupled to motor 112 to control the rate at which holder 108 is rotated by motor 112. Electronic controller 140 may be coupled to a programmable logic controller, such as controller 50, shown in Fig. 1. The programmable logic controller may send signals to the electronic controller to control the rotational speed of holder 108. Preferably, motor 112 is configured to rotate holder 108 at different rates. Motor 112 is preferably capable of rotating the lens or mold member at a rate of up to 1500 revolutions per minute ("RPM").

In one embodiment, barrier 114 has an interior surface that may be made or lined with an absorbent material such as foam rubber. Preferably, this absorbent material is disposable and removable. The absorbent material absorbs any liquids that fall off a lens or mold member during use. Alternatively, the interior surface of barrier 114 may be substantially non-absorbent, allowing any liquids used during the coating process to move down barrier 114 into dish 115.

Coating units 20, are preferably positioned in a top portion 12 of lens forming apparatus 10, as depicted in Fig. 1. A cover 22 is preferably coupled to body 14 of the lens forming apparatus to allow top portion 12 to be covered during use. A light source 23 is preferably positioned on an inner surface of cover 22. The light source includes at least one lamp 24, preferably two or more lamps, positioned on the inner surface of cover 22. Lamps 24 may be positioned such that the lamps are oriented above the coating units 20 when cover 22 is closed. Lamps 24 preferably emit activating light upon the lenses or mold members positioned within coating units 20. Lamps may have a variety of shapes including, but not limited to, linear (as depicted in Fig. 1), square, rectangular, circular, or oval. Activating light sources preferably emit light having a wavelength that will initiate curing of various coating materials. For example, most currently used coating materials are preferably curable by activating light having wavelengths in the ultraviolet region, therefore the light sources should exhibit strong ultraviolet light emission. The light sources should, preferably, produce minimal heat during use. Thus, lamps 24 will preferably have low heat output. Lamps that exhibit strong ultraviolet light emission have a peak output at a wavelength in the ultraviolet light region, between about 200 nm to about 400 nm, preferably the peak output is between about 200 nm to 300 nm, and more preferably at about 254 nm. In one embodiment, lamps 24 may be lamps that have a peak output in the ultraviolet light region, and have relatively low heat output. Such lights are commonly known as "germicidal" lights and any such light may be used. A "germicidal" light emitting light with a peak output in the desired ultraviolet region is commercially available from Voltarc, Inc. of Fairfield, Connecticut as model UV-WX G10T5. An advantage of usmg a spin coatmg unit is that lamps of a vaπety of shapes may be used (e g , lmear lamps) for the curmg of the coatmg matenals In one embodiment, a coatmg mateπal is preferably cured in a substantially uniform manner to ensure that the coating is formed uniformly on the mold member or lens With a spm coatmg unit, the object to be coated may be spun at speeds high enough to ensure that a substantially uniform distπbution of light reaches the object during the curing process, regardless of the shape of the light source The use of a spin coatmg unit preferably allows the use of commercially available lmear light sources for the cuπng of coatmg matenals

A switch may be incorporated mto cover 22 The switch is preferably electrically coupled to light source 23 such that the switch must be activated pπor to turning the light source on Preferably, the switch is positioned such that closmg the cover causes the switch to become activated In this manner, the lights will preferably remam off until the cover is closed, thus preventing inadvertent exposure of an operator to the light from light source 23

Duπng use a lens or lens mold assembly may be placed on the lens holder 108 The lens holder 108 may mclude a suction cup connected to a metal bar The concave surface of the suction cup may be attachable to a face of a mold or lens, and the convex surface of the suction cup may be attached to a metal bar The metal bar may be coupled to motor 112 The lens holder may also mclude movable arms and a spring assembly that may be together operable to hold a lens agamst the lens holder with spring tension dunng use

As shown m Fig 4, the cunng unit 30 may mclude an upper light source 214, a lens drawer assembly 216, and a lower light source 218 Lens drawer assembly 216 preferably includes a mold assembly holder 220, more preferably at least two mold assembly holders 220 Each of the mold assembly holders 220 is preferably configured to hold a parr of mold members that together with a gasket form a mold assembly The lens drawer assembly 216 is preferably s dingly mounted on a guide Dunng use, mold assemblies may be placed m the mold assembly holders 220 while the lens drawer assembly is m the open position (I e , when the door extends from the front of the lens cuπng unit) After the mold assemblies have been loaded mto the mold holder 220 the door may be slid mto a closed position, with the mold assemblies directly under the upper light source 214 and above the lower light source 218 Vents (not shown) may be placed m communication with the lens curmg unit to allow a stream of air to be directed toward the mold members when the mold members are positioned beneath the upper lamps An exhaust fan (not shown) may communicate with the vents to improve the circulation of air flowing through the lens cunng unit

As shown in Figs 4 and 5, it is preferred that the upper light source 214 and lower light source 216 mclude a plurality of activatmg light generatmg devices or lamps 240 Preferably, the lamps are onented proximate each other to form a row of lights, as depicted m Fig 4 Preferably, three or four lamps are positioned to provide substantially uniform radiation over the entire surface of the mold assembly to be cured The lamps 240, preferably generate activatmg light Lamps 240 may be supported by and electncally connected to suitable fixtures 242 Lamps 240 may generate either ultraviolet light, actmic light, visible light, and or mfrared light The choice of lamps is preferably based on the monomers used m the lens formmg composition In one embodiment, the activating light may be generated from a fluorescent lamp The fluorescent lamp preferably has a strong emission spectra m the 380 to 490 nm region A fluorescent lamp emitting activating light with the descnbed wavelengths is commercially available from Philips as model TLD-15W/03 In another embodiment, the lamps may be ultraviolet lights In one embodiment, the activatmg light sources may be turned on and off quickly between exposures Flasher ballasts 250, depicted m Fig 6, may be used for this function The flasher ballast may be positioned beneath the coatmg unit A flasher ballast 250 may operate m a standby mode wherem a low current is supplied to the lamp filaments to keep the filaments warm and thereby reduce the strike time of the lamp Such a ballast is commercially available from Magnatek, Inc of Bridgeport, Connecticut Power supply 252 may also be located proximate the flasher ballasts, underneath the coatmg unit

Fig 18 schematically depicts a light control system The light sources 214 in lens cunng unit 30 apply light towards the mold assembly 352 A light sensor 700 may be located adjacent the light sources 214 Preferably, the light sensor 700 is a photoresistor light sensor (photodiodes or other light sensors may also be usable in this application) The light sensor 700 with a filter 750 may be connected to lamp dnver 702 via wires 704 Lamp dnver 702 sends a current through the light sensor 700 and receives a return signal from the light sensor 700 The return signal may be compared agamst an adjustable set pomt, and then the electπcal frequency sent to the light sources 214 via wires 706 may be vaned dependmg on the differences between the set pomt and the signal received from the light sensor 700 Preferably, the light output is mamtamed withm about +/- 1 0 percent One "lamp dnver" or light controller is a Mercron Model FX0696-4 and Model FX06120-6 (Mercron,

Inc , Dallas, Texas, U S A ) These light controllers are descnbed m U S patents 4,717,863 and 4,937,470

In an embodiment, a flash lamp emits activatmg light pulses to cure the lens formmg matenal It is believed that a flash lamp would provide a smaller, cooler, less expensive, and more reliable light source than other sources The power supply for a flash lamp tends to draw relatively minimal current while chargmg its capacitor bank The flash lamp discharges the stored energy on a microsecond scale to produce very high peak mtensities from the flash tube itself Thus flash lamps tend to require less power for operation and generate less heat than other light sources used for activatmg light cunng A flash lamp may also be used to cure a lens coatmg

In an embodiment, the flash lamp used to direct activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members is a xenon light source The lens coatmg may also be cured usmg a xenon light source Referring to Fig 21, xenon light source 980 preferably contains photostrobe 992 havmg a tube 996 and electrodes to allow the transmission of activatmg light The tube may mclude borosi cate glass or quartz A quartz tube will generally withstand about 3 to 10 times more power than a hard glass tube The tube may be m the shape of a πng, U, helix, or it may be lmear The tube may mclude capacitive trigger electrode 995 The capacitive tngger electrode may mclude a wire, silver stnp, or conductive coatmg located on the extenor of tube 996 The xenon light source is preferably adapted to deliver pulses of light for a duration of less than about 1 second, more preferably between about 1/10 of a second and about 1/1000 of a second, and more preferably still between about 1/400 of a second and 1/600 of a second The xenon source may be adapted to deliver light pulses about every 4 seconds or less The relatively high mtensity of the xenon lamp and short pulse duration may allow rapid cunng of the lens formmg composition without imparting significant radiative heat to the composition In an embodiment, controller 990 (shown in Fig 21) controls the intensity and duration of activatmg light pulses delivered from activatmg light source 980 and the tune interval between pulses, shown m Fig 19 activating light source 980 may include capacitor 994 that stores the energy required to deliver the pulses of activatmg light Capacitor 994 may be adapted to allow pulses of activatmg light to be delivered as frequently as desired Temperature monitor 997 may be located at a number of positions withm mold chamber 984 The temperature monitor may measure the temperature withm the chamber and/or the temperature of air exitmg the chamber The system may be configured to send a signal to cooler 988 and or distπbutor 986 (shown m Fig 19) to vary the amount and/or temperature of the coolmg air The temperature monitor mav also determine the temperature at any of a number of locations proximate the mold cavity and send a signal to controller 990 to vary the pulse duration, pulse mtensity, or tune between pulses as a function of a temperature withm mold chamber 984 In an embodiment, light sensor 999 may be used to determine the mtensity of activatmg light emanating from source 980 The light sensor is preferably configured to send a signal to controller 990, that is preferably configured to mamtam the mtensity of the activating light at a selected level Filter 998 may be positioned between activating light source 980 and light sensor 999 and is preferably configured to inhibit non-activatmg light rays from contacting light sensor 999, while allowing activatmg rays to contact the sensor In one embodiment, the filter may mclude 365 N glass or any other material adapted to filter non-activating light (e g , visible light) and transmit activatmg light

In an embodiment, more than one activatmg light source may be used to simultaneously apply activatmg pulses to the lens formmg composition Such an embodiment is shown m Fig 20 Activatmg light sources 980a and 980b may be positioned around mold chamber 985 so that pulses may be directed toward the front face of a lens and the back face of a lens substantially simultaneously Mold chamber 985 is preferably adapted to hold a mold m a vertical position such that pulses from activatmg light source 980a may be applied to the face of a first mold member, while pulses from activatmg light source 980b may be applied to the face of a second mold member In an embodiment, activatmg light source 980b applies activatmg light pulses to a back surface of a lens more frequently than xenon source 980a applies activatmg light pulses to a front surface of a lens Activatmg light sources 980a and 980b may be configured such that one source applies light to mold chamber 984 from a position above the chamber while the other activating light source applies light to the mold chamber from a position below the chamber

In an embodiment, a xenon light source and a relatively low intensity (e g , fluorescent) light source may be used to simultaneously apply activatmg light to a mold chamber As illustrated m Fig 19, xenon source 980 may apply activating light to one side of mold chamber 984 while low mtensity fluorescent source 982 applies activating light to another side of the mold chamber Fluorescent source 982 may mclude a compact fluorescent "light bucket" or a diffused fluorescent lamp The fluorescent light source may deliver contmuous or substantially pulsed activatmg light as the xenon source delivers activating light pulses The fluorescent source may deliver continuous activatmg light rays havmg a relatively low intensity of less than about 100 micro watts/cm²

In one embodiment, an upper light filter 254 may be positioned between upper light source 214 and lens drawer assembly 216, as depicted m Fig 5 A lower light filter 256 may be positioned between lower light source 218 and lens drawer assembly 216 The upper light filter 254 and lower light filter 256 are shown m Fig 5 as bemg made of a smgle filter member, however, those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that each of the filters may include two or more filter members The components of upper light filter 254 and lower light filter 256 are preferably modified dependmg upon the characteristics of the lens to be molded For mstance, m an embodiment for makmg negative lenses, the upper light filter 254 includes a plate of Pyrex glass that may be frosted on both sides restmg upon a plate of clear Pyrex glass The lower light filter 256 mcludes a plate of Pyrex glass, frosted on one side, restmg upon a plate of clear Pvrex glass with a device for reducing the intensity of activatmg light incident upon the center portion relative to the edge portion of the mold assembly

Conversely, m a preferred arrangement for producmg positive lenses, the upper light filter 254 mcludes a plate of Pyrex glass frosted on one or both sides and a plate of clear Pyrex glass resting upon the plate of frosted Pyrex glass with a device for reducmg the intensity of activating light mcident upon the edge portion m relation to the center portion of the mold assembly The lower light filter 256 mcludes a plate of clear Pyrex glass frosted on one side restmg upon a plate of clear Pyrex glass with a device for reducmg the mtensity of activating light mcident upon the edge portion in relation to the center portion of the mold assembly In this arrangement, in place of a device for reducmg the relative mtensity of activating light mcident upon the edge portion of the lens, the diameter of the aperture 250 may be reduced to achieve the same result, i.e , to reduce the relative mtensity of activatmg light mcident upon the edge portion of the mold assembly

It should be apparent to those skilled m the art that each filter 254 or 256 could be composed of a plurality of filter members or include any other means or device effective to reduce the light to its desired mtensity, to diffuse the light and/or to create a light mtensity gradient across the mold assemblies Alternately, m certain embodiments no filter elements may be used. In one embodiment, upper light filter 254 or lower light filter 256 each mclude at least one plate of Pyrex glass having at least one frosted surface Also, either or both of the filters may mclude more than one plate of Pyrex glass each frosted on one or both surfaces, and or one or more sheets of tracing paper After passmg through frosted Pyrex glass, the activatmg light is believed to have no sharp mtensity discontinuities. By removmg the sharp mtensity distnbutions a reduction m optical distortions m the finished lens may be achieved Those of ordmary skill m the art will recognize that other means may be used to diffuse the activatmg light so that it has no sharp mtensity discontinuities.

In another embodiment, upper light filter 254 and lower light filter 256 may be liquid crystal display ("LCD") panels. Preferably, the LCD panel is a monochrome trans-flective panel with the back light and reflector removed A monochrome trans-flective LCD panel is manufactured by Sharp Corporation and may be purchased from Earth Computer Products. The LCD panels are preferably positioned such that light from the light sources passes through the LCD panels to the lens drawer assembly 216. The mtensity of the light is preferably reduced as the light passes through the LCD panel. The LCD panel is preferably programmable such that the light transmissibi ty of the LCD panel may be altered. In use, a predetermined pattern of light and dark regions may be displayed on the LCD panel. As hght from the light sources hits these regions the light may be transmitted through the light regions with a higher mtensity than through the darker regions In this manner, the pattern of light and dark areas on the LCD panel may be manipulated such that light havmg the optimal cunng mtensity pattern hits the mold assemblies. Although the LCD panel is not entirely opaque m its blackened out state, it may still reduce the mtensity of light reachmg the mold assemblies Typically, the light transmission ratio between the lightest and darkest regions of the LCD panel is about 4 to 1 The use of an LCD panel as a light filter offers a number of advantages over the conventional filter systems descπbed earlier One advantage is that the filter pattern may be changed actively duπng a cunng cycle For example, the pattern of light and dark regions may be manipulated such that a lens is initially cured from the center of the lens then the cunng may be gradually expanded to the outer edges of the lens. This type of cuπng pattern may allow a more uniformly cured lens to be formed In some instances, cuπng m this manner may also be used to alter the final power of the formed lens.

Another advantage is that the LCD panel may be used as a partial shutter to reduce the mtensity of light reachmg the mold assembly By blackenmg the entire LCD panel the amount of light reaching any portion of the mold assembly may be reduced In this manner, the LCD may be used to create "pulses" of light by alternating between a transmissive and darkened mode By havmg the LCD panel create these light "pulses" a flash ballast or similar pulse generatmg equipment may be unnecessary Thus, the light sources may remam on durmg the entire cuπng cycle, with the LCD panel creating the curmg light pulses This may also increase the lifetime of the lamps, smce the rapid cyclmg of lamps tends to reduce the lamps' lifetime.

In another embodiment, an LCD panel may be used to allow different patterns and or intensities of light to reach two separate mold assemblies. As depicted in Fig 4, the lens cuπng unit may be configured to substantially simultaneously irradiate two mold assemblies If the mold assemblies are bemg used to create lenses havmg the same power the light irradiation pattern and/or mtensity may be substantially the same for each mold assembly. If the mold assemblies are being used to create lenses havmg significantly different powers, each mold assembly may require a significantly different light irradiation pattern and/or mtensity The use of an LCD filter may allow the irradiation of each of the mold assemblies to be controlled individually For example, a first mold assembly may require a pulsed cunng scheme, while the other mold assembly may require a contmuous irradiation pattern through a patterned filter. The use of an LCD panel may allow such lenses to be formed substantially simultaneously. A first portion of the LCD panel between the light source and the first molding apparatus may be alternatively switched between a darkened and an undarkened state While a first portion is used to create pulses of activatmg ght, another portion of the LCD panel may be formed mto the specific pattern required for the contmuous cuπng of the other lens.

When non-LCD type filters are used it may be necessary to mamtam a library of filters for use m the production of different types of prescnption lenses Typically, each individual prescnption will need a particular filter pattern to obtain a high quality lens. Smce an LCD panel may be programmed mto a vaπety of patterns, it may be possible to rely on a smgle LCD panel, rather than a library of filters. The LCD panel may be programmed to fit the needs of the specific type of lens bemg formed Such a system also minimizes the need for human intervention, smce a controller may be programmed for a desired pattern, rather than the operator havmg to choose among a "library" of filters.

The control of the temperature of an LCD panel filter duπng a cuπng cycle may be important for achievmg a proper lens. In general as the temperature of a panel is mcreased the lighter regions of the panel may become darker (i.e., less light transmissive). Thus, it may be necessary to control the temperature of the LCD panel duπng cunng to ensure that light havmg the appropnate mtensity reaches the mold assemblies. A coolmg system or heatmg system may therefore, be coupled to the LCD panel to ensure proper temperature control In one embodiment, it is preferred that a substantially transparent heater is attached to the LCD panel. By mcreasmg the temperature of the LCD panel the hght transmissibility of the panel may be decreased It is preferred that an LCD panel be mamtamed above room temperature since at room temperature the panel may be too light to sufficiently inhibit the light from reachmg the mold assemblies In order to obtam a proper pattern of light and dark regions when the LCD panel is heated it may be necessary to adjust the contrast of the panel This adjustment may be done either manually or electronically The LCD panel filters may be coupled to a programmable logic device that may be used to design and store patterns for use duπng curmg Fig 7-10 show a number of patterns which may be generated on an LCD panel and used to filter activating light Each of these patterns is preferably used for the production of a lens havmg a specific prescription power. As shown m Fig 11, the mold assembly 352 may mclude opposed mold members 378, separated by an annular gasket 380 to define a lens moldmg cavity 382 The opposed mold members 378 and the annular gasket 380 may be shaped and selected in a manner to produce a lens havmg a desired diopter.

The mold members 378 may be formed of any suitable matenal that will permit the passage of activatmg hght. The mold members 378 are preferably formed of glass. Each mold member 378 has an outer peπpheral surface 384 and a pair of opposed surfaces 386 and 388 with the surfaces 386 and 388 being precision ground Preferably the mold members 378 have desirable activatmg light transmission charactenstics and both the casting surface 386 and non-castmg surface 388 preferably have no surface aberrations, waves, scratches or other defects as these may be reproduced m the finished lens

As noted above, the mold members 378 are preferably adapted to be held in spaced apart relation to define a lens moldmg cavity 382 between the facmg surfaces 386 thereof The mold members 378 are preferably held m a spaced apart relation by a T-shaped flexible annular gasket 380 that seals the lens moldmg cavity 382 from the exteπor of the mold members 378. In use, the gasket 380 may be supported on a portion of the mold assembly holder 220 (shown m Fig. 4)

In this manner, the upper or back mold member 390 has a convex inner surface 386 while the lower or front mold member 392 has a concave inner surface 386 so that the resultmg lens moldmg cavity 382 is preferably shaped to form a lens with a desired configuration. Thus, by selecting the mold members 378 with a desired surface 386, lenses with different charactenstics, such as focal lengths, may be produced

Rays of activating light emanating from lamps 240 preferably pass through the mold members 378 and act on a lens formmg matenal disposed m the mold cavity 382 m a manner discussed below so as to form a lens. As noted above, the rays of activating light may pass through a suitable filter 254 or 256 before impmgmg upon the mold assembly 352.

The mold members 378, preferably, are formed from a matenal that will not transmit activatmg light havmg a wavelength below approximately 300 nm. Suitable matenals are Schott Crown, S-l or S-3 glass manufactured and sold by Schott Optical Glass Inc., of Duryea, Pennsylvania or Corning 8092 glass sold by Corning Glass of Corning, New York A source of flat-top or smgle vision molds may be Augen Lens Co. m San

Diego, California.

The annular gasket 380 may be formed of vmyl mateπal that exhibits good lip finish and maintains sufficient flexibility at conditions throughout the lens cuπng process. In an embodiment, the annular gasket 380 is formed of si cone rubber material such as GE SE6035 which is commercially available from General Electπc. In another preferred embodiment, the annular gasket 380 is formed of copolymers of ethylene and vinyl acetate which are commercially available from E I DuPont de Nemours & Co under the trade name ELVAX7. Prefeπed ELVAX7 resins are ELVAX7 350 having a melt index of 17 3-20 9 dg/min and a vinyl acetate content of 24.3-25 7 wt. %, ELVAX7 250 having a melt index of 22.0-28 0 dg/min and a vmyl acetate content of 27 2-28 8 wt %, ELVAX7 240 having a melt mdex of 38 0-48 0 dg/mm and a vmyl acetate content of 27.2-28.8 wt %, and ELVAX7 150 havmg a melt mdex of 38 0-48 0 dg/min and a vmyl acetate content of 32 0-34 0 wt % In another embodiment, the gasket may be made from polyethylene Regardless of the particular mateπal, the gaskets 80 may be prepared by conventional injection moldmg or compression moldmg techniques which are well-known by those of ordmary skill m the art In another embodiment, Figs 32 and 33 present an lsometπc view and a top view, respectively, of a gasket 510 Gasket 510 may be annular, and is preferably configured to engage a mold set for formmg a mold assembly Gasket 510 is preferably characterized by at least four discrete projections 511 Gasket 510 preferably has an exteπor surface 514 and an mtenor surface 512 The projections 511 are preferably arranged upon inner surface 512 such that they are substantially coplanar The projections are preferably evenly spaced around the mtenor surface of the gasket Preferably, the spacmg along the mtenor surface of the gasket between each projection is about 90 degrees Although four projections are preferred, it is envisioned that more than four could be incorporated The gasket 510 may be formed of a si cone rubber matenal such as GE SE6035 which is commercially available from General Electπc In another embodiment, the gasket 510 may be formed of copolymers of ethylene and vmyl acetate which are commercially available from E I DuPont de Nemours & Co under the trade name ELVAX7 In another embodiment, the gasket 510 may be formed from polyethylene

As shown m Fig 34, projections 511 are preferably capable of spacmg mold members 526 of a mold set Mold members 526 may be any of the vanous types and sizes of mold members that are well known m the art A mold cavity 528 at least partially defined by mold members 526 and gasket 510, is preferably capable of retammg a lens formmg composition Preferably, the seal between gasket 510 and mold members 526 is as complete as possible The height of each projection 511 preferably controls the spacmg between mold members 526, and thus the thickness of the finished lens By selecting proper gaskets and mold sets, lens cavities may be created to produce lenses of vanous powers

A mold assembly consists of two mold members A front mold member 526a and a back mold member 526b, as depicted m Fig 34 The back mold member is also known as the convex mold member The back mold member preferably defines the concave surface of a convex lens Referring back to Figs 32 and 33, locations where the steep axis 522 and the flat axis 524 of the back mold member 526b preferably e m relation to gasket 510 have been mdicated In conventional gaskets, a raised p may be used to space mold members The thickness of this p vanes over the circumference of the lip m a manner appropnate with the type of mold set a particular gasket is designed to be used with In order to have the flexibility to use a certain number of molds, an equivalent amount of conventional gaskets is typically kept m stock

However, withm a class of mold sets there may be pomts along the outer curvature of a the back mold member where each member of a class of back mold members is shaped similarly These pomts may be found at locations along gasket 510, oblique to the steep and flat axes of the mold members In a preferred embodiment, these pomts are at about 45 degree angles to the steep and flat axes of the mold members By using discrete projections 511 to space the mold members at these points, an mdividual gasket could be used with a vaπety of mold sets Therefore, the number of gaskets that would have to be kept m stock may be greatly reduced

In addition, gasket 510 may include a recession 518 for receiving a lens formmg composition Lip 520 may be pulled back m order to allow a lens forming composition to be introduced mto the cavity Vent ports 516 may be incorporated to facilitate the escape of air from the mold cavity as a lens formmg composition is introduced A method for makmg a plastic eyeglass lenses usmg gasket 510 is presented. The method preferably mcludes engagmg gasket 510 with a first mold set for formmg a first lens of a first power The first mold set preferably contams at least a front mold member 526a and a back mold member 526b A mold cavity for retammg a lens forming composition may be at least partially defined by mold members 526a and 526b and gasket 510 Gasket 510 is preferably characterized by at least four discrete projections 511 arranged on mtenor surface 512 for spacmg the mold members. Engagmg gasket 510 with the mold set preferably includes positioning the mold members such that each of the projections 511 forms an oblique angle with the steep and flat axis of the back mold member 526b. In a preferred embodiment, this angle is about 45 degrees The method preferably further mcludes introducing a lens forming composition mto mold cavity 528 and cuπng the lens formmg composition. Cuπng may mclude exposmg the composition to activatmg light and/or thermal radiation After the lens is cured, the first mold set may be removed from the gasket and the gasket may then be engaged with a second mold set for formmg a second lens of a second power.

Figs. 35 and 36 present an lsometnc view and a top view, respectively, of an improved gasket. Gasket 530 may be composed of similar materials as gasket 510. Like gasket 510, gasket 530 is preferably annular, but may be take a vanety of shapes. In addition, gasket 530 may incorporate projections 531 m a manner similar to the projections 511 shown m Fig 32. Alternatively, gasket 530 may mclude a raised lip along mteπor surface 532 or another method of spacmg mold members that is conventional m the art.

Gasket 530 preferably includes a fill port 538 for receivmg a lens formmg composition while gasket 530 is fully engaged to a mold set. Fill port 538 preferably extends from mteπor surface 532 of gasket 530 to an extenor surface 534 of gasket 530. Consequently, gasket 530 need not be partially disengaged from a mold member of a mold set m order to receive a lens formmg composition. In order to introduce a lens formmg composition mto the mold cavity defined by a conventional mold/gasket assembly the gasket must be at least partially disengaged from the mold members. Dunng the process of filling the mold cavity, lens forming composition may dπp onto the backside of a mold member Lens formmg composition on the backside of a mold member may cause activatmg hght used to cure the lens to become locally focused, and may cause optical distortions m the final product Because fill port 538 allows lens formmg composition to be introduced mto a mold cavity while gasket 530 is fully engaged to a mold set, gasket 530 preferably avoids this problem In addition, fill port 538 may be of sufficient size to allow air to escape duπng the mtroduction of a lens formmg composition mto a mold cavity; however, gasket 530 may also incorporate vent ports 536 to facilitate the escape of air. A method for makmg a plastic eyeglass lens usmg gasket 530 preferably mcludes engagmg gasket 530 with a first mold set for formmg a first lens of a first power. The first mold set preferably contams at least a front mold member and a back mold member. A mold cavity for retammg a lens formmg composition may be at least partially defined by the front mold member, the back mold member, and the gasket Preferably, the method further mcludes introducing a lens formmg composition through fill port 538, wherem the first and second mold members remam fully engaged with the gasket durmg the mtroduction of the lens formmg composition. The lens formmg composition may then be cured by use of activating light and/or thermal radiation

In operation, the apparatus may be appropnately configured for the production of positive lenses which are relatively thick at the center or negative lenses which are relatively thick at the edge To reduce the likelihood of premature release, the relatively thick portions of a lens are preferably polymerized at a faster rate than the relatively thm portions of a lens

The rate of polymerization taking place at various portions of a lens may be controlled by varying the relative mtensity of activating light incident upon particular portions of a lens The rate of polymerization takmg place at various portions of a lens may also be controlled by duecting air across the mold members 378 to cool the mold assembly 352

For positive lenses, the intensity of incident activatmg light is preferably reduced at the edge portion of the lens so that the thicker center portion of the lens polymerizes faster than the thinner edge portion of the lens Conversely, for a negative lens, the intensity of incident activatmg light is preferably reduced at the center portion of the lens so that the thicker edge portion of the lens polymerizes faster than the thinner center portion of the lens For either a positive lens or a negative lens, air may be duected across the faces of the mold members 378 to cool the mold assembly 352 As the overall intensity of incident activatmg light is increased, more coolmg is needed which may be accomplished by either or both of mcreasmg the velocity of the air and reducmg the temperature of

It is well known by those of ordinary skill m the art that lens formmg materials tend to shrink as they cure If the relatively thm portion of a lens is allowed to polymerize before the relatively thick portion, the relatively thm portion will tend to be rigid at the time the relatively thick portion cures and shrinks and the lens will either release prematurely from or crack the mold members. Accordingly, when the relative intensity of activatmg light mcident upon the edge portion of a positive lens is reduced relative to the center portion, the center portion may polymerize faster and shrink before the edge portion is ngid so that the shrinkage is more uniform. Conversely, when the relative mtensity of activatmg light incident upon the center portion of a negative lens is reduced relative to the edge portion, the edge portion may polymerize faster and shrink before the center becomes ngid so that the shrinkage is more uniform.

The vaπation of the relative intensity of activatmg light mcident upon a lens may be accomplished m a vanety of ways According to one method, in the case of a positive lens, a nng of opaque material may be placed between the lamps and the mold assembly so that the incident activating light falls mamly on the thicker center portion of the lens. Alternatively, when an LCD panel is used as the filter, the panel may be programmed to form a pattern so that the mcident activatmg light falls mamly on the thicker center portion of the lens (See Fig 7, patterns A, B, C, D, F, H, and I). Conversely, for a negative lens, a disk of opaque material may be placed between the lamps 240 and the mold assembly 352 so that the mcident activatmg light falls mamly on the edge portion of the lens. Alternatively, when an LCD panel is used as the filter, the panel may be programmed to form a pattern so that the mcident activating light falls mainly on the thicker edge portion of the lens (See Fig. 9, patterns C, F, I, and Fig 10, patterns A, B, D, E, G, and H).

Accordmg to another method, in the case of a negative lens, a sheet matenal or an LCD panel having a pattern with a vaπable degree of opacity rangmg from opaque at a central portion to transparent at a radial outer portion may be disposed between the lamps 240 and the mold assembly 352. Conversely, for a positive lens, a sheet matenal or LCD panel having a pattern with a vanable degree of opacity rangmg from transparent at a central portion to opaque at a radial outer portion may be disposed between the lamps 240 and the mold assembly 352

As noted above, the mold assembly 352 may be cooled duπng curing of the lens formmg material as the overall mtensity of the incident activating light is increased Coolmg of the mold assembly 352 generally reduces the likelihood of premature release by slowing the reaction and improving adhesion There may also be improvements m the optical quality, stress characteristics and impact resistance of the lens Coolmg of the mold assembly 352 is preferably accomplished bv blowing an across the mold assembly 352 The air preferably has a temperature rangmg between 15 and 85°F (about -9 4°C to 29 4°C) to allow for a curing time of between 30 and 10 mmutes The air distribution devices have been found to be particularly advantageous as they may be specifically designed to direct air directly across the surface of the opposed mold members 378 After passing across the surface of the opposed mold members 378, the air emanatmg from the air distribution devices mav be vented out of the system Alternately the air emanating from the air distnbution devices may be recycled back to an air cooler In another embodiment, the mold assembly 352 may also be cooled by disposmg the mold assembly m a liquid coolmg bath

The opposed mold members 378 are preferably thoroughly cleaned between each cunng run as any dirt or other rmpuπty on the mold members 378 may cause premature release The mold members 378 may be cleaned by any conventional means well known to those of ordmary skill m the art such as with a domestic cleamng product, l e , Mr Clean™ available from Proctor and Gamble Those of ordmary skill m the art will recognize, however, that many other techniques may also be used for cleanmg the mold members 378

After cuπng of the lens in lens curmg unit 30, the lens may be de-molded and post-cured m the post-cure unit 40 Post-cure unit 40 is preferably configured to apply light, heat or a combmation of light and heat to the lens As shown in Fig 12, post-cure unit 40 may mclude a light source 414, a lens drawer assembly 416, and a heat source 418 Lens drawer assembly 416 preferably mcludes a lens holder 420, more preferably at least two lens holders 420 Lens drawer assembly 416 is preferably slidmgly mounted on a guide Preferably, lens drawer assembly 416 is made from a ceramic mateπal Cured lenses may be placed m lens holders 420 while the lens drawer assembly 416 is m the open position (l e , when the door extends from the front of post-cure unit 40) After the lenses have been loaded mto lens holders 420 the door may be slid mto a closed position, with the lenses directly under light source 414 and above heat source 418 As shown m Fig 12, it is preferred that the light source 414 includes a plurality of light generatmg devices or lamps 440 Preferably, lamps 440 may be oriented above each of the lens holders when the lens drawer assembly is closed The lamps 440, preferably, generate activatmg light The lamps 440 may be supported by and electncally connected to suitable fixtures 442 The fixtures may be at least partially reflective and concave m shape to direct light from the lamps 440 toward the lens holders The lamps may generate either ultraviolet light, actmic hght, visible light, and or mfrared light The choice of lamps is preferably based on the monomers used m the lens formmg composition In one embodiment, the activatmg light may be generated from a fluorescent lamp The fluorescent lamp preferably has a strong emission spectra from about 200 nm to about 800 nm, more preferably between about 200 nm to about 400 nm A fluorescent lamp emitting activatmg light with the descnbed wavelengths is commercially available from Voltarc as model SNEUV RPR 4190 In another embodiment, the lamp may generate ultraviolet light

In one embodiment, the activating hght source may be turned on and off quickly between exposures A flasher ballast mav be used for this function The flasher ballast may be positioned beneath the post-cure unit A flasher ballast may operate m a standby mode wherem a low current is preferably supplied to the lamp filaments to keep the filaments warm and thereby reduce the strike time of the lamp. Such a ballast is commercially available from Magnatek, Inc of Bridgeport, Connecticut.

Heat source 418 may be configured to heat the mtenor of the post-cure unit. Preferably, heat source 418 is a resistive heater. Heat source 418 may be made up of one or two resistive heaters The temperature of heat source 418 may be thermostatically controlled. By heating the interior of the post-cure unit the lenses which are placed in post-cure unit 40 may be heated to complete curmg of the lens formmg material Post-cure unit 40 may also mclude a fan to circulate air withm the unit. The circulation of air within the unit may help mamtam a relatively uniform temperature withm the unit. The fan may also be used to cool the temperature of post-cure unit 40 after completion of the post cure process. In an embodiment, descnbed as follows, a lens cured by exposure to activatmg light may be further processed by conductive heatmg. Such conductive heatmg tends to enhance the degree of cross-linking m the lens and to increase the tintabihty of the lens A lens formmg matenal is preferably placed m mold cavity 900 (illustrated m Fig. 16), which is defined by at least first mold member 902 and second mold member 904. Activatmg light is directed toward at least one of the mold members, thereby cunng the lens formmg mateπal to a lens. Heat distnbutor 910 (shown in Fig 13) may be adapted to distπbute conductive heat from conductive heat source 418 to at least one mold member. Heat distnbutor 910 is preferably flexible such that at least a portion of it may be shaped to substantially conform to the shape of face 906 or face 907 of first mold member 902 or second mold member 904, respectively. Heat distnbutor 910 is preferably placed m contact with conductive heat source 418, and mold member 902 is preferably placed on heat distnbutor 910 such that face 906 of the mold member rests on top of the heat distnbutor 910. Heat distnbutor 910 may be coupled to heat source 418. Heat is preferably conductively applied to the heat distnbutor 910 by the heat source 418. Heat is preferably conducted from the heat distributor 910 through the mold member to a face of the lens. The heat distnbutor may be shaped to accommodate face 906 of first mold member 902 or face 907 of second mold member 904 such that the heat is applied to front face 916 or back face 915 of the lens. The temperature of heat source 418 may be thermostatically controlled. In an embodiment, a resistive heater 418 (shown m Fig. 17) may be used as a heat source to provide conductive heat to the lens. A number of other heat sources may be used. In an embodiment, heat distnbutor 910 may include countershape 920. Countershape 920 may be placed on top of the hot plate to distnbute conductive heat from the hot plate. The countershape is preferably flexible such that at least a portion of it may substantially conform to the shape of an outside face of a mold member. The countershape may be hemispherical and either convex or concave dependmg upon whether the surface of the mold assembly to be placed upon it is convex or concave. For example, when the concave surface of the back mold is utilized to conduct heat mto the lens assembly, a convex countershape is preferably provided to rest the assembly on.

Countershape 920 may mclude a glass mold, a metal optical lap, a pile of hot salt and/or sand, or any of a number of other devices adapted to conduct heat from heat source 912 It should be understood that Figure 17 includes combmations of a number of embodiments for illustrative purposes. Any number of identical or distinct countershapes may be used m combmation on top of a heat source. In an embodiment, a countershape mcludes a container 922 filled with particles 924 The particles preferably include metal or ceramic material Countershape 920 may include heat distnbutor 910 A layer 914 of material may be placed over the countershape 920 or heat distnbutor 910 to provide slow, smooth, uniform heat conduction mto the lens mold assembly This layer preferably has a relatively low heat conductivity and may be made of rubber, cloth, Nomex fabric or any other suitable material that provides slow, smooth, uniform conduction

In an embodiment, countershape 920 includes layer 914 (e g , a bag or container) filled with particles 924 such that the countershape may be conveniently shaped to conform to the shape of face 906 or face 907 In an embodiment, the countershape is preferably a "beanbag" that contams particles 924 and may be conformable to the shape of a mold face placed on top of it. Particles 924 may include ceramic material, metal material, glass beads, sand and/or salt. The particles preferably facilitate conductive heat to be applied to face 906 or face 907 substantially evenly

In an embodiment, the countershape 920 is preferably placed on top of heat source 418 Countershape 920 is preferably heated until the temperature of the countershape is substantially near or equal to the temperature of the surface of the heat source The countershape may then be "flipped over" such that the heated portion of the countershape that has a temperature substantially near or equal to that of the surface of the heat source is exposed A mold may be placed on top of the heated portion of the countershape, and the countershape is preferably conformed to the shape of the face of the mold In this manner, the rate of conductive heat transfer to the lens may begm at a maximum. Heat is preferably conductively transferred through the countershape and the mold face to a face of the lens. The temperature of the heated portion of the countershape may tend to decrease after the mold is placed onto the countershape.

In an embodiment, heat distnbutor 910 may partially msulate a mold member from conductive heat source

418. The heat distnbutor preferably allows a gradual, uniform transfer of heat to the mold member. The heat distnbutor is preferably made of rubber and/or another suitable mateπal. The heat distributor may mclude countershapes of vaπous shapes (e.g., hemisphencally concave or convex) and sizes that may be adapted to contact and receive mold members.

In an embodiment, heat may be conductively applied by the heat source to only one outside face of one mold member. This outside face may be face 906 or face 907 Heat may be applied to the back face of the lens to enhance crosslinking and/or tintabihty of the lens material proximate to the surface of the back face of the lens.

In a preferred embodiment, a thermostatically controlled hot plate 418 is preferably used as a heat source Glass optical mold 928 is preferably placed convex side up on hot plate 418 to serve as a countershape. The glass optical mold preferably has about an 80 mm diameter and a radius of curvature of about 93mm. Rubber disc 929 may be placed over this mold 928 to provide uniform conductive heat to the lens mold assembly. The rubber disc is preferably made of sihcone and preferably has a diameter of approximately 74 mm and a thickness of about 3 mm. The lens mold assembly is preferably placed on mold 928 so that outside face 906 of a mold member of the assembly rests on top of mold 928. It is preferred that the edge of the lens mold assembly not directly contact the hot plate. The lens mold assembly preferably receives heat through the rubber disc and not through its mold edges To achieve good yield rates and reduce the mcidence of premature release while usmg the conductive heat method, it may be necessary for the edge of the lens to be completely cured and dry before conductive heat is applied. If the lens edge is incompletely cured (l e , liquid or gel is still present) while conductive heat is applied, there may be a high mcidence of premature release of the lens from the heatmg unit

In an embodiment, the edges of a lens may be treated to cure or remove incompletely cured lens forming material (see above descnption) before conductive heat is applied The mold cavity may be defined by at least gasket 908, first mold member 902, and second mold member 904 Activating light rays may be directed toward at least one of the mold members, thereby curmg the lens formmg mateπal to a lens preferably havmg front face 916, a back face 915, and edges. Upon the formation of the lens, the gasket may be removed from the mold assembly An oxygen barπer may be used to cure any remammg liquid or gel on the lens edge as descnbed m more detail below. An oxygen barrier treated with photoinitiator is preferably employed Alternatively, any remammg liquid or gel may be removed manually Once the edge of the lens is dry, a face of the lens may be conductively heated usmg any of the methods descnbed herem

In an embodiment, a lens may be tinted after receivmg conductive heat postcure treatment m a mold cavity. Dunng tmting of the lens, the lens is preferably immersed m a dye solution. The operation of the lens cunng system may be controlled by a microprocessor based controller 50 (Fig

1). Controller 50 preferably controls the operation of coatmg umt 20, lens cunng unit 30, and post-cure unit 40 Controller 50 may be configured to substantially simultaneously control each of these units In addition, the controller may mclude a display 52 and an mput device 54 The display and mput device may be configured to exchange information with an operator Controller 50 preferably controls a number of operations related to the process of formmg a plastic lens

Many of the operations used to make a plastic lens (e g., coatmg, curmg and post-cure operations) are preferably performed under a predetermined set of conditions based on the prescnption and type of lens bemg formed (e.g , ultraviolet/visible light absorbing, photochromic, colored, etc.). Controller 50 is preferably programmed to control a number of these operations, thus relieving the operator from havmg to continually monitor the apparatus. In some embodiments, the lens or mold members may be coated with a vanety of coatmgs (e.g., a scratch resistant or tinted coatmg). The application of these coatmgs may require specific conditions dependmg on the type of coatmg to be applied Controller 50 is preferably configured to produce these conditions m response to mput from the operator.

When a spm coatmg unit is used, controller 50 may be configured to control the rotation of the lens or mold member duπng the coatmg process Controller 50 is preferably electronically coupled to the motor of the spm coatmg unit. The controller may send electronic signals to the motor to turn the motor on and or off. In a typical coatmg process the rate at which the mold or lens is rotated is preferably controlled to achieve a uniform and defect free coatmg. The controller is preferably configured to control the rate of rotation of the mold or lens duπng a cunng process. For example, when a coatmg matenal is bemg applied, the mold or lens is preferably spun at relatively high rotational rates (e g., about 900 to about 950 RPM) When the coatmg mateπal is bemg cured, however, a much slower rotational rate is preferably used (e.g., about 200 RPM) The controller is preferably configured to adjust the rotational rate of the lens or mold dependmg on the process step being performed.

The controller is also preferably configured to control the operation of lamps 24 The lamps are preferably turned on and off at the appropπate tunes dunng a coatmg procedure For example, duπng the application of the coatmg matenal activatmg lights are typically not used, thus the controller may be configured to keep the lamps off dunng this process Durmg the cunng process, activatmg light may be used to initiate the cunng of the coatmg material The controller is preferably configured to turn the lamps on and to control the amount of time the lamps remam on duπng a cunng of the coatmg mateπal The controller may also be configured to create light pulses to affect cuπng of the coating mateπal Both the length and frequency of the light pulses may be controlled by the controller.

The controller is also preferably configured to control operation of the lens-curing unit. The controller may perform some and/or all of a number of functions duπng the lens cuπng process, mcludmg, but not limited to- (1) measuring the ambient room temperature; (n) determmmg the dose of light (or initial dose of hght m pulsed curmg applications) required to cure the lens formmg composition, based on the ambient room temperature; (in) applymg the activatmg light with an mtensity and duration sufficient to equal the determined dose; (IV) measuring the composition's temperature response during and subsequent to the application of the dose of light; (v) calculating the dose required for the next application of activating light (in pulsed curmg applications); (vi) applymg the activatmg light with an mtensity and duration sufficient to equal the determined second dose; (vn) determmmg when the cunng process is complete by momtormg the temperature response of the lens formmg composition dunng the application of activatmg light; (vm) turning the upper and lower light sources on and off mdependently; (IX) monitoring the lamp temperature, and controlling the temperature of the lamps by activating coolmg fans proximate the lamps; and (x) turning the fans on/off or controlling the flow rate of an air stream produced by a fan to control the composition temperature. Herem, "dose" refers to the amount of light energy applied to an object, the energy of the mcident light bemg detemuned by the intensity and duration of the light.

A temperature monitor may be located at a number of positions withm the lens cuπng unit 30. In one embodiment an mfra-red temperature sensor may be located such that it may measure the temperature of the mold and/or the lens formmg composition in the mold cavity. One mfra-red temperature sensor may be the Cole-Parmer Model E39669-00 (Vernon Hills, Illinois). The temperature monitor may measure the temperature withm the chamber and/or the temperature of air exiting the chamber. The controller may be configured to send a signal to a cooler and/or distnbutor to vary the amount and/or temperature of the coolmg air The temperature monitor may also determine the temperature at any of a number of locations proximate the mold cavity. The temperature monitor preferably sends a signal to the controller such that the temperature of the mold cavity and/or the lens forming composition may be relayed to the controller throughout the cuπng process.

Duπng the initial set-up of a cuπng process the temperature of the lens formmg composition withm the mold cavity may be determined. This initial temperature of the lens formmg composition may be about equal to the ambient room temperature. The controller may then determine the initial temperature of the lens formmg composition by measuring the ambient room temperature. Alternatively, the initial temperature of the lens formmg composition may be measured directly using the aforementioned temperature sensors.

The controller preferably determines the initial dose to be given to the lens formmg composition based on the initial temperature of the composition The controller may use a table to determine the initial dose, the table mcludmg a seπes of values correlating the initial temperature to the initial dose and/or the mass of the lens formmg composition. The table may be prepared by routine experimentation To prepare the table a specific lens formmg composition of a specific mass is preferably treated with a known dose of activating light. The mold cavity is preferably disassembled and the gelation pattern of the lens forming composition observed. This procedure may be repeated, mcreasmg or decreasing the dosage as dictated by the gelation patterns, until the optimal dosage is determined for the specific lens forming composition Dunng this testmg procedure the initial temperature of the lens formmg composition may be determined, this temperature being herein referred to as the "testmg temperature" In this manner, the optimal dose for the lens formmg composition at the testmg temperature may be determined When the lens forming material has an initial temperature that is substantially equal to the testmg temperature, the initial dosage may be substantially equal to the experimentally determined dosage When the lens formmg material has a temperature that is substantially greater or less than the testmg temperature, the initial dose may be calculated based on a function of the experimentally determined initial dose. In smgle dose applications the initial dose of activatmg light will be sufficient to substantially cure the plastic lens For multi-pulse applications, the initial dose will be followed by additional light doses. In an embodiment, the controller is preferably adapted to control the mtensity and duration of activatmg light pulses delivered from the activating light source and the time interval between the pulses. The activatmg light source may mclude a capacitor which stores the energy required to deliver the pulses of activatmg light The capacitor may allow pulses of activatmg light to be delivered as frequently as desired. A light sensor may be used to determine the mtensity of activating light emanatmg from the source. The light sensor is preferably adapted to send a signal to the controller, which is preferably adapted to mamtam the mtensity of the activatmg light at a selected level. A filter may be positioned between the activatmg light source and the light sensor and is preferably adapted to inhibit a portion of the activatmg hght rays from contactmg the light sensor This filter may be necessary to keep the mtensity of the activatmg light upon the light sensor withm the detectable range of the light sensor. In an embodiment, a shutter system may be used to control the application of activatmg hght rays to the lens formmg matenal. The shutter system preferably mcludes air-actuated shutter plates that may be inserted mto the cuπng chamber to prevent activatmg light from reachmg the lens formmg matenal. The shutter system may be coupled to the controller, which may actuate an air cylmder to cause the shutter plates to be inserted or extracted from the cuπng chamber. The controller preferably allows the insertion and extraction of the shutter plates at specified time mtervals. The controller may receive signals from temperature sensors allowing the time intervals m which the shutters are inserted and or extracted to be adjusted as a function of a temperature of the lens formmg composition and/or the molds. The temperature sensor may be located at numerous positions proximate the mold cavity and/or casting chamber.

Alternatively, the shutter system may include an LCD filter that may be darkened to inhibit the activatmg light from reachmg the lens formmg material. The controller is preferably configured to darken the LCD panel at specified time mtervals. The controller may receive signals from temperature sensors allowing the time mtervals m which the LCD panel is darkened to be adjusted as a function of a temperature of the lens formmg composition and/or the molds.

In an embodiment, a smgle dose of activatmg light may be used to cure a lens forming composition The controller may monitor the change m temperature of the lens formmg composition during the application of activatmg light The activatmg light preferably initiates a polymerization reaction such that the temperature of the lens formmg composition begms to rise By monitoring the change in temperature over a time period the controller may determine the rate of temperature change The controller preferably controls the polymerization of the lens formmg composition based on the rate of temperature change When the temperature is found to be πsmg at a faster than desired rate, the desired rate being determined based on previous experiments, the temperature controller may alter the mtensity and/or the duration of the pulse such that the rate of temperature change is lowered The duration of the activating light may be shortened and/or the intensity of the activatmg light may be diminished to achieve this effect The controller may also mcrease the rate of coolmg air blowing across the mold to help lower the temperature of the lens formmg composition Alternatively, if the temperature of the reacnon is increasing too slowly, the controller may mcrease the mtensity of the activating light and/or increase the duration of the pulse Additionally, the controller may decrease the rate of coolmg air blowing across the mold to allow the temperature of the lens formmg composition to rise at a faster rate

One manner m which the temperature may be controlled is by momtormg the temperature dunng the application of activating light, as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,422,046 to Tarshiam, et al. Duπng activatmg light irradiation, the temperature of the lens formmg composition tends to rise When the temperature reaches a predetermined upper set point the activatmg light source is preferably turned off Removal of the activatmg energy may allow the temperature to gradually begm to fall. When the temperature is reduced to a predetermined lower set pomt the activatmg light source is preferably turned on In this manner, the temperature may be controlled withm a desired range. This temperature range tends to be very broad due to the nature of the lens formmg polymerization reactions. For example, turning the activatmg light off at a predetermined upper set pomt may not msure that the temperature of the lens formmg composition will stop at that point. In fact, it is more likely that the temperature may contmue to πse after the upper set pomt has been reached. To offset this effect the upper set pomt may be set at a temperature lower than the upper temperature desired dunng the lens formmg process. Such a method of temperature control may be insufficient to control the temperature. As shown m Fig. 17, mcrease m the temperature of a lens formmg composition dunng the lens formmg process may not be constant. Smce the mcrease m temperature of the composition changes as the process continues, the use of an upper set point for controlling the temperature may not adequately prevent the composition from reachmg greater than desired temperatures Additionally, near the completion of the process the upper set pomt may be set too low, thereby preventmg the lens formmg composition from reachmg a temperature that is adequate to mamtam the polymerization reaction due to insufficient doses of activatmg light.

In an embodiment the temperature control process may be descπbed as a modified Proportional-Integral- Deπvative ("PID") control method. Preferably, the controller is configured to operate the lens-curing system usmg a PID control method. The controller may use a number of factors to determine the dose of activatmg light applied for each pulse. The controller preferably measures the temperature as well as the rate of temperature change

The PID control method mvolves the combmation of proportional, integral and denvative controlling methods. The first, proportional control, may be achieved by mixing two control factors m such a way as to achieve the desired effect. For lens control the two factors which tend to have the most effect on temperature control may be the dosage of activatmg light and the flow rate of the coolmg air These two factors may be altered to achieve a desired temperature response If the temperature must be raised as rapidly as possible a full dosage of light may delivered with no coolmg air present. Similarly, if the composition must be rapidly cooled the sample may be treated with cooling air only Preferably the two factors, application of mcident light and coolmg, are preferably both applied to achieve the desired temperature response The mixture, or proportions of these factors may allow the temperature of the composition to be controlled The use of proportional control tends to ignore other effects that influence the temperature of the lens formmg composition. Dunng the lens forming process, the temperature of the lens formmg composition may vary due to the rate of polymerization of the reaction When the composition is undergomg a rapid rate of polymerization, the temperature of the composition may rise beyond that determined by the proportional setting of the activatmg light and coolmg air controls Toward the end of the process the lens may become too cool due to the a reduction m the rate of polymenzation of the composition The use of proportional control may therefore be madequate to control this procedure and may lead to greater than desired vanations m the temperature of the composition

These limitations may be overcome by altering the proportions of the two components m response to the temperature of the composition A smgle set pomt may be used to control the temperature of a reaction. As the temperature πses above this set point the proportion of the activating light and coolmg may be adjusted such that the temperature begms to lower back toward the set pomt. If the temperature drops below the set pomt the proportion of activatmg light and coolmg may be adjusted to raise the temperature back to the set pomt. Typically, to lower the temperature the dose of activatmg light may be reduced and/or the flow rate of the coolmg air may be mcreased. To raise the temperature the dose of activatmg light may be mcreased and/or the flow rate of the coolmg air may be decreased.

The use of proportional control m this manner may not lead to a steady temperature Dependmg on the set pomt and the response tune of the lens formmg composition to vanations in the dosage of light and/or coolmg air, the temperature may oscillate over the set pomt, never attaining a steady value. To better control such a system the rate of change of the temperature over a predetermmed time peπod is preferably monitored. As the temperature πses the rate at which the temperature nses is preferably noted. Based on this rate of change the controller may then alter the dosage of activatmg light and/or coolmg air such that a temperature much closer to the set pomt may be achieved. Smce the rate will change m response to changes m the rate of polymerization, such a system may better control the temperature of the lens formmg composition throughout the process. In an embodiment, the controller may be a modified PID controller or a computer programmed to control the lens cuπng unit usmg a PID control scheme. The controller preferably monitors the temperature of the lens formmg composition throughout the process. Additionally, the controller may monitor the rate of change of temperature throughout the reaction When a plurality of pulses are bemg applied to control the polymerization, the controller preferably controls the duration and intensity of each pulse to control the temperature of the composition. In a typical process the rate of change m temperature is preferably monitored after the application of an activatmg light pulse. If the temperature is trending m an upward direction, the controller preferably waits for the temperature to crest and start descendmg, before the application of additional light pulses. This cresting temperature may vary, as depicted m Fig 17, throughout the lens formmg process. After the temperature has passed a predetermmed set pomt, a dose, calculated from the rate of change m temperature caused by the application of the previous pulse, may be applied to the lens formmg composition After the light pulse is delivered the controller may repeat the procedure additional tunes

When the reaction nears completion the controller detects the lack of response to the last exposure (l e the lens temperature did not increase appreciably). At this point the controller may apply a final dose to assure a substantially complete cure and notify the operator that the mold assembly is ready to be removed form the chamber

One method of controlling the dose of light reachmg the lens may be through the use of filters, as descπbed above In one embodiment, an LCD filter system may be used to adjust the mtensity of incoming light. The LCD system is preferably coupled to the controller such that a pattern displayed by the LCD system may be altered by the controller The controller preferably configures the pattern of light and dark areas on the LCD panel such that light havmg the optimal curing mtensity pattern hits the mold assemblies. The pattern that is produced is preferably based on the prescnption and type of lens bemg produced.

In another embodiment, the controller may actively change the pattern on the LCD panel dunng a cunng cycle. For example, the pattern of light and dark regions may be manipulated such that the lens is cured from the center of the lens then gradually expanded to the outer edges of the lens This type of cunng pattern may allow a more uniformly cured lens to be formed In some instances, cunng m this manner may also be used to alter the final power of the formed lens.

In another embodiment, the LCD panel may be used as a partial shutter to reduce the mtensity of light reachmg the lens assembly. By blackenmg the entire LCD panel the amount of light reachmg any portion of the mold assembly may be reduced The controller may be configured to cause the LCD panel to create "pulses" of light by alternating between a transmissive and darkened mode By havmg the LCD panel create these light "pulses" the need for a flash ballast or similar pulse generatmg equipment may be unnecessary. Thus the use of a controller and an LCD panel may simplify the system. In some embodiments, the lens may require a post-curing process. The post-cure process may require specific conditions dependmg on the type of lens bemg formed. The controller is preferably configured to produce these conditions in response to mput from the operator.

The controller is preferably configured to control the operation of lamps 440 (See Fig. 12) The lamps are preferably turned on and off at the appropπate times dunng the post-cure procedure. For example, m some post-cure operations the lights may not be requued, thus the controller would keep the lights off duπng this process Duπng other processes, the lights may be used to complete the curmg of the lens. The controller is preferably configured to turn the lights on and to control the amount of tune the lights remam on duπng a post-cure procedure. The controller may also be configured to create light pulses duπng the post-cure procedure. Both the length and frequency of the light pulses may be controlled by the controller. The controller is preferably configured to control operation of the heatmg device 418 dunng the post- cure operation. Heatmg device 418 is preferably turned on and off to mamtam a predetermmed temperature withm the post-cure unit. Alternatively, when a resistive heater is used, the current flow through the heatmg element may be altered to control the temperature withm the post-cure unit. Preferably both the application of light and heat are controlled by the controller The operation of fans, coupled to the post-cure unit, is also preferably controlled by the controller The fans may be operated by the controller to cuculate air withm or mto/out of the post-cure unit

Additionally, the controller may provide system diagnostics to determine if the system is operating properly The controller may notify the user when routme mamtenance is due or when a system error is detected For example, the controller may monitor the cuπent pass g through lamps of the coating, lens cunng, or post-cure unit to determine if the lamps are operating properly. The controller may keep track of the number of hours that the lamps have been used When a lamp has been used for a predetermmed number of hours a message may be transmitted to an operator to inform the operator that the lamps may requue changing The controller may also monitor the mtensity of light produced by the lamp A photodiode may be placed proximate the lamps to determine the mtensity of light bemg produced by the lamp. If the intensity of light falls outside a predetermmed range, the current applied to the lamp may be adjusted to alter the mtensity of light produced (either mcreased to increase the mtensity; or decreased to decrease the mtensity) Alternatively, the controller may transmit a message informing the operator that a lamp needs to be changed when the mtensity of light produced by the lamp drops below a predetermmed value.

The controller may also manage an mterlock system for safety and energy conservation purposes If the lens drawer assembly from the coatmg or post-cure units are open the controller is preferably configured to prevent the lamps from turning on This may prevent the operator from inadvertently becommg exposed to the light from the lamps Lamps 24 for the coatmg unit 20 are preferably positioned on cover 22 (See Fig. 1). In order to prevent inadvertent exposure of the operator to light from lamps 24 a switch is preferably built mto the cover, as descnbed above. The controller is preferably configured to prevent the lamps 24 from turning on when the cover is open. The controller may also automatically turn lamps 24 off if the cover is opened when the lenses are on Additionally, the controller may conserve energy by keepmg fans and other coolmg devices off when the lamps are off.

The controller may also be configured to interact with the operator. The controller preferably mcludes an mput device 54 and a display screen 52. The mput device may be a keyboard (e.g., a full computer keyboard or a modified keyboard), a light sensitive pad, a touch sensitive pad, or similar mput device. A number the parameters controlled by the controller may be dependent on the mput of the operator. In the initial set up of the apparatus, the controller may allow the operator to mput the type of lens bemg formed. This information may mclude type of lens (clear, ultraviolet absorbmg, photochromic, colored, etc.), prescnption, and type of coatings (e g., scratch resistant or tmt). Based on this information the controller is preferably configured to transmit information back to the operator The operator may be instructed to select mold members for the mold assembly. The mold members may be coded such that the controller may mdicate to the operator which molds to select by transmitting the code for each mold member. The controller may also determine the type of gasket requued to properly seal the mold members together. Like the mold members, the gaskets may also be coded to make the selection of the appropπate gasket easier

The lens formmg compositions may also be coded. For the production of certain kmds of lenses a specific lens formmg composition may be required. The controller may be configured to determine the specific composition requued and transmit the code for that composition to the operator. The controller may also signal to the operator when certain operations need to be performed or when a particular operation is completed (e g , when to place the mold assembly m the lens cuπng unit, when to remove the mold assembly, when to transfer the mold assembly, etc )

Referring now to Fig 38, another embodiment of a plastic lens cuπng apparatus is generally indicated by reference numeral 1000. As shown m Fig 38, lens formmg apparatus 1000 includes at least one coatmg unit 1020, a pair of stacked lens cuπng units 1030 and 1035, a post-cure unit 1040, and a controller 1050 Preferably, apparatus 1000 mcludes two coatmg units 1020 Coatmg unit 1020 is preferably configured to apply a coatmg layer to a mold member or a lens. Preferably, coatmg unit 1020 is a spm coatmg unit. Each of the lens cunng units, 1030 and 1035, mcludes an activatmg light source for producmg activatmg light The activating light source is preferably configured to direct hght toward a mold assembly Post-cure unit 1040 is preferably configured to complete the polymerization of partially cured plastic lenses Post-cure unit 1040 preferably includes an activatmg light source and a heat source. Controller 1050 is preferably a programmable logic controller Controller 1050 is preferably coupled to coatmg units 1020, lens curing units 1030 and 1035, and post-cure unit 1040, such that the controller may be capable of substantially simultaneously operatmg the four units 1020, 1030, 1035 and 1040 Controller 50 may be a computer. Durmg the production of plastic lenses the lens cunng step may be the most tune consummg part of the process By addmg additional cunng units to the system the throughput of the system may be increased, allowing the operator to form more lenses m a given tune penod.

LENS FORMING COMPOSITIONS

The lens formmg material may include any suitable liquid monomer or monomer mixture and any suitable photosensitive initiator. As used herein "monomer" is taken to mean any compound capable of undergomg a polymerization reaction. Monomers may mclude non-polymerized matenal or partially polymerized matenal When partially polymerized material is used as a monomer, the partially polymerized material preferably contams functional groups capable of undergomg further reaction to form a new polymer. The lens formmg mateπal preferably mcludes a photoinitiator that mteracts with activatmg light. In one embodiment, the photoinitiator absorbs ultraviolet light havmg a wavelength m the range of 300 to 400 nm. In another embodiment, the photoinitiator absorbs actmic light having a wavelength m the range of about 380 nm to 490 nm. The liquid lens formmg matenal is preferably filtered for quality control and placed in the lens moldmg cavity 382 by pulling the annular gasket 380 away from one of the opposed mold members 378 and mjectmg the liquid lens forming matenal into the lens moldmg cavity 382 (See Fig 11). Once the lens moldmg cavity 382 is filled with such matenal, the annular gasket 380 is preferably replaced mto its sealing relation with the opposed mold members 378

Those skilled m the art will recognize that once the cured lens is removed from the lens moldmg cavity 382 by disassembling the opposed mold members 378, the lens may be further processed m a conventional manner, such as by grinding its peπpheral edge.

A polymenzable lens formmg composition mcludes an aromatic-contammg bιs(allyl carbonate)-functιonal monomer and at least one polyethylenic-functional monomer contammg two ethylemcally unsaturated groups selected from acrylyl or methacrylyl In a preferred embodiment, the composition further mcludes a suitable photoinitiator. In other preferred embodiments, the composition may mclude one or more polyethylenic-functional monomers contammg three ethylemcally unsaturated groups selected from acrylyl or methacrylyl, and a dye.

Aromatic-contammg bιs(allyl carbonate)-functιonal monomers mclude bιs(allyl carbonates) of dihydroxy aromatic-contammg matenal The dihydroxy aromatic-contammg matenal from which the monomer is denved may be one or more dihydroxy aromatic-contammg compounds Preferably the hydroxyl groups are attached directly to nuclear aromatic carbon atoms of the dihydroxy aromatic-contammg compounds The monomers are themselves known and may be prepared by procedures well known in the art. The aromatic-containing bιs(allyl carbonate)-functιonal monomers may be represented by the formula

m which A, is the divalent radical denved from the dihydroxy aromatic-contammg mateπal and each R^ is mdependently hydrogen, halo, or a C,-C₄ alkyl group. The alkyl group is usually methyl or ethyl. Examples of R_<, include hydrogen, chloro, bromo, fluoro, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl and n-butyl Most commonly R_Q IS hydrogen or methyl; hydrogen is prefeπed A subclass of the divalent radical A, which is of particular usefulness is represented by the formula:

m which each R, is mdependently alkyl contammg from 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, phenyl, or halo; the average value of each (a) is independently m the range of from 0 to 4; each Q is mdependently oxy, sulfonyl, alkanediyl havmg from 2 to about 4 carbon atoms, or alkylidene havmg from 1 to about 4 carbon atoms; and the average value of n is m the range of from 0 to about 3. Preferably Q is methylethylidene, viz., isopropylidene.

Preferably the value of n is zero, in which case A, is represented by the formula:

m which each R,, each a, and Q are as discussed m respect of Formula II. Preferably the two free bonds are both m the ortho or para positions. The para positions are especially preferred.

The dihydroxy aromatic-contammg compounds from which A, is denved may also be polyether-functional cham extended compounds. Examples of such compounds mclude alkalme oxide extended bisphenols. Typically the alkalme oxide employed is ethylene oxide, propylene oxide, or mixtures thereof. By way of exemplification, when para, para-bisphenols are cham extended with ethylene oxide, the bivalent radical A, may often be represented by the formula

where each R,, each a, and Q are as discussed m respect of Formula II, and the average values of j and k are each mdependently m the range of from about 1 to about 4

A prefened aromatic-contammg bιs(allyl carbonate)-functιonal monomer is represented by the formula

and is commonly known as bisphenol A bιs(allyl carbonate)

A wide variety of compounds may be used as the polyethylenic functional monomer contammg two or three ethylemcally unsaturated groups A prefened polyethylenic functional compound contammg two or three ethylemcally unsaturated groups may be generally descπbed as the acrylic acid esters and the methacrylic acid esters of aliphatic polyhydπc alcohols, such as, for example, the di- and tnacrylates and the di- and tπmethacrylates of ethylene glycol, tnethylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, tetramethylene glycol, glycerol, diethyleneglycol, butyleneglycol, propyleneglycol, pentanediol, hexanediol, tπmethylolpropane, and tπpropyleneglycol Examples of specific suitable polyethylenic - functional monomers contammg two or three ethylemcally unsaturated groups include tπmethylolpropanetπacrylate (TMPTA), tetraethylene glycol diacrylate (TTEGDA), tπpropylene glycol diacrylate (TRPGDA), 1,6 hexanedioldimethacrylate (HDDMA), and hexanedioldiacrylate (HDDA)

In general, a photoinitiator for initiating the polymerization of the lens forming composition preferably exhibits an absorption spectrum over the 300-400 nm range High absorptivity of a photoinitiator m this range, however, is not desirable, especially when casting a thick lens The following are examples of illustrative photoinitiator compounds methyl benzoylformate, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-l-phenylpropan-l-one,

1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone, 2,2-dι-sec- butoxyacetophenone, 2,2-dιethoxyacetophenone, 2,2-dιethoxy-2-phenyl-acetophenone, 2,2-dιmethoxy-2- phenyl-acetophenone, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin isobutyl ether, benzoin, benzil, benzyl disulfide, 2,4-dιhydroxybenzophenone, benzy deneacetophenone, benzophenone and acetophenone Preferred photoinitiator compounds are 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone (which is commercially available from Ciba-Geigy as Irgacure 184), methyl benzoylformate (which is commercially available from Polysciences, Inc ), or mixtures thereof Methyl benzoylformate is a generally preferred photoinitiator because it tends to provide a slower rate of polymerization. The slower rate of polymerization tends to prevent excessive heat buildup (and resultant crackmg of the lens) dunng polymerization In addition, it is relatively easy to mix liquid methyl benzoylformate (which is liquid at ambient temperatures) with many acrylates, diacrylates, and allyl carbonate compounds to form a lens formmg composition The lenses produced with the methyl benzoylformate photoinitiator tend to exhibit more favorable stress patterns and uniformity

A strongly absorbmg photoinitiator will absorb most of the mcident light m the first millimeter of lens thickness, causmg rapid polymerization m that region The remammg light will produce a much lower rate of polymerization below this depth and will result m a lens that has visible distortions. An ideal photoinitiator will exhibit high activity, but will have a lower extmction coefficient m the useful range A lower extmction coefficient of photomitiators at longer wavelengths tends to allow the activatmg light to penetrate deeper mto the reaction system This deeper penetration of the activating light allows photoinitiator radicals to form uniformly throughout the sample and provide excellent overall cure Since the sample may be irradiated from both top and bottom, a system in which appreciable activating light reaches the center of the thickest portion of the lens is preferred. The photoinitiator solubility and compatibility with the monomer system is also an important requuement

An additional consideration is the effect of the photoinitiator fragments m the finished polymer Some photomitiators generate fragments that impart a yellow color to the finished lens. Although such lenses actually absorb very little visible light, they may be cosmetically undesuable.

Photomitiators are often very system specific so that photomitiators that are efficient m one system may function poorly m another. In addition, the mitiator concentration, to a large extent, may be dependent on the mcident hght mtensity and the monomer composition. The identity of the mitiator and its concentration may be important for any particular formulation A concentration of mitiator that is too high may lead to crackmg and yellowing of the lens. Concentrations of mitiator that are too low may lead to incomplete polymerization and a soft matenal. Dyes and/or pigments are optional materials that may be present when high transmission of light is not necessary

The listing of optional ingredients discussed above is by no means exhaustive These and other ingredients may be employed in then customary amounts for their customary purposes so long as they do not seπously interfere with good polymer formulating practice

1. Activating Light Curable Lens Forming Compositions

Accordmg to a prefened embodiment, a lens formmg composition that may be cured with activatmg light mcludes an aromatic-contammg bιs(allyl carbonate) functional monomer, preferably bisphenol A bιs(allyl carbonate), admixed with one or more faster reactmg polyethylenic functional monomers contammg two acrylate or methacrylate groups such as 1,6 hexanediol dimethacrylate (HDDMA), 1,6 hexanediol diacrylate (HDDA), tetraethylene glycol diacrylate (TTEGDA), and tπpropylene glycol diacrylate (TRPGDA) and optionally a polyethylenic functional monomer contammg three acrylate groups such as tnmethylolpropane tnacrylate (TMPTA) Generally, compounds containing acrylate groups polymerize much faster than those containing allyl groups. According to one embodiment, the liquid lens formmg composition includes bisphenol A bιs(allyl carbonate) in place of DEG-BAC The bisphenol A bιs(allyl-carbonate) monomer has a higher refractive index than DEG-BAC makmg it more suitable for the production of thinner lenses, which mav be important with relatively thick positive or negative lenses The bisphenol A bιs(allyl-carbonate) monomer is commercially available from PPG Industries under the trade name HIRI I or CR-73 Lenses made from this product sometimes have a very slight, barely detectable, degree of yellowing A small amount of a blue dye consistmg of 9, 10-anthracenedιone, l-hydroxy-4-[(4-methylphenyl)ammo] available as Thermoplast Blue 684 from BASF Wyandotte Corp is preferably added to the composition to counteract the yellowing In addition, the yellowing tends to disappear if the lens is subjected to the above-described post-cure heat treatment Moreover, if not post-cured the yellowing tends to disappear at ambient temperature after approximately 2 months

TTEGDA, available from Sartomer and Radcure, is a diacrylate monomer that, preferably, is mcluded in the composition because it is a fast polymerizing monomer that reduces yellowing and yields a very clear product If too much TTEGDA is mcluded m the more prefened composition, l e , greater than about 25% by weight, however, the finished lens may be prone to crackmg and may be too flexible as this matenal softens at temperatures above 40 °C If TTEGDA is excluded altogether, the finished lens may be too brittle

HDDMA, available from Sartomer, is a dimethacrylate monomer that has a very stiff backbone between the two methacrylate groups HDDMA, preferably, is included m the composition because it yields a stiffer polymer and mcreases the hardness and strength of the finished lens This mateπal is quite compatible with the bisphenol A bιs(allyl carbonate) monomer HDDMA contnbutes to high temperature stiffness, polymer claπty and speed of polymerization

TRPGDA, available from Sartomer and Radcure, is a diacrylate monomer that, preferably, is mcluded m the composition because it provides good strength and hardness without addmg bnttleness to the finished lens This mateπal is also stiffer than TTEGDA

TMPTA, available from Sartomer and Radcure, is a tnacrylate monomer that, preferably, is included m the composition because it provides more crosslinkmg m the finished lens than the difunctional monomers TMPTA has a shorter backbone than TTEGDA and mcreases the high temperature stiffness and hardness of the finished lens Moreover, this matenal contnbutes to the prevention of optical distortions m the finished lens TMPTA also contnbutes to high shrinkage dunng polymerization The inclusion of too much of this mateπal in the more prefened composition may make the finished lens too bπttle Certain of the monomers that are preferably utilized, such as TTEGDA, TRPGDA and TMPTA, mclude impurities and have a yellow color m certain of then commercially available forms The yellow color of these monomers is preferably reduced or removed by passing them through a column of alumina (basic) which mcludes aluminum oxide powder - basic After passage through the alumina column differences between monomers obtamed from different sources may be substantially eliminated It is prefened, however, that the monomers be obtamed from a source which provides the monomers with the least amount of unpuπties contamed therem The composition is preferably filtered prior to polymerization thereof to remove suspended particles 2. Lens Forming Compositions Including Ultraviolet/Visible Light Absorbing Materials

Matenals that absorb various degrees of ultraviolet/visible light may be used m an eyeglass lens to inhibit ultraviolet/visible light from bemg transmitted through the eyeglass lens The phrase "ultraviolet visible light" is taken to mean light having a wavelength m the ultraviolet light range or both the ultraviolet and visible hght ranges. The phrase "ultraviolet/visible hght absorbmg compounds" refers to compounds which absorb ultraviolet/visible light. An eyeglass lens that mcludes ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds advantageously inhibits ultraviolet/visible light from bemg transmitted to the eye of a user wearing the lens. Thus, eyeglass lenses contammg ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compounds may function to protect the eyes of a person from damaging ultraviolet/visible light. Photochromic pigments are one type of ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds. Photochromic morgamc lenses which contam silver hahde particles or cuprous hahde particles suspended throughout the body of the lens are well known and have been commercially available for decades. Such morgamc lenses, however, suffer the disadvantage of bemg relatively heavy and less comfortable to the wearer when compared to organic lenses. Consequently, the majority of the eyeglass lenses produced today are typically formed from organic matenals rather than morgamc matenals. Accordmgly, photochromic plastic eyeglass lenses have been the subject of considerable attention m recent years.

Efforts to provide a plastic eyeglass lens which demonstrates photochromic performance have pnmanly centered around permeating and/or covermg the surface(s) of an already formed lens with photochromic pigments. This general technique may be accomplished by a number of specific methods. For example, (a) the lens may be soaked m a heated bath which contams photochromic pigments, (b) photochromic pigments may be transferred mto the surface of a plastic lens via a solvent assisted transfer process, or (c) a coatmg contammg photochromic pigments may be applied to the surface of a lens. A problem with such methods may be that the lens often might not absorb enough of the photochromic pigments at low temperatures, resultmg m an eyeglass lens which does not exhibit acceptable photochromic performance. Unfortunately, mcreasmg the temperature used dunng absorption of the photochromic pigments may not be a solution to this problem smce at high temperatures degradation of the polymer contamed withm the lens may occur.

Attempts have also been made to incorporate photochromic pigments into the liquid monomer from which plastic lenses are thermally polymerized. See U.S. Patent No. 4,913,544 to Rickwood et al, wherem it is disclosed that tnethyleneglycol dimethacrylate monomer was combmed with 0.2% by weight of vaπous spuo-oxazine compounds and 0.1% benzoyl peroxide and subsequently thermally polymenzed to form non-prescnption eyeglass lenses Generally, efforts to mcorporate photochromic pigments mto the liquid monomer from which the lenses are polymerized have been unsuccessful. It is believed that the organic peroxide catalysts utilized to initiate the thermal polymerization reaction tend to damage the photochromic pigments, impairing then photochromic response

Curmg of an eyeglass lens usmg activatmg light to initiate the polymerization of a lens forming composition generally requues that the composition exhibit a high degree of activatmg light transmissibihty so that the activating radiation may penetrate to the deeper regions of the lens cavity Otherwise the resultmg cast lens may possess optical aberrations and distortions The cast lens may also contain layers of cured material in the regions closest to the transparent mold faces, sandwichmg inner layers which are either incompletely cured, gelled, barely gelled, or even liquid Often, when even small amounts of ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compounds of the types well known m the art are added to a normally light curable lens forming composition, substantially the entue amount of lens formmg composition contamed withm the lens cavity may remam liquid m the presence of activatmg light

Photochromic pigments which have utility for photochromic eyeglass lenses absorb ultraviolet light strongly and change from an unactivated state to an activated state when exposed to ultraviolet light The presence of photochromic pigments, as well as other ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds within a lens formmg composition, generally does not permit enough activatmg radiation to penetrate into the depths of the lens cavity sufficient to cause photomitiators to break down and initiate polymerization of the lens formmg composition Thus, it may be difficult to cure a lens formmg composition contammg ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds usmg activating hght (e g , if the activatmg light has a wavelength m the ultraviolet or visible region) It is therefore desnable to provide a method for usmg activatmg light to initiate polymerization of an eyeglass lens formmg monomer which contams ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds, m spite of the high activatmg light absorption charactenstics of the ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds Examples of such ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compounds other than photochromic pigments are fixed dyes and colorless additives In an embodiment, an ophthalmic eyeglass lens may be made from a lens formmg composition compnsmg a monomer, an ultraviolet visible light absorbmg compound, a photomitiator, and a co-initiator Herem, an "ophthalmic eyeglass lens" is taken to mean any plastic eyeglass lens, mcludmg a prescnption lens, a non- prescnption lens, a progressive lens, a sunglass lens, and a bifocal lens The lens forming composition, m liquid form, is preferably placed m a mold cavity defined by a first mold member and a second mold member It is believed that activatmg light which is duected toward the mold members to activate the photomitiator causes the photomitiator to form a polymer cham radical The polymer cham radical preferably reacts with the co-initiator more readily than with the monomer The co-initiator may react with a fragment or an active species of either the photomitiator or the polymer cham radical to produce a monomer initiating species m the regions of the lens cavity where the level of activatmg light may be either relatively low or not present Preferably, the monomers selected as components of the lens formmg composition are capable of dissolving the ultraviolet visible light absorbmg compounds added to them Herem, "dissolving" is taken to mean bemg substantially homogeneously mixed with For example, monomers may be selected from a group mcludmg polyether (allyl carbonate) monomers, multi-functional acrylate monomers, and multi-functional methacrylic monomers for use in an ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg lens formmg composition In an embodiment, the following mixture of monomers, heremafter referred to as PRO-629, may be blended together before addition of other components requued to make the lens formmg composition This blend of monomers is preferably used as the basis for a lens formmg composition to which ultraviolet visible light absorbmg compounds are added

32% Tπpropyleneglycol diacrylate (SR-306)

21% Tetraethyleneglycol diacrylate (SR-268) 20% Tπmethylolpropane tπacrylate (SR-351 )

17% Bisphenol A bis allyl carbonate (HiRi)

10% Hexanediol dimethacrylate (SR-239) The acrylic and methacrylic monomers listed above are commercially available from Sartomer Company m Exton, Pennsylvania The bisphenol A bis allyl carbonate is commercially available from PPG in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania The hexanediol dimethacrylate is hereinafter refened to as HDDMA

A polymerization inhibitor may be added to the monomer mixture at relatively low levels to inhibit polymerization of the monomer at mappropnate tunes (e g., dunng storage) Preferably about 0 to 50 ppm of monomethylether hydroquinone (MEHQ) are added to the monomer mixture It is also prefened that the acidity of the monomer mixture be as low as possible Preferably less than about 100 ppm residual acrylic acid exists m the mixture. It is also prefened that the water content of the monomer mixture be relatively low, preferably less than about 0 15 % Photomitiators mclude: 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenyl ketone commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Irgacure 184; mixtures of bιs(2,6-dιmethoxybenzoyl) (2,4,4-tnmethyl phenyl) phosphme oxide and 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-l-phenyl-propan-l-one commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Irgacure 1700, mixtures of bιs(2,6-dunethoxybenzoyl) (2,4,4 tπmethyl phenyl) phosphme oxide and 1- hydroxycyclohexylphenyl ketone commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade names of Irgacure 1800 and Irgacure 1850, 2,2-dιmethoxy-2-phenyl acetophenone commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Irgacure 651, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-l-phenyl-propan-l-one commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade names of Darocur 1173, mixtures of 2,4,6-trunethylbenzoyl-dιphenylphoshme oxide and 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-l-phenyl-propan-l-one commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Darocur 4265, 2,2-dιethoxyacetophenone (DEAP) commercially available from First Chemical Corporation of Pascagoula, Mississippi, benzil dimethyl ketal commercially available from Sartomer Company under the trade name of KB-1; an alpha hydroxy ketone mitiator commercially available from Sartomer company under the trade name of Esacure KIP 100F, 2-methyl thioxanthone (MTX), 2-chloro-thιoxanthone (CTX), thioxanthone (TX), and xanthone, all commercially available from Aldπch Chemical, 2-ιsopropyl-thιoxanthone (ITX) commercially available from Aceto Chemical m Flushmg, New York; mixtures of tπaryl sulfonmm hexafluoroantimonate and propylene carbonate commercially available from Sartomer Company under the trade names of SarCat CD 1010, SarCat 1011, and SarCat KI85; diaryhodinium hexafluoroantimonate commercially available from Sartomer Company under the trade name of SarCat CD-1012; mixtures of benzophenone and 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenyl ketone commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Irgacure 500, 2-benzyl-2-N,N- dιmethylamιno-l-(4-morpholιnophenyl)-l-butanone commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Irgacure 369; 2-methyl- l-[4-(methylfhιo)phenyl]-2-morpholmo-propan-l -one commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Irgacure 907; bιs(η5-2,4-cyclopentadιen-l-yl)-bιs-[2,6-dιfluoro-3- (lH-pyπol-1-yl) phenyl] titanium commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Irgacure 784 DC, mixtures of 2,4,6-tπmethyl-benzophenone and 4-methyl-benzophenone commercially available from Sartomer Company under the trade name of EsaCure TZT, and benzoyl peroxide and methyl benzoyl formate both available from Aldnch Chemical in Milwaukee, Wisconsm

A prefened photomitiator is bιs(2,6-dιmethoxybenzoyl) (2,4,4 tnmethyl phenyl) phosphme oxide, commercially available from Ciba Additives in Tarrytown. New York under the trade name of CGI-819 The amount of CGI-819 present in a lens forming composition contammg photochromic compounds preferably ranges from about 30 ppm by weight to about 2000 ppm by weight Co-initiators mclude reactive amine co-initiators commercially available from Sartomer Company under the trade names of CN-381, CN-383, CN-384, and CN-386, where these co-initiators are monoacryhc amines, diacry c armnes, or mixtures thereof Other co-initiators include N-methyldiethanolamine (NMDEA), tnethanolamme (TEA), ethyl-4-dunethylamιnobenzoate (E-4-DMAB), ethyl-2-dιmethylammobenzoate (E-2- DMAB), all commercially available from Aldrich Chemicals. Co-initiators which may also be used mclude n- butoxyethyl-4-dunethylammo benzoate, ^-dimethyl ammo benzaldehyde Other co-initiators include N, N- dιmethyl-/?-toluιdιne, octyl-/j-(dιmethylammo) benzoate commercially available from The First Chemical Group of Pascagoula, Mississippi

Preferably, the co-initiator is N-methyldiethanolamine (NMDEA) commercially available from Aldnch Chemical in Milwaukee, Wisconsm, CN-384 commercially available from Sartomer Company, or CN-386 also commercially available from Sartomer Company The quantity of NMDEA present in a lens formmg composition contammg photochromic pigments is preferably between about 1 ppm by weight and 7% by weight and more preferably between about 0 3% and 2% by weight Further, certain fixed pigments which may be added to the lens formmg composition to create a background color withm the lens (i.e., to tmt the lens), may also function as co- initiators. Examples of such fixed pigments mclude Thermoplast Blue P, Oil Soluble Blue II, Thermoplast Red 454, Thermoplast Yellow 104, Zapon Brown 286, Zapon Brown 287, all commercially available from BASF Corporation m Holland, Michigan.

Ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds which may be added to a normally ultraviolet/visible light transmissible lens formmg composition mclude 2-(2H benzotπazole-2-yl)-4-( 1,1,3,3 tetramethylbuty.)phenol and 2-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone, both commercially available from Aldnch Chemical as well as mixtures of 2- [4-((2-hydroxy-3-dodecyloxypropyl)-oxy)-2-hydroxyphenyl]-4,6-bιs(2,4-drmethylphenyl)- 1 ,3,5-tnazme and 2-[4- ((2-hydroxy-3-tndecyloxypropyl)-oxy)-2-hydroxyphenyl]-4,6-bis(2,4-dimethylphenyl-l,3,5-tnazme commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Tmuvm 400, mixtures of poly (oxy-l,2-ethanedιyl), α-(3-(3- (2H-benzotπazol-2-yl)-5-(l,l-dιmethylethyl)-4-hydroxyphenyl)-l-oxopropyl)-ω-hydroxy and poly (oxy- 1,2- ethanediyl), cc-(3-(3-(2H-benzotnazol-2-yl)-5-(l,l-dιmethylethyl)-4-hydroxyphenyl)-l-oxopropyl)-ω-(3-(3-(2H- benzotπazol-2-yl)-5-l,l-dιmethylethyl)-4-hydroxyphenyl)-l-oxopropoxy) commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Tmuvm 1130. Other ultraviolet/visible light absorbers may include Tmuvm 328, Tmuvm 900, 2-(2 hydroxy-5-methyl-phenyl) benzotnazole, ethyl-2-cyano 3,3-dιphenyl acrylate, and phenyl sahcylate. While any number of families of photochromic pigments may be incorporated mto the blend of monomers, either individually or in combmation, spuopyrans, spuonaphthoxazines, spiropyπdobenzoxazmes, spuobenzoxazn.es, napthopyrans, benzopyrans, spuooxazines, spuonapthopyrans, indolinospuonapthoxazu.es, indolinospuonapthopyrans, diarylnapthopyrans, and organometalhc matenals are of particular mterest A phenylmercury compound available from Marks Polarized Corporation m Hauppauge, New York under the trade name of A241 may be an appropπate organometalhc matenal The quantity of photochromic pigments present in the lens formmg composition is preferably sufficient to provide observable photochromic effect. The amount of photochromic pigments present m the lens formmg composition may widely range from about 1 ppm by weight to 5% by weight. In preferred compositions, the photochromic pigments are present m ranges from about 30 ppm to 2000 ppm In the more prefened compositions, the photochromic pigments are present m ranges from about 150 ppm to 1000 ppm The concentration may be adjusted dependmg upon the thickness of the lens being produced to obtam optimal visible light absorption charactenstics

In an embodiment, hmdered amine light stabilizers may be added to the lens formmg composition It is believed that these materials act to reduce the rate of degradation of the cured polymer caused by exposure to ultraviolet light by deactivatmg harmful polymer radicals These compounds may be effective m terminating oxygen and carbon free radicals, and thus interfering with the different stages of auto-oxidation and photo- degradation A useful hmdered amine light stabilizer is bιs(l,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-pιpeπdιnyl)-sebacate commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Tinuvm 292 Hmdered phenolic anti-oxidants and thermal stabilizers may also be added to a lens forming composition The hmdered phenolic compounds hereof include thiodiethylene bis(3,5,-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy)hydroxycinnamate commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Irganox 1035 and octadecyl-3,5-bιs(l,l-dιmethylethyl)-4-hydroxybenzene- propanoate commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Irganox 1076

Preferably, more than one monomer and more than one initiator are used in a lens forming composition to ensure that the initial polymeπzation of the lens forming composition with activating light does not occur over too short a period of time The use of such a lens formmg composition may allow greater control over the gel formation, resulting m better control of the optical quality of the lens Further, greater control over the rate of exothermic heat generation may be achieved Thus, crackmg of the lens and premature release of the lens from the mold which are typically caused by the release of heat may be prevented An example of a poor mitiator system was observed when CGI-819 was used alone as a photomitiator m combmation with the PRO-629 monomer blend to which ultraviolet visible light absorbmg compounds had been added When such an mitiator system was used, a fast rate of reaction occuned near the surface of the lens cavity while a very slow rate of reaction occuned m the deeper regions of the cavity The resultant lens exhibited unwanted waves and distortions

In another example, a small amount of a co-initiator, l e , NMDEA was added to the above lens formmg composition Duπng the cunng process, two separate waves of heat were generated when the composition was inadiated continuously with activatmg light at about 600 microwatts/cm² One possible explanation for this phenomena is that the first wave resulted from reaction of the NMDEA and the second wave resulted from the reaction of the unconsumed portion of the CGI-819 Another possible explanation is that the rate of reaction was faster m the top portion than in the bottom portion of the lens formmg composition smce activating light was separately directed toward both the bottom and the top mold members A thud wave of heat generation may also occur if the rate of reaction at the middle portion of the lens formmg composition is different from the rates at the bottom and top portions Unfortunately, the resultmg lens possessed waves and distortions It is postulated, however, that as the amounts of both CGI-819 and NMDEA are mcreased, the two waves of exothermic heat will move closer together m time, causmg the optical quality of the lens to improve, the hardness of the lens to mcrease, and the rate of heat generation to be slow enough to prevent crackmg and premature release of the lens from the mold

It is anticipated that the optimal amount of initiators may be achieved when the total amount of both initiators are minimized subject to the constraint of complete polymerization and production of a rigid, abenation free lens The relative proportions of the photomitiator to the co-initiator may be optimized by experimentation For example, an ultraviolet/visible light absorptive lens formmg composition that includes a photoinitiator with no co-initiator may be cured. If waves and distortions are observed in the resulting lens, a co-mitiator may then be added to the lens formmg composition by mcreasmg amounts until a lens having the best optical properties is formed It is anticipated that excess co-mitiator m the lens formmg composition should be avoided to inhibit problems of too rapid polymerization, yellowing of the lens, and migration of residual, unreacted co-initiator to the surface of the finished lens.

The following charts may be used as a guide in the selection of an appropriate photomitiator/co-initiator system for various ultraviolet/visible light absorbing lens formmg compositions.

Photomitiator Guide

Co-initiator Guide

As mentioned above, exothermic reactions occur durmg the curing process of the lens formmg composition The thicker portions of the lens formmg composition may generate more heat than the thinner portions of the composition as a result of the exothermic reactions taking place It is believed that the speed of reaction in the thicker sections is slower than m the thinner sections Thus, m a positive lens a "donut effect" may occur in which the relatively thm outer portion of the lens formmg composition reaches its fully cured state before the relatively thick inner portion of the lens formmg composition Conversely, in a negative lens the relatively thm inner portion of the lens formmg composition may reach its fully cured state before the relatively thick outer portion of the lens formmg composition

An eyeglass lens formed usmg the above descπbed lens forming composition may be applicable for use as a prescnption lens or for a non-prescπption lens Particularly, such a lens may be used m sunglasses Advantageously, photochromic sunglass lenses would remam light enough in color to allow a user to see through them clearly while at the same tune prohibiting ultraviolet light from passing through the lenses In one embodiment, a background dye may be added to the photochromic lens to make the lens appear to be a dark shade of color at all tunes like typical sunglasses

3. Variable Color Photochromic Lens Forming Compositions

Photochromic compounds tend to absorb certain wavelengths of light strongly and change from a colorless state to a colored state The "colorless state" of a photochromic compound is defined as the state in which the compound exhibits no color or only a slight amount of color The "colored state" of a photochromic compound is defined as the state in which the photochromic compound exhibits a visible light color significantly stronger than the colorless state A "photochromic activating light source" is defined as any light source that produces light having a wavelength which causes a photochromic compound to change from a colorless state to a colored state "Photochromic activating light" is defined as hght having a wavelength capable of causing a photochromic compound to change from a colorless state to a colored state. Photochromic activatmg light typically mcludes light havmg a wavelength from between about 200 nm to about 500 nm A photochromic activatmg light source may also produce other wavelengths of light, besides photochromic activatmg light

A photochromic compound which is transparent and normally colorless will, upon exposure to a photochrormc activating light source (e g., ulttaviolet light), become colored and, therefore, less visible light transmissive When removed from the photochromic activating hght source, the photochromic substance tends to revert back to its colorless state. This may be represented by the following equation:

hv

Colorless ₄ Colored

-hv, heat

The colorless form is believed to be m equihbnum with the colored form. The equihbnum between the colorless form and the colored form may be controlled by the presence of photochromic activatmg light (represented by hv). If a photochromic compound is exposed to a photochromic activatmg light source, the equihbnum tends to shift toward the colored form of the photochromic compound When the photochromic activatmg hght source is removed, or reduced, or if the photochromic compound is heated, the equihbnum tends to shift back toward the colorless form of the photochromic compound Photochromic compounds of this type may be particularly useful m eyeglass lenses. In the absence of photochromic activatmg light (e.g., when mdoors) the glasses tend to remam colorless and hght transmissive. When exposed to a photochromic activatmg light source (e.g., sunlight) the photochromic compounds become activated and colored, lowering the light transmittance of the lens. The term "activated color" is defined as the color which an eyeglass attains when photochromic compounds, which are mcluded m the eyeglass lens, become activated and colored when exposed to a photochrormc activatmg light source. In this manner, photochromic compounds may allow a smgle lens to be used as both an mdoor lens and an outdoor lens.

When incorporated mto transparent plastic lenses and activated by exposure to a photochromic activatmg hght source, photochromic compounds tend to exhibit vaπety of colors (e.g., red, orange, yellow, green, blue, mdigo, purple, violet, gray, and brown), causmg the lens that the photochromic compounds are disposed withm to exhibit the color of the photochromic compound. Thus, the activated color of a photochromic eyeglass lens may be controlled by the particular photochromic compounds dispersed within the eyeglass lens.

It is known that the activated color of a photochromic eyeglass lens may take on more neutral colors, such as brown or gray, by formmg the eyeglass lens with two or more photochromic compounds present. U.S. Patent No. 4,968,454 to Crano et. al., describes a composition which mcludes two photochromic compounds used to form plastic lenses. The formed plastic lenses exhibit a gray or brown color in the presence of a photochromic activating light source. Crano et al., describes the use of two or more organic photochromic compounds within a plastic lens One of the organic photochromic compounds exhibits an absorption maximum in the range between about 590 nm to about 700 nm in the presence of a photochromic activating light source. The other organic photochromic compound exhibits an absorption maximum m the range between about 400 nm and less than about 500 nm. The ratios of the compounds may be varied to produce lenses which exhibit a variety of activated colors Typically, either the ratios of the photochromic compounds or the specific photochromic compound used may be varied to effect a change m the activated color of the lens

In an embodiment, a composition which includes two or more photochromic compounds may further mclude a light effector composition to produce a lens which exhibits an activated color which differs from an activated color produced by the photochromic compounds without the light effector composition The light effector composition may include any compound which absorbs photochromic activating light Light effector compositions may include photomitiators, non-photochromic ultraviolet/visible light absorbers (as defined above), non-photochromic dyes, and ultraviolet light stabilizers In this manner, the activated color of a lens may be altered without altering the ratio and or composition of the photochromic compounds This may be particularly important when large batches of lens formmg compositions are prepared before use If photochromic lenses which exhibit a vanety of activated colors are to be produced, it is typically necessary to create a separate lens formmg composition for each colored lens By using a hght effector composition, a smgle lens formmg composition may be used as a base solution to which a light effector may be added m order to alter the activated color of the formed lens

The activated color of a photochromic lens may be determined by the visible light absorption of the photochromic compounds m theu colored state When two photochromic compounds are present, the equihbnum between the colored and the colorless forms may be represented by the following equations

PC¹ Light

PC¹ Colorless PC¹ Colored

-PC¹ Light

PC² Light

PC² Colorless PC² Colored

-PC² Light

Where PC' Colorless represents the colorless form of the first photochrormc compound, PC² Colorless represents the colorless form of the second photochromic compound, PC light¹ represents the wavelengths of light which cause PC¹ Colorless to shift its colored state (PC¹ Colored) , PC light² represents the wavelengths of light which cause PC¹ Colorless to shift to its colored state (PC² Colored) As depicted m Fig 37, the wavelength of light which may activate the photochromic compounds PC¹ and PC² may differ dependmg on the chemical structure of the photochromic compounds PC light¹, which activates the first photochrormc compound PC¹, has a wavelength in the range between about λ¹ and λ² nm PC light², which activates the second photochromic compound, has a wavelength m the range between about λ³ and λ⁴ nm These wavelength ranges may differ (as depicted m Fig 37) or may be substantially the same

The addition of a light effector composition which absorbs photochromic activating light may cause a change m the activated color of the formed lens The change m activated color may be dependent on the range of photochromic activatmg light absorbed by the light effector composition The addition of light effector compositions may have different effects on the activated color of the lens, dependmg on the absorbance of the light effector composition. In one embodiment, the hght effector composinon may interfere with the photochromic activity of the first photochromic compound (PC). As illustrated m the equations below, the presence of a light effector composition (Effector¹) may cause a shift in the equilibrium of PC¹ while havmg little or no effect on PC².

PC¹ Light PC¹ Colorless + Affector¹ « *~ PC¹ Colored (decreased/increased)

-PC¹ Light

PC² Ught

PC² Colorless + Affector¹ PC² Colored (no significant effect)

-PC² Light

Such an effect may cause an increase or decrease m the concentration of PC Colored produced when the lens is exposed to a photochromic activating hght source. The equilibrium of the other photochromic compound PC may not be significantly altered. Thus, the activated color of the lens may be significantly different than the activated color of a lens that does not mclude a Ught effector composition (Effector¹). In the above case, if the concentration of PC' Colored is, for example, decreased, the activated color of the lens may become shifted toward the activated color of PC. For example, if the activated color of a lens which includes PC only is blue-green; with PC only is red; and with both PC and PC is gray; the activated color of the lens may become more red (e.g., shift from gray to green, yellow, orange or red) if the concentration of PC Colored is decreased. It is theorized that such an effector may have an absorbance m a region of light similar to the PC Light¹ region. The effector may interfere with the absorption of photochromic acαvating light by PC' by competmg with PC for the hght PC remains relatively unaffected by the light effector composition smce its active photochromic activatmg hght range differs significandy from the photochromic activating light range for PC¹. This is graphically illustrated in Fig. 37, where Effector' is depicted as havmg an absorpnon withm the PC Light' region. By competmg with PC for the photochromic activatmg light, Effector¹ may cause a decrease in the amount of PC Colored being produced.

In another embodiment, a hght effector may interact with both photochromic compounds, altering the amount of PC colored and PC² colored produced. The equanon below depicts this case:

PC¹ Light PC¹ Colorless + Affector² _t ^"*^"" PC¹ Colored (decreased/increased)

-PC¹ Ught

PC² Light PC² Colorless + Affector² _< ^{*" "} PC² Colored (decreased/increased)

^■PC² Ught Such an effect may cause an mcrease or decrease m the concentranon of both PC Colored and PC Colored produced when the lens is exposed to a photochromic acαvating hght source. This change in the equilibrium may cause the acαvated color of the lens to be significantly different than the acαvated color of a lens that does not mclude a Ught effector composinon. In the above case if the concentranon of PC Colored is, for example, decreased and the concentranon of PC² Colored is, for example, mcreased, the acαvated coior of the lens may become shifted toward the acnvated color of PC colored. For example, if the acnvated color of a lens which includes PC only is blue-green; with PC² only is red; and with both PC and PC² is gray; the acnvated color of the lens may become more red in the presence of the Ught effector composinon. The dirccπon of the shift may depend on which photochromic compound is effected more by the presence of the Ught effector composinon. It is theorized that the light effector composinon (Effector²) may have an absorbance m a region that significandy overlaps the PC Light¹ and PC Light² regions. The Ught effector composinon mterferes with the absorpnon of photochromic acπvanng hght by both PC' and PC² by competmg with the compounds for Ught havmg the appropriate acπvatmg wavelength. If the light effector mterferes with the photochromic Ught absorpnon of PC to a greater extent then PC² the color may shift toward PC². Altcrπanvely, the acnvated color may shift toward PC if the light effector absorpnon mterferes with the absorpnon of photochromic hght by PC² to a greater extent than PC'. In Fig. 37, Effector is depicted as havmg an absorpnon within both the PC and PC² absorpnon region.

In another embodiment, a Ught effector composinon may interfere with the photochromic acnvity of the second photochromic compound (PC²). As illustrated in the equanons below, the presence of a Ught effector composition (Effector³) may cause a shift in the equiUbπum of PC² while havmg little or no effect on PC.

PC¹ Ught PC¹ Colorless + Affector³ < PC¹ Colored (no significant effect)

-PC¹ Ught

PC² Light PC² Colorless + Affector³ _i PC² Colored (decreased/increased)

-PC² Ught

Such an effect may cause an mcrease or decrease m the concentranon of PC² Colored produced when the lens is exposed to a photochrormc acπvanng light source. The equilibπum of the other photochrormc compound PC may not be significantly altered. In the above case, if the concentranon of PC² Colored is, for example, decreased, the acnvated color of the lens may become shifted toward the acnvated color of PC. For example, if the acnvated color of a lens which mcludes PC only is blue-green; with PC² only is red; and with both PC and PC² is gray; the acnvated color of the lens may become more blue (e.g., shift from gray to green, green-blue, or blue) if the concentranon of PC Colored is decreased. It is theorized that such an effector may have an absorbance in a region of Ught similar to the PC Light² region. The effector may mterfere with the absorpnon of photochromic acnvatmg hght by PC² by competmg with PC² for the hght PC remains relatively unaffected by the hght effector composinon smce its acnve photochromic acnvatmg light range differs significandy from the photochromic acnvanπg hght range for PC² This is graphicaUy dlustrated m Fig. 37, where Effector² is depicted as havmg an absorpnon withm the PC Light² region By competmg with PC² for the photochromic acnvaπng hght, Effector³ may cause a decrease m the amount of PC² Colored bemg produced.

While the above examples relate to the use of two photochromic compounds, hght effector composiαons may be used to effect the acnvated color of a lens which mcludes more than two photochromic compounds. The color changes for these systems may be more vaned than descπbed above, due to the variety of ranges m which the photochrormc compounds absorb the photochromic acnvatmg hght For example, if three photochromic compounds are present with acnvated colors of red, blue and green, a vaπety of colors may be produced dependmg on the lnteracuon of the light effector composinon with the photochromic acnvanng hght The light effector may absorb the photochromic acnvanng light such that the concentranon of the colored form of two of the three photochromic compounds is reduced. The formed lens would than exhibit a color which is closest to the acnvated color of the non-effected photochromic compound. In the above example, a lens with an acnvated color of substantially blue, red, or green may be obtamed by the additton of a light effector. Alte nanvely, the Ught effector compound may reduce the concentranon of the colored form of only one of the photochromic compounds. In the above example, the acnvated color of the lens may become yellow (from red and green, with reduced amount of blue), green-blue (from green and blue, with reduced amount of red) or purple (from red and blue, with reduced amount of green). A full spectrum of acnvated colors may be produced by changing the composinon of the light effector composinon, without havmg to alter the rano or chemical composinon of the photochromic compounds.

It should also be understood that the hght effector composinon may mclude one or more hght effector compounds. The use of mulnple hght effector compounds may aUow the acαvated color of the lens to be further altered.

In another embodiment a photochromic acαvaαng hght dye may be added to the lens formmg composinon to alter the acnvated color of a lens. The dye preferably exhibits a dye color when exposed to visible light The dye color, however, is not significandy altered in the presence or absence of photochromic acnvatmg hght When mixed with a lens formmg composinon which mcludes at least one photochrormc compound the dye may alter the acnvated color of the lens, as well as the color of the lens m the absence of photochromic acnvanng hght.

In one embodiment the dye may mterfere with the photochromic activity of a photochromic compound. The acnvated color of a lens formed without the dye would preferably change when the dye is added to the lens The acnvated color of the lens may vary dependmg on the type of dye chosen In one embodiment the dye may mterfere with the absorbance of photochromic acnvanng light by the photochromic compound This mterference may lead to a reduced concentranon of the colored form of the photochrormc compound. The acnvated color of the lens may be a mixture of the dye color and the photochromic color For example, if a dye is blue and the photochromic compound is red, the lens may take on a purple color (i.e., a combinanon of the two colors) It should be understood that the acnvated color of the lens may be significantly different the an activated color of a lens m which the photochromic compound is unaffected by the dye. When the absorpnon of photochromic acnvatmg Ught by the photochromic compound is unaffected by the dye, the mtensity of the colored form of the photochromic compound may not be reduced. Thus, the acnvated coior of the lens is formed from a mixture of the dye color and the full mtensity of the colored form of the photochromic compound. When the dye mterferes with the photochromic acnvanng hght absorbance of the photochromic compound, the color of the lens is based on a combinanon of the dye and the reduced mtensity of the colored form of the photochromic compound. The reduced mtensity of the colored form of the photochromic compound may cause the lens to have a coior that is substannally different from the color produced when the unaffected colored foπn of the photochromic compound is mixed with the dye.

While descnbed above for one photochromic compound, it should be understood that the dye may have an effect on mixtures of photochromic compounds such that a full spectrum of colors may be achieved. The selecnon of the appropriate dye based on the photochromic compounds present allows the color of the lenses to be altered without changing the rano of the photochromic compounds. In an embodiment a lens formmg composinon mcludes at least two photochromic compounds. The photochromic compounds are preferably chosen to that have an acnvated color at opposite ends of the visible spectrum (e.g., blue and red). In one embodiment the photochromic compounds may be Reversacol Berry Red (giving a red acnvated color) and Reversacol Sea Green (giving a blue-green color). The appropriate mixture of these two photochroimc compounds gives the formed lens an acαvated color of gray. The addinon of effectors may cause the formed lens to have a wide vaπety of acαvated colors (e.g. red, orange, yeUow, yeUow green, green, aqua-green, blue, violet, purple, or brown). These changes m color may be accomplished without altering the rano between the first and second photochromic compounds.

A lens formmg composinon based on the PRO-629 mixture of monomers may be used to develop photochromic lenses (See the secnon ennded "Lens Formmg Composinons Including Ultraviolet/Visible Light Absorbmg Materials") The remainder of the lens formmg composinon preferably mcludes photomitiators, co- lniuators, photochromic compounds. The amount of photochromic pigments present m the lens formmg composinon may widely range from about 1 ppm by weight to 5% by weight. In preferred composinons, the photochromic pigments are present m ranges from about 30 ppm to 2000 ppm- In the more preferred composinons, the photochromic pigments are present m ranges from about 150 ppm to 1000 ppm. The concentranon may be adjusted dependmg upon the thickness of the lens bemg produced to obtam optimal visible hght absorpnon characterises.

To alter the coior of the acnve lens formed from this base composinon a light effector composinon may be added to the base composinon. The light effector composinon preferably mcludes one or more hght effectors. The hght effector composinon may be a pure composinon of one or more light effectors. Alternanvely, the light effectors may be diluted a solunon which has a composinon similar to the base composinon. The hght effectors preferably mclude photochromic acnvanng light absorbmg compounds. More preferably, non-photochromic photochromic acnva ng hght absorbmg compounds are added to alter the acnvated color of the formed lens Examples of hght effectors mclude polymeπzanon inhibitors (e.g., MEHQ), photoiniuators, co-imnators, fixed pigments and dyes, and hmdered amine light stabilizers. All of these classes of compounds are descπbed m greater detail m the previous secnon. After the Ught effector composinon has been added, the amount of hght effectors present m the lens formmg composition may widely range from about 1 ppm by weight to 5% by weight In prefened composinons, the Ught effectors are present m ranges from about 30 ppm to 2000 ppm. In the more preferred composinons, the Ught effectors are present in ranges from about 150 ppm to 1000 ppm. The. concentranon may be adjusted dependmg upon the thickness of the lens bemg produced to obtam optimal visible light absorpnon character-sacs.

An advantage of the descπbed composinon is that the activated color of a lens may be altered without altering the rano and or composinon of the photochromic compounds. By usmg a hght effector composinon, a smgle lens forming composinon may be used as a base composinon to which a Ught effector composinon may be added m order to alter the activated color of the formed lens. The base composinon may be suppUed for use m the producnon of a variety of photochromic lenses Along with the base composinon, a Ught effector composinon, which mcludes one or more light effector compounds, may be mcluded with the base composinon The Ught effector composinon may be added to the base composinon to alter the activated color of the formed lenses. In this manner, a smgle stock photochromic lens formmg composinon may be used to create photochromic lenses havmg a vaπety of acnvated colors.

In another embodiment the base composinon and at least two Ught effector composinons may be package together as a kit The addinon of the first light effector composinon may alter the acnvated color of the formed lenses to produce a first coior. The addinon of the second Ught effector composinon may alter the acnvated color of the formed lenses to produce a second color. Addinonal Ught effectors composinons may also be mcluded with the kit The kit may allow a user to produce lens formmg composinons which may be used to produce lens havmg a vaπety of acnvated colors by the addinon of the appropπate Ught effector composinon to the base composinon.

4. Mid-Index Lens Forming Composition

In an embodiment an ophthalmic eyeglass lens may be made from a lens formmg composinon compπsmg a monomer composinon and a photoimnator composinon

The monomer composinon preferably mcludes an aromatic contammg polyethylenic polyether funcnonal monomer. In an embodiment, the polyether employed is an ethylene oxide denved polyether, propylene oxide denved polyether, or mixtures thereof Preferably, the polyether is an ethylene oxide denved polyether. The aromatic polyether polyethylenic funcnonal monomer preferably has the general structure (V), depicted below where each R₂ is a polymenzable unsaturated group, m and n are mdependently 1 or 2, and the average values of j and k are each mdependently m the range of from about 1 to about 20 Common polymeπzable unsaturated groups mclude vmyl, allyl, aUyl carbonate, methacrylyl, acrylyl, methacrylate, and acrylate

R_J-[CH_r(CH₂)_m-0]_J-A,-[0-(CH₁)_D-CH,]_k-R_:

A, is the divalent radical denved from a dihydroxy aromanc-contammg matenal. A subclass of the divalent radical A, which is of particular usefulness is represented by formula (II).

m which each R, is independently alkyl contammg from 1 to about 4 carbon atoms, phenyl, or halo; the average value of each (a) is independently m the range of from 0 to 4; each Q is independently oxy, sulfonyl, alkanediyl having from 2 to about 4 carbon atoms, or alkylidene having from 1 to about 4 carbon atoms; and the average value of n is m the range of from 0 to about 3. Preferably Q is methylethyhdene, viz., isopropylidene.

Preferably the value of n is zero, in which case A, is represented by formula (HI):

m which each R„ each a, and Q are as discussed with respect to Formula II. Preferably the two free bonds are both m the ortho or para positions. The para positions are especially prefened.

In an embodiment, when para, para-bisphenols are chain extended with ethylene oxide, the central portion of the aromatic contammg polyethylenic polyether functional monomer may be represented by the formula:

where each R,, each a, and Q are as discussed with respect to Formula II, and the average values of j and k are each mdependently m the range of from about 1 to about 20.

In another embodiment, the polyethylenic functional monomer is an aromatic polyether polyethylenic functional monomer contammg at least one group selected from acrylyl or methacrylyl. Preferably the aromatic polyether polyethylenic functional monomer contammg at least one group selected from acrylate and methacrylate has the general structure (VI), depicted below where R„ is hydrogen or methyl, where each R„ each a, and Q are as discussed with respect to Formula II, where the values of j and k are each mdependently in the range of from about 1 to about 20, and where R, is a polymenzable unsaturated group (e g , vmyl, allyl, allyl carbonate, methacrylyl, acrylyl, methacrylate, or acrylate)

In one embodiment, the aromatic contammg polyether polyethylenic functional monomer is preferably an ethoxylated bisphenol A dι(meth)acrylate Ethoxylated bisphenol A dι(meth)acrylates have the general structure depicted below where each R„ is mdependently hydrogen or methyl, each R,, each a, and Q are as discussed with respect to Formula II, and the values of j and k are each mdependently m the range of from about 1 to about 20

Prefened ethoxylated bisphenol A dimethacrylates include ethoxylated 2 bisphenol A diacrylate (where j + k = 2, and R_o is H), ethoxylated 2 bisphenol A dimethacrylate (where j + k = 2, and R^ is Me), ethoxylated 3 bisphenol A diacrylate (where j + k = 3, and R_Q IS H), ethoxylated 4 bisphenol A diacrylate (where j + k = 4, and R_o is H), ethoxylated 4 bisphenol A dimethacrylate (where j + k = 4, and Ro is Me), ethoxylated 6 bisphenol A dimethacrylate (where j + k = 6, and Ro is Me), ethoxylated 8 bisphenol A dimethacrylate (where j + k = 8, and RQ is Me), ethoxylated 10 bisphenol A diacrylate (where j + k = 10, and R_o is H), ethoxylated 10 bisphenol A dimethacrylate (where j + k = 10, and R„ is Me), ethoxylated 30 bisphenol A diacrylate (where j + k = 30, and RQ IS H), ethoxylated 30 bisphenol A dimethacrylate (where j + k = 30, and Ro is Me) These compounds are commercially available from Sartomer Company under the trade names PRO-631, SR-348, SR-349, SR-601, CD- 540, CD-541, CD-542, SR-602, SR-480, SR-9038, and SR-9036 respectively Other ethoxylated bisphenol A dimethacrylates mclude ethoxylated 3 bisphenol A dimethacrylate (where j + k = 3, and R_o is Me), ethoxylated 6 bisphenol A diacrylate (where j + k = 30, and R^ is H), and ethoxylated 8 bisphenol A diacrylate (where j + k = 30, and R_o is H) In all of the above described compounds Q is C(CH₃)_: The monomer composition preferably may also mclude a polyethylenic funcnonal monomer Polyethylenic functional monomers are defined herem as organic molecules which mclude two or more polymenzable unsaturated groups Common polymenzable unsaturated groups include vmyl, allyl, allyl carbonate, methacrylyl, acrylyl, methacrylate, and acrylate Preferably, the polyethylenic functional monomers have the general formula (VII) or (VIII) depicted below, where each , is mdependently hydrogen, halo, or a C,-C₄ alkyl group and where A, is as described above It should be understood that while general structures (VII) and (VIII) are depicted as havmg only two polymenzable unsaturated groups, polyethylenic functional monomers havmg three (e g , tn(meth)acrylates), four (e g , tetra(meth)acrylates), five (e g , penta(meth)acrylates), six (e g , hexa(meth)acrylates) or more groups may be used

Prefened polyethylenic functional monomers which may be combined with an aromatic contammg polyethylenic polyether functional monomer to form the monomer composition include, but are not limited to, ethoxylated 2 bisphenol A dimethacrylate, tns(2-hydroxyethyl)isocyanurate tnacrylate, ethoxylated 10 bisphenol A dimethacrylate, ethoxylated 4 bisphenol A dimethacrylate, dipentaerythntol pentaacrylate, 1,6-hexanediol dimethacrylate, isobornyl acrylate, pentaerythπtol tnacrylate, ethoxylated 6 tπmethylolpropane tnacrylate, and bisphenol A bis allyl carbonate

Accordmg to one embodiment, the liquid lens formmg composition mcludes ethoxylated 4 bisphenol A dimethacrylate Ethoxylated 4 bisphenol A dimethacrylate monomer, when cured to form an eyeglass lens, typically produces lenses that have a higher mdex of refraction than comparable lenses produced using DEG-BAC Lenses formed from such a mid-index lens formmg composition which mcludes ethoxylated 4 bisphenol A dimethacrylate may have an mdex of refraction of about 1 56 compared to the PRO-629 compositions (previously described) which tend to have an mdex of refraction of about 1 51 A lens made from a higher mdex of refraction polymer may be thinner than a lens made from a lower index of refraction polymer because the differences m the radii of curvature between the front and back surface of the lens do not have to be as great to produce a lens of a desired focal power Lenses formed from a lens formmg composition which mcludes ethoxvlated 4 bisphenol A dimethacrylate may also be more rigid than lenses formed from PRO-629 based compositions The monomer composition may mclude additional monomers, which, when combmed with ethoxylated 4 bisphenol A dimethacrylate, may modify the properties of the formed eyeglass lens and/or the lens formmg composition Tπs(2-hydroxyethyl)ιsocyanurate tnacrylate, available from Sartomer under the trade name SR-368, is a tnacrylate monomer that may be mcluded in the composition to provide improved clanty, high temperature rigidity, and impact resistance properties to the finished lens. Ethoxylated 10 bisphenol A dimethacrylate, available from Sartomer under the trade name SR-480, is a diacrylate monomer that may be included m the composition to provide impact resistance properties to the finished lens. Ethoxylated 2 bisphenol A dimethacrylate, available from Sartomer under the trade name SR-348, is a diacrylate monomer that may be mcluded m the composition to provide tintabihty properties to the finished lens Dipentaerythπtol pentaacrylate, available from Sartomer under the trade name SR-399, is a pentaacrylate monomer that may be included m the composition to provide abrasion resistance properties to the finished lens. 1,6-hexanediol dimethacrylate, available from Sartomer under the trade name SR- 239, is a diacrylate monomer that may be included in the composition to reduce the viscosity of the lens formmg composition Isobornyl acrylate, available from Sartomer under the trade name SR-506, is an acrylate monomer that may be included m the composition to reduce the viscosity of the lens formmg composition and enhance tinting charactenstics Bisphenol A bis allyl carbonate may be mcluded m the composition to control the rate of reaction dunng cure and also improve the shelf life of the lens formmg composition. Pentaerythntol tnacrylate, available from Sartomer under the trade name SR-444, is a tnacrylate monomer that may be mcluded m the composition to promote better adhesion of the lens formmg composition to the molds dunng cuπng. Ethoxylated 6 tπmethylolpropane tnacrylate, available from Sartomer under the trade name SR-454, may also be added. Photomitiators which may be used m the lens formmg composition have been descnbed m previous sections. In one embodiment, the photomitiator composition preferably mcludes phenyl bιs(2,4,6- tπmethylbenzoyl) phosphme oxide (IRG-819) which is commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Irgacure 819. The amount of Irgacure 819 present in a lens formmg composition preferably ranges from about 30 ppm by weight to about 2000 ppm by weight In another embodiment, the photomitiator composition may include a mixture of photomitiator. Preferably, a mixture of Irgacure 819 and 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenyl ketone, commercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name of Irgacure 184 (IRG-184), is used. Preferably, the total amount of photomitiators m the lens forming composition ranges from about 50 ppm to about 1000 ppm.

In another embodiment, an ophthalmic eyeglass lens may be made from lens forming composition compnsmg a monomer composition, a photomitiator composition, and a co-initiator composition. The lens formmg composition, m liquid form, is preferably placed m a mold cavity defined by a first mold member and a second mold member. It is believed that activating light which is directed toward the mold members to activate the photomitiator composition causes the photomitiator to form a polymer cham radical. The co-initiator may react with a fragment or an active species of either the photomitiator or the polymer cham radical to produce a monomer initiating species. The polymer cham radical and the monomer initiating species may react with the monomer to cause polymerization of the lens forming composition

The monomer composition preferably includes an aromatic contammg polyethylenic polyether functional monomer havmg a structure as shown above Preferably, the polyethylenic functional monomer is an aromatic polyether polyethylenic functional monomer contammg at least one group selected from acrylyl or methacrylyl.

More preferably, the polyethylenic functional monomer is an ethoxylated bisphenol A dι(meth)acrylate. The monomer composition may mclude a mixture of polyethylenic functional monomers, as described above The photomitiators which may be present m the lens formmg composition have been descπbed above

The lens formmg composition preferably mcludes a co-mitiator composition The co-initiator composition preferably includes amine co-initiators Ammes are defined herem as compounds of nitrogen formally derived from ammonia (NH₃) by replacement of the hydrogens of ammonia with organic substituents. Co-initiators include acrylyl amine co-mitiators commercially available from Sartomer Company under the trade names of CN-381, CN- 383, CN-384, and CN-386, where these co-initiators are monoacrylyl ammes, diacrylyl ammes, or mixtures thereof Other co-mitiators mclude ethanolamines Examples of ethanolamines include but are not limited to N- methyldiethanolamine (NMDEA) and tnethanolamme (TEA) both commercially available from Aldnch Chemicals Aromatic ammes (e g., aniline derivatives) may also be used as co-initiators Example of aromatic ammes include, but are not limited to, efhyl-4-dιmethylamιnobenzoate (E-4-DMAB), ethyl-2-dιmethylamιnobenzoate (E-2- DMAB), n-butoxyethyl-4-dιmethylamιnobenzoate, -dunethylammobenzaldehyde, N, N-dimethyl- -toluidine, and octyl-/?-(dιmethylamιno)benzoate commercially available from Aldnch Chemicals or The First Chemical Group of Pascagoula, Mississippi. Preferably, acrylated ammes are included m the co-initiator composition Acrylyl amines may have the general structures depicted m Fig 39, where Ro is hydrogen or methyl, n and m are 1 to 20, preferably 1-4, and R, and R₂ are mdependently alkyl contammg from 1 to about 4 carbon atoms or phenyl. Monoacrylyl ammes may mclude at least one acrylyl or methacrylyl group (see compounds (A) and (B) m FIG. 39). Diacrylyl ammes may mclude two acrylyl, two methacrylyl, or a mixture of acrylyl or methacrylyl groups (see compounds (C) and (D) m FIG. 39). Acrylyl ammes are commercially available from Sartomer Company under the trade names of CN-381, CN-383, CN-384, and CN-386, where these co-initiators are monoacrylyl ammes, diacrylyl ammes, or mixtures thereof. Other acrylyl ammes mclude dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate and dimethylaminoethyl acrylate both commercially available from Aldnch. In one embodiment, the co-mitiator composition preferably mcludes a mixture of CN-384 and CN-386 Preferably, the total amount of co-initiators m the lens formmg composition ranges from about 50 ppm to about 7 % by weight.

An advantage to lens formmg compositions which mclude a co-mitiator is that less photomitiator may be used to initiate cunng of the lens forming composition. Typically, plastic lenses are formed from a lens formmg composition which mcludes a photomitiator and a monomer To improve the hardness of the formed lenses the concentration of photomitiator may be mcreased. Increasmg the concentration of photomitiator, however, may cause mcreased yellowmg of the formed lens, as has been descnbed previously To offset this mcrease in yellowmg, a permanent dye may be added to the lens formmg composition. As the amount of yellowmg is mcreased the amount of dye added may also be mcreased Increasmg the concentration of the dye may cause the light transmissibility of the lens to decrease

A lens forming composition that mcludes a co-mitiator may be used to reduce the amount of photomitiator used. To improve the hardness of the formed lenses a mixture of photoinitiator and co-initiator may be used to initiate cunng of the monomer The above-descnbed co-initiators typically do not significantly contnbute to the yellowing of the formed lens By addmg co-initiators to the lens forming composition, the amount of photoinitiator may be reduced Reducmg the amount of photomitiator may decrease the amount of yellowing in the formed lens This allows the amount of dyes added to the lens formmg composition to be reduced and light transmissibility of the formed lens may be improved without sacrificing the ngidity of the lens.

The lens formmg composition may also mclude activatmg light absorbing compounds. These compounds may absorb at least a portion of the activating light which is directed toward the lens formmg composition dunng cunng. One example of activatmg light absorbmg compounds are photochromic compounds. Photochromic compounds which may be added to the lens formmg composition have been previously descnbed. Preferably, the total amount of photochromic compounds in the lens formmg composition ranges from about 1 ppm to about 1000 ppm. Examples of photochromic compounds which may be used m the lens forming composition mclude, but are not limited to Corn Yellow, Berry Red, Sea Green, Plum Red, Vanacrol Yellow, Palatinate Purple, CH-94, Vaπacrol Blue D, Oxford Blue and CH-266. Preferably, a mixture of these compounds is used. Vanacrol Yellow is a napthopyran matenal, commercially available from Great Lakes Chemical in West Lafayette, Indiana. Corn Yellow and Berry Red are napthopyrans and Sea Green, Plum Red and Palatmate Purple are spuonaphthoxazine matenals commercially available from Keystone Amlme Corporation m Chicago, Illinois. Vanacrol Blue D and Oxford Blue are spironaphthoxazme matenals, commercially available from Great Lakes Chemical in West Lafayette, Indiana. CH-94 and CH-266 are benzopyran matenals, commercially available from Chroma Chemicals in Dayton, Ohio. The composition of a Photochrormc Dye Mixture which may be added to the lens formmg composition is descπbed m Table 1.

Photochromic Dye Mixture

Table 1

The lens formmg composition may also other activating light absorbmg compounds such as UV stabilizers, UV absorbers, and dyes UV stabilizers, such as Tmuvm 770 may be added to reduce the rate of degradation of the formed lens caused by exposure to ultraviolet light UV absorbers, such as 2-(2H-benzotnazol- 2-yl)-4-(l,l,3,3,-tetramethylbutyl)phenol, may be added to the composition to provide UV blockmg charactenstics to the formed lens Small amounts of dyes, such as Thermoplast Blue 684 and Thermoplast Red from BASF may be added to the lens forming composition to counteract yellowing These classes of compounds have been described m greater detail in previous sections

In an embodiment, a UV absorbing composition may be added to the lens formmg composition. The UV absorbmg composition preferably includes a photomitiator and a UV absorber. Photomitiators and UV absorbers have been descπbed m greater detail m previous sections Typically, the concentration of UV absorber m the lens formmg composition reqmred to achieve desuable UV blockmg charactenstics is m the range from about 0.1 to about 0.25 % by weight For example, 2-(2H-benzotnazol-2-yl)-4-(l,l,3,3,-tetramethylbutyl)phenol may be added to the lens forming composition as a UV absorber at a concentration of about 0.17 %. By mixing a photomitiator with a UV absorbmg compound the combined concentration of the photomitiator and the UV absorber requued to achieve the desued UV blockmg charactenstics in the formed lens may be lower than the concentration of UV absorber required if used alone. For example, 2-(2H-benzotnazol-2- yl)-4-(l,l,3,3,-tetramethylbutyl)phenol may be added to the lens formmg composition as a UV absorber at a concentration of about 0.17 % to achieve the desired UV blockmg charactenstics for the formed lens Alternatively, a UV absorbmg composition may be formed by a combmation of 2-(2H-benzotπazol-2-yl)-4- (l,l,3,3,-tetramethylbuty.)phenol with the photomitiator 2-ιsopropyl-thιoxanthone (ITX), commercially available from Aceto Chemical m Flushing, New York. To achieve similar UV blocking charactenstics m the formed lens, significantly less of the UV absorbmg composition may be added to the lens formmg composition, compared to the amount of UV absorber used by itself. For example, 2-(2H-benzotnazol-2-yl)-4-(l,l,3,3,-tetramethylbutyl)phenol at a concentration of about 700 ppm, with respect to the lens formmg composition, along with 150 ppm of the photomitiator 2-ιsopropyl-thιoxanthone (2-ITX) may be used to provide UV blockmg charactenstics Thus, a significant reduction, (e g , from 0.15 % down to less than about 1000 ppm), in the concentration of UV absorber may be achieved, without a reduction m the UV blockmg ability of the subsequently formed lens. An advantage of lowering the amount of UV absorbmg compounds present m the lens formmg composition is that the solubility of the various components of the composition may be unproved.

Tables 2-6 list some examples of mid-index lens formmg compositions. The UV absorber is 2-(2H- benzotπazol-2-yl)-4-( 1 , 1 ,3 ,3 ,-tetramethy lbutyl)phenol

Table 3

Table 4

Table 5

Table 6

In one embodiment, plastic lenses may be formed by disposing a mid-mdex lens formmg composition mto the mold cavity of a mold assembly and inadiatmg the mold assembly with activatmg light. Coating matenals may be applied to the mold members prior to fillmg the mold cavity with the lens formmg composition. After filing the mold cavity of the mold assembly the mold assembly is preferably placed m the lens cuπng unit and subjected to activatmg light Preferably, actmic light is used to lπadiate the mold assembly A clear polycarbonate plate may be placed between the mold assembly and the activating light source The polycarbonate plate preferably isolates the mold assembly from the lamp chamber, thus preventmg airflow from the lamp coolmg fans from interacting with the mold assemblies The activating light source may be configured to deliver from about 0 1 to about 10 milliwatts/ cm2 to at least one non-casting face, preferably both non-casting faces, of the mold assembly Dependmg on the components of the lens formmg composition used the intensity of activatmg light used may be <1 milliwatt/cm² The mtensity of incident light at the plane of the lens cuπng unit drawer is measured usmg an International Light IL-1400 radiometer equipped with an XRL140A detector head This particular radiometer preferably has a peak detection wavelength at about 400 nm, with a detection range from about 310 nm to about 495 nm The International Light IL-1400 radiometer and the XRL140A detector head are both commercially available International Light, Incorporated of Newburyport, Massachusetts

After the mold assembly is placed withm the lens cuπng unit, the mold assemblies are preferably inadiated with activatmg light contmuously for 30 seconds to thirty mmutes, more preferably from one minute to five mmutes Preferably, the mold assemblies inadiated m the absence of a coolmg air stream After lπadiation, the mold assemblies were removed from the lens curing unit and the formed lens demolded The lenses may be subjected to a post-cure treatment m the post-cure unit

In general, it was found that the use of a photomitiator (e g , IRG-819 and IRG-184) m the lens formmg composition produces lenses with better charactenstics than lens formed using a co-initiator only For example, formula 15, described in the Table 4, mcludes a monomer composition ( a mixture of SR-348 and SR-454) and a co-initiator (CN-386) When this lens formmg composition was exposed to activatmg light for 15 mm there was no significant reaction or gel formation It is believed that the co-initiator requues an mitiatmg species in order to catalyze cunng of the monomer composition Typically this mitiatmg species is produced from the reaction of the photomitiator with activatmg light A vanety of photomitiators and photomitiators combmed with co-initiators may be used to initiate polymerization of the monomer composition One mitiator system which may be used includes photomitiators IRG-819 and 2-ITX and a co- mitiator, see Formulas 17-18 Such a system is highly efficient at mitiatmg polymerization reactions The efficiency of a polymerization catalyst is a measurement of the amount of photomitiator requued to initiate a polymerization reaction A relatively small amount of an efficient photomitiator may be required to catalyze a polymerization reaction, whereas a greater amount of a less efficient photomitiator may be requued to catalyze the polymerization reaction The IRG-819/2-ITX/co-mιtιator system may be used to cure lenses formmg compositions which mclude a UV absorbmg compound This mitiator system may also be used to form colored lenses

An mitiator system that is less efficient than the IRG-819/2-ITX/co-mιtιator system mcludes a mixture of the photomitiators IRG-819 and 2-ITX, see Formula 31 This system is less efficient at mitiatmg polymerization of lens forming compositions than the IRG-819/2-ITX/co-imtiator system The IRG-819/2-ITX system may be used to cure very reactive monomer compositions An mitiator system having a similar efficiency to the IRG-819/2-ITX system includes a mixture of IRG-819 and co-initiator, see Formulas 1-6, 8-9, 11, 14-15, 19-22, and 25-26 The IRG-819/co-ιnιtιator system may be used to cure clear lenses which do not mclude a UV blockmg compound and photochromic lens formmg compositions

Another mitiator system which may be used mcludes the photomitiator 2-ITX and a co-mitiator This mitiator system is much less efficient at mitiatmg polymerization reactions than the IRG-819/co-ιmtιator system The 2-ITX/co-ιnιtiator system is preferably used for cuπng monomer compositions which include highly reactive monomers

The use of the above descnbed mid-mdex lens forming compositions may minimize or eliminate a number of problems associated with activatmg light cunng of lenses. One problem typical of cunng eyeglass lenses with activatmg light is pre-release. Pre-release may be caused by a number of factors If the adhesion between the mold faces and the shrinking lens forming composition is not sufficient, pre-release may occur. The propensity of a lens formmg composition to adhere to the mold face, m combmation with its shπnkage, determine how the process vaπables are controlled to avoid pre-release. Adhesion is affected by such factors as geometry of the mold face (e g., high-add flat-top bifocals tend to release because of the sharp change in cavity height at the segment line), the temperature of the mold assembly, and the charactenstics of the m-mold coatmg matenal The process vanables which are typically vaned to control pre-release mclude the application of coolmg fluid to remove exothermic heat, controlling the rate of heat generation by mampulatmg the mtensities and timing of the activating radiation, providmg differential light distnbution across the thm or thick sections of the mold cavity manipulating the thickness of the molds, and providmg m-mold coatmgs which enhance adhesion. An advantage of the above descnbed mid-mdex lens formmg compositions is that the composition appears to have enhanced adhesion charactenstics This may allow acceptable lenses to be produced over a greater vaπety of cunng conditions. Another advantage is that higher diopter lenses may be produced at relatively low pre-release rates, broadening the achievable prescnption range

Another advantage of the above descπbed mid-mdex lens formmg compositions is that they tend to minimize problems associated with chipping duπng low mtensity cunng of lenses (e.g., m the 1 to 6 milliwatt range) Typically, durmg the irradiation of the lens formmg composition with activatmg light, small amounts of monomer may be squeezed out of the cavity and run onto the non-castmg faces of the molds. Alternatively, dunng fillmg of the mold assembly with the lens forming composition, a portion of the lens formmg composition may dnp onto the non-castmg faces of the mold assembly This "dripping" onto the non-castmg faces of the mold assembly tends to cause the activating light to focus more strongly m the regions of the cavity located underneath the dnppmgs. This focusmg of the activating light may affect the rate of curing. If the rate of cuπng underneath the dnppmgs vanes significantly from the rate of cunng throughout the rest of the lens formmg composition, optical distortions may be created m the regions below the dnppmgs.

It is believed that differences m the rate of gelation between the center and the edge regions of the lens forming composition may cause dnppmg to occur Duπng the cunng of a lens formmg composition, the matenal withm the mold cavity tends to swell slightly duπng the gel phase of the cuπng process. If there is enough residual monomer around the gasket hp, this liquid will tend to be forced out of the cavity and onto the non-castmg faces of the mold This problem tends to be minimized when the lens formmg composition undergoes fast, uniform gelation Typically, a fast uniform gelation of the lens formmg composition may be achieved by manipulating the timing, mtensities. and distribution of the activating radiation The above descπbed mid-index lens formmg compositions, however, tend to gel quickly and uniformly under a vaπety of cunng conditions, thus minimizing the problems caused by dnppmg

Another advantage of the above described mid-mdex lens formmg compositions is that the compositions tend to undergo uniform curing under a vaπety of cunng conditions This uniform cunng tends to minimize optical abenations within the formed lens This is especially evident dunng the formation of high plus power flattop lenses which tend to exhibit optical distortions after the lens formmg composition is cured It is believed that the activatmg radiation may be reflected off of the segment lme and create local differences m the rate of gelation m the regions of the lens formmg composition that the reflected light reaches. The above descnbed mid-mdex lens formmg compositions tend to show less optical distortions caused by vanations of the mtensity of activatmg radiation throughout the composition

Other advantages mclude drier edges and mcreased πgidity of the formed lens. An advantage of dner edges is that the contamination of the optical faces of the lens by uncured or partially cured lens formmg composition is minimized.

METHODS OF FORMING PLASTIC LENSES

Plastic lenses may be formed by disposing a lens forming composition into the mold cavity of a mold assembly and lπadiating the mold assembly with activatmg light Coatmg matenals may be applied to the mold members pπor to fillmg the mold cavity with the lens formmg composition. The lens may be treated m a post-cure unit after the lens-curing process is completed The operation of the above descnbed system to provide plastic lenses mvolves a number of operations.

These operations are preferably coordmated by the controller 50, which has been descnbed above. After powering the system, an operator is preferably signaled by the controller to enter the prescnption of the lens, the type of lens, and the type of coating materials for the lens. Based on these inputted values the controller will preferably mdicate to the operator which molds and gaskets will be requued to form the particular lens. After obtammg the appropnate mold members the mold members are preferably cleaned pπor to loadmg with a lens formmg composition The inner surface (l e., castmg surface) of the mold members may be cleaned on a spm coatmg unit 20 by spraymg the mold members with a cleanmg solution while spinning the mold members Examples of cleanmg solutions mclude methanol, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, or a water based detergent cleaner. Preferably, a cleaning solution which mcludes isopropyl alcohol is used to clean the mold members. As the mold member is contacted with the cleanmg solution, dust and dut may be removed and transfened mto the underlying dish 115 of the cunng unit. After a sufficient amount of cleanmg solution has been applied the mold members may be dπed by contmued spinning without the application of cleanmg solution

In an embodiment, the inner surface, l e., the castmg face, of the front mold member may be coated with one or more hardcoat layers before the lens formmg composition is placed withm the mold cavity Preferably, two hardcoat layers are used so that any imperfections, such as pm holes m the first hardcoat layer, are covered by the second hardcoat layer The resultmg double hardcoat layer is preferably scratch resistant and protects the subsequently formed eyeglass lens to which the double hardcoat layer adheres The hardcoat layers are preferably applied using a spm coatmg unit 20 The mold member is preferably placed in the spm coatmg unit and the coatmg matenal applied to the mold while spinning at high speeds (e g , between about 900 to 1000 RPM) After a sufficient amount of coatmg mateπal has been applied, the coatmg matenal may be cured by the activatmg light source disposed m the cover The cover is preferably closed and activatmg light is preferably applied to the mold member while the mold member is spinning at relatively low speeds (e g , between about 150 to 250 RPM) Preferably control of the spinning and the application of activatmg light is performed by controller 50 Controller 50 is preferably configured to prompt the operator to place the mold members on the coating unit, apply the coating mateπal to the mold member, and close the cover to initiate cunng of the coatmg matenal

In an embodiment, the eyeglass lens that is formed may be coated with a hydrophobic layer, e g a hardcoat layer The hydrophobic layer preferably extends the life of the photochromic pigments near the surfaces of the lens by preventing water and oxygen molecules from degradmg the photochromic pigments In a prefened embodiment, both mold members may be coated with a cured adhesion-promoting composition pnor to placmg the lens formmg composition mto the mold cavity Providmg the mold members with such an adhesion-promoting composition is prefened to mcrease the adhesion between the castmg surface of the mold and the lens formmg composition The adhesion-promoting composition thus reduces the possibility of premature release of the lens from the mold Further, it is believed that such a coatmg also provides an oxygen and moisture barner on the lens which serves to protect the photochromic pigments near the surface of the lens from oxygen and moisture degradation Yet further, the coatmg provides abrasion resistance, chemical resistance, and unproved cosmetics to the finished lens

In an embodiment, the castmg face of the back mold member may be coated with a mateπal that is capable of bemg tmted with dye pnor to fillmg the mold cavity with the lens forming composition This tintable coat preferably adheres to the lens formmg composition so that dyes may later be added to the resulting eyeglass lens for tinting the lens The tmtable coat may be applied usmg the spm coating unit as descπbed above

The controller may prompt the user to obtam the appropπate lens forming composition In one embodiment, the controller will inform the user of which chemicals and the amounts of each chemical that is required to prepare the lens formmg composition Alternatively, the lens formmg compositions may be preformed In this case the controller may mdicate to the operator which of the preformed lens formmg compositions should be used

In an embodiment, dyes may be added to the lens formmg composition It is believed that certain dyes may be used to attack and encapsulate ambient oxygen so that the oxygen may be inhibited from reactmg with free radicals formed dunng the cuπng process Also, dyes may be added to the composition to alter the color of an unactivated photochromic lens For mstance, a yellow color that sometimes results after a lens is formed may be "hidden" if a blue-red or blue-pink dye is present m the lens formmg composition. The unactivated color of a photochromic lens may also be adjusted by the addition of non-photochromic pigments to the lens formmg composition

In a prefened technique for fillmg the lens moldmg cavity 382 (see Fig 11), the annular gasket 380 is placed on a concave or front mold member 392 and a convex or back mold member 390 is moved into place The annular gasket 380 is preferably pulled away from the edge of the back mold member 390 at the uppermost pomt and a lens formmg composition is preferably mjected mto the lens moldmg cavity 382 until a small amount of the lens formmg composition is forced out around the edge The excess is then removed, preferably, by vacuum Excess liquid that is not removed could spill over the face of the back mold member 390 and cause optical distortion m the finished lens.

The mold assembly, with a lens formmg composition disposed withm the mold cavity, is preferably placed withm the lens curmg umt Curmg of the lens forming composition is preferably initiated by the controller after the lens cunng unit door is closed. The curmg conditions are preferably set by the controller based on the prescnption and type of lens bemg formed.

After the curing cycle has been completed. The controller preferably prompts the user to remove the mold assembly from the lens curmg unit. In an embodiment, the cured lens may be removed from the mold apparatus. The cured lens may be complete at this stage and ready for use.

In another embodiment, the cured lens may requue a post cure treatment. After the lens is removed from the mold apparatus the edges of the lens may be dned and scraped to remove any uncured lens formmg composition near the edges. The controller may prompt the user to place the partially cured lens mto a post-cure unit. After the lens has been placed withm the post-cure unit the controller may apply light and/or heat to the lens to complete the curmg of the lens. In an embodiment, partially cured lenses may be heated to about 115 °C while bemg inadiated with activating light. This post-treatment may be applied for about 5 minutes. When castmg a lens, particularly a positive lens that is thick m the center, crackmg may be a problem

Addition polymerization reactions, mcludmg photochemical addition polymerization reactions, may be exothermic. Dunng the process, a large temperature gradient may build up and the resultmg stress may cause the lens to crack. Yellowing of the finished lens may also be a problem. Yellowmg tends to be related to the monomer composition, the identity of the photomitiator, and the concentration of the photomitiator. The formation of optical distortions usually occurs duπng the early stages of the polymerization reaction dunng the transformation of the lens formmg composition from the liquid to the gel state. Once patterns leadmg to optical distortions form they may be difficult to eliminate. When gelation occurs there typically is a rapid temperature πse. The exothermic polymerization step causes a temperature mcrease, which m turn causes an mcrease m the rate of polymerization, which causes a further mcrease m temperature. If the heat exchange with the sunoundmgs is not sufficient to cool the lens, there will be a runaway situation that leads to premature release, the appearance of thermally caused stnations and even breakage.

Accordmgly, when continuous activatmg light is applied, it is prefened that the reaction process be smooth and not too fast but not too slow. Heat is preferably not generated by the process so fast that it may not be exchanged with the sunoundmgs. The mcident activating light mtensity is preferably adjusted to allow the reaction to proceed at a desued rate. It is also prefened that the seal between the annular gasket 380 and the opposed mold members 378 be as complete as possible.

Factors that have been found to lead to the production of lenses that are free from optical distortions may be (1) achievmg a good seal between the annular gasket 380 and the opposed mold members 378; (2) usmg mold members 378 havmg surfaces that are free from defects, (3) using a formulation havmg an appropriate type and concentration of photomitiator that will produce a reasonable rate of temperature rise; and (4) usmg a homogeneous formulation Preferably, these conditions are optimized.

Premature release of the lens from the mold will result in an incompletely cured lens and the production of lens defects Factors that contnbute to premature release may be (1) a poorly assembled mold assembly 352; (2) the presence of air bubbles around the sample edges, (3) imperfection in gasket lip or mold edge, (4) mappropπate formulation; (5) uncontrolled temperature rise, and (6) high or non-uniform shrinkage Preferably, these conditions are minimized.

Premature release may also occur when the opposed mold members 378 are held too ngidly by the annular gasket 380 Preferably, there is sufficient flexibility m the annular gasket 380 to permit the opposed mold members 378 to follow the lens as it shrinks Indeed, the lens must be allowed to shrink m diameter slightly as well as m thickness. The use of an annular gasket 380 that has a reduced degree of stickmess with the lens dunng and after cunng is therefore desuable.

Despite the above problems, the advantages offered by the radiation cured lens moldmg system clearly outweigh the disadvantages. The advantages of a radiation cured system mclude a significant reduction m energy requnements, cunng tune and other problems normally associated with conventional thermal systems.

1. Method of Forming a Plastic Lens by Curing with Activating Light.

In one embodiment, plastic lenses may be formed by disposmg a lens formmg composition mto the mold cavity of a mold assembly and lπadiating the mold assembly with activating light Coating matenals may be applied to the mold members pπor to fillmg the mold cavity with the lens formmg composition The lens may be treated m a post-cure unit after the lens-curing process is completed

The lens formmg composition is preferably prepared accordmg to the following protocol Appropnate amounts of HDDMA, TTEGDA, TMPTA and TRPGDA are mixed and stiπed thoroughly, preferably with a glass rod. The acrylate/methacrylate mixture may then be passed through a punfication column A suitable punfication column may be disposed withm a glass column havmg a fitted glass disk above a

Teflon stopcock and havmg a top reservon with a capacity of approximately 500 ml and a body with a diameter of

22 mm and a length of about 47 cm. The column may be prepared by placmg on the fitted glass disk approximately

35 g. of activated alumina (basic), available from ALFA Products, Johnson Matthey, Danvers, MA m a 60 mesh form or from Aldnch m a 150 mesh form. Approximately 10 g. of an inhibitor remover (hydroqumone/methylester remover) available as HR-4 from Scientific Polymer Products, Inc , Ontario, NY then may be placed on top of the alumina and, finally, approximately 35 g. of activated alumina (basic) may be placed on top of the inhibitor remover

Approximately 600 g. of the acrylate/methacrylate mixture may then be added above the column packing

An overpressure of 2-3 psi may then be applied to the top of the column resultmg m a flow rate of approximately 30 to 38 grams per hour. Parafilm may be used to cover the junction of the column tip and the receivmg bottle to prevent the infiltration of dust and water vapor The acrylate/methacrylate mixture, preferably, may be received m a container that is opaque to activatmg hght.

An appropπate amount of bisphenol A bιs(allyl carbonate) may then be added to the acrylate/methacrylate mixture to prepare the final monomer mixture An appropriate amount of a photoinitiator may then be added to the final monomer mixture. The final monomer mixture, with or without photomitiator, may then be stored m a contamer that is opaque to activatmg light

An appropnate amount of a dye may also be added to the final monomer mixture, with or without photoinitiator. After fillmg the mold cavity with the lens formmg composition, the mold assembly is preferably inadiated with activatmg light. In one embodiment, the lamps generate an intensity at the lamp surface of approximately 4 0 to 7 0 mW/cnr of ultraviolet light having wavelengths between 300 and 400 nm, which light is very uniformly distnbuted without any sharp discontinuities throughout the reaction process. Such bulbs are commercially available from Sylvania under the trade designation Sylvania Fluorescent (F15T8/2052) or Sylvama Fluorescent (F15T8/350BL/18") GTE Activatmg light havmg wavelengths between 300 and 400 nm is prefened because the photomitiators preferably absorb most efficiently at this wavelength and the mold members 378, preferably, allow maximum transmission at this wavelength It is prefened that there be no sharp mtensity gradients of activating light either horizontally or vertically through the lens composition dunng the curmg process Sharp mtensity gradients through the lens may lead to defects m the finished lens

If lenses are produced with continuous activating light without any mold coolmg, the temperature of the mold-lens assembly may πse to above 50°C. Low diopter lenses may be prepared m this fashion, but higher plus or minus diopter lenses may fail. Certain lenses may be made by controlling (e.g., coolmg) the temperature of the lens mateπal dunng cure with cuculating uncooled fluid (i.e., fluid at ambient temperatures). The ambient fluid m these systems is preferably directed towards the mold members in the same manner as descnbed above Cuculating ambient temperature fluid permits manufacture of a wider range of prescπptions than manufacture of the lenses without any mold cooling at all.

Many polymerization factors may be lnteπelated. The ideal temperature of polymerization is typically related to the diopter and thickness of the lens bemg cast. Lower temperatures (below about 10°C) are prefened to cast higher + or - diopter lenses when usmg continuous activatmg light. These lower temperatures tend to permit an mcrease m photomitiator concentration, which m turn may speed up the reaction and lower cuπng time.

Preventmg premature release when usmg continuous activatmg light may also be somewhat dependent upon the flow rates of coolmg fluid, as well as its temperature. For instance, if the temperature of the coolmg fluid is decreased it may also be possible to decrease the flowrate of coolmg fluid. Similarly, the disadvantages of a higher temperature coolmg fluid may be somewhat offset by higher flow rates of cooling fluid

In one embodiment the au flow rates for a dual distnbutor system (i.e., an au distributor above and below the lens composition) are about 1-30 standard cubic feet ("scf ') (about 0.028 - 0.850 standard cubic meters, "scm") per minute per distnbutor, more preferably about 4-20 scf (about 0.113-0.566 scm) per minute per distnbutor, and more preferably still about 9-15 scf (about 0.255-0.423 scm) per minute per distnbutor. "Standard conditions," as used herem, means 60 °F (about 15 5 °C) and one atmosphere pressure (about 101 kilopascals)

The thickness of the glass molds used to cast polymeπzed lenses may affect the lenses produced. A thinner mold tends to allow more efficient heat transfer between the polymerizing mateπal and the coolmg air, thus reducmg the rate of premature release In addition, a thinner mold tends to exhibit a greater propensity to flex. A thinner mold tends to flex dunng the relatively rapid differential shnnkage between the thick and thm portions of a polymerized lens, agam reducmg the mcidence of premature release In one embodiment the first or second mold members have a thickness less than about 5.0 mm, preferably about 1 0-5.0 mm, more preferably about 2.0-4 0 mm, and more still about 2.5-3 5 mm

"Front" mold or face means the mold or face whose surface ultimately forms the surface of an eyeglass lens that is furthest from the eye of an eyeglass lens wearer "Back" mold or face means the mold or face whose surface ultimately forms the surface of an eyeglass lens that is closest to the eye of an eyeglass lens wearer

In one embodiment, the lens formmg mateπal is preferably cured to form a solid lens at relatively low temperatures, relatively low contmuous activatmg light mtensity, and relatively low photomitiator concentrations Lenses produced as such generally have a Shore D hardness of about 60-78 (for prefened compositions) when cured for about 15 mmutes as descnbed above The hardness may be improved to about 80-81 Shore D by postcure heatmg the lens m a conventional oven for about 10 mmutes, as described above

The activating light cured lenses may demonstrate excellent organic solvent resistance to acetone, methyl ethyl ketone. and alcohols

2. Preparing Lenses of Various Powers By Altering the Lens Forming Conditons.

It has been determined that m some embodiments the finished power of an activating light polymerized lens may be controlled by manipulating the cuπng temperature of the lens formmg composition For mstance, for an identical combination of mold members and gasket, the focusmg power of the produced lens may be increased or decreased by changmg the mtensity of activatmg light across the lens mold cavity or the faces of the opposed mold members

As the lens formmg matenal begins to cure, it passes through a gel state, the pattern of which, withm the mold assembly, leads to the proper distribution of internal stresses generated later m the cure when the lens formmg mateπal begms to shrink. As the lens formmg mateπal shrinks duπng the cure, the opposed mold members will preferably flex as a result of the different amounts of shrinkage between the relatively thick and the relatively thm portions of the lens. When a negative lens, for example, is cured, the upper or back mold member will preferably flatten and the lower or front mold member will preferably steepen with most of the flexing occurring m the lower or front mold member Conversely, with a positive lens, the upper or back mold member will preferably steepen and the lower or front mold member will preferably flatten with most of the flexing occurring m the upper or back mold member. By varying the mtensity of the activating light between the relatively thm and the relatively thick portions of the lens m the lens formmg cavity, it is possible to create more or less total flexing Those light conditions which result m less flexing will tend to minimize the possibility of premature release.

The initial curvature of the opposed mold members and the center thickness of the lens produced may be used to compute the targeted power of the lens Herem, the "targeted power" of a lens is the power a lens may have if the lens were to have a curvature and thickness substantially identical to the mold cavity formed by the opposed mold members The activatmg light conditions may be manipulated to alter the power of the lens to be more or less than the targeted power

By varying the amount of activatmg light reachmg the lens mold the polymerization rate, and therefore the temperature of the lens forming composition may be controlled It has been determined that the maximum temperature reached by the lens formmg composition dunng and/or after activation by light may effect the final power of the lens By allowing the lens formmg composition to reach a temperature higher than the typical temperatures described in previous embodiments, but less than the temperature at which the formed lens will crack, the power of the lens may be decreased Similarly, controlling the polymerization such that the temperature of the lens formmg composition remains substantially below the typical temperatures described m previous embodiments, but at a sufficient temperature such that a properly cured lens is formed, the power of the lens may be increased Similarly, mcreasmg the temperature of the lens formmg composition durmg cunng may decrease the power of the resulting lens

In an embodiment, an ophthalmic eyeglass lens may be made from a lens formmg composition compnsmg a monomer and a photomitiator, by inadiation of the lens forming composition with activatmg light The composition may optionally include one or more of an ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compound, a polymerization inhibitor, a co-initiator, a hindered amine light stabilizer, and a dye The activating light may mclude ultraviolet, actmic, visible or mfrared light The lens formmg composition may be treated with activatmg light such that an eyeglass is formed that has a power substantially equal to the targeted power for a given mold cavity The peak temperature of the lens formmg process may be the maximum temperature attamed after the application of each pulse of activating light As depicted m Fig 40, each pulse of activating light may cause the lens formmg composition to rise to a peak temperature

After reachmg this peak temperature the lens formmg composition may begm to cool until the next application of activating light If the peak temperature of the lens formmg composition is controlled such that the formed lens has a power substantially equal to the targeted power, the peak temperature is refened to as the "matching temperature" The matching temperature may be determined by performing a senes of experiments usmg the same mold cavity In these experiments the peak temperature attamed dunng the process is preferably vaned By measuring the power of the lenses obtamed through this experiment the matchmg temperature range may be detemuned When the temperature of the lens formmg composition is allowed to nse above the matchmg temperature duπng treatment with activating light, the power of the lens may be substantially less than the targeted power of the lens Alternatively, when the temperature of the lens forming composition is allowed to remam below the matchmg temperature, the power of the lens may be substantially greater than the targeted power of the lens In this manner, a vanety of lenses having substantially different lens powers from the targeted power may be produced from the same mold cavity

When the lenses cured by the activatmg light are removed from the opposed mold members, they are typically under a stressed condition It has been detemuned that the power of the lens may be brought to a final restmg power, by subjectmg the lenses to a post-curing heat treatment to relieve the internal stresses developed duπng the cure and cause the curvature of the front and the back of the lens to shift Typically, the lenses may be cured by the activating light m about 10-30 minutes (preferably about 15 mmutes) The post-curing heat treatment is preferably conducted at approximately 85-120 °C for approximately 5-15 mmutes Preferably, the post-curing heat treatment is conducted at 100-110 °C for approximately 10 mmutes Prior to the post-cure, the lenses generally have a lower power than the final restmg power The post-cunng heat treatment reduces yellowmg of the lens and reduces stress m the lens to alter the power thereof to a final restmg power In an embodiment, an ophthalmic eyeglass lens may be made from a lens forming composition compnsmg a monomer and a photomitiator, by inadiation of the lens forming composition with activatmg light The composition may optionally include one or more of an ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compound, a polymerization inhibitor, a co-initiator, a hmdered amine light stabilizer, and a dye The activatmg light may mclude ultraviolet, actmic, visible or mfrared light The lens formmg composition may be treated with activating light such that an eyeglass is formed The lens may be kept withm the mold cavity formed by the mold members until the light has completely cured the lens forming composition The minimum tune which a lens must remam m the mold cavity to produce a lens with the targeted power, with respect to the mold cavity, is herem refened to as the "demolding tune" The demoldmg time may be determined by performing a series of experiments usmg the same mold cavity In these experiments the time that the lens is released from the mold cavity dunng the process is preferably varied By measuring the power of the lenses obtamed through these experiments the demoldmg tune range may be detemuned

When a formed lens is removed prior to the demolding time, the power of the lens may be substantially greater than the targeted power of the lens By varying the demolding tune a variety of lenses having substantially greater lens powers from the targeted power may be produced from the same mold cavity

3. Postcure With An Oxygen Barrier Enriched With Photoinitiator

In certain applications, all of the lens formmg composition may fail to completely cure by exposure to activatmg hght when forming the lens In particular, a portion of the lens formmg composition proximate the gasket often remams m a liquid state following formation of the lens It is believed that the gaskets may be often somewhat permeable to an, and, as a result, oxygen permeates them and contacts the portions of the lens formmg matenal that are proximate the gasket Since oxygen tends to inhibit the polymerization process, portions of the lens formmg composition proximate the gasket tend to remam uncured as the lens is formed

Uncured lens formmg composition proximate the gasket may be a problem for several reasons Fust, the liquid lens formmg composition leaves the edges of the cured lens m a somewhat sticky state, which makes the lenses more difficult to handle Second, the liquid lens formmg composition may be somewhat difficult to completely remove from the surface of the lens Thud, liquid lens formmg composition may flow and at least partially coat the surface of lenses when such lenses are removed from the molds This coatmg may be difficult to remove and makes application of scratch resistant coatmgs or tinting dyes more difficult This coatmg tends to interfere with the mteraction of scratch resistant coatmgs and tmtmg dyes with the cured lens surface Fourth, if droplets of liquid lens formmg matenal form, these droplets may later cure and form a ndge or bump on the surface of the lens, especially if the lens undergoes later postcure or scratch resistant coatmg processes As a result of the above problems, often lenses must be tediously cleaned or recast when liquid lens formmg composition remams after the lens is formed m an initial cure process The problems outlmed above may be mitigated if less liquid lens formmg composition remams proximate the gasket after the lens is formed One method of lessenmg this "wet edge" problem relates to mcreasmg the amount of photomitiator present m the lens formmg composition (l e , mcreasmg the amount of photoinitiator m the lens forming composition above about 0 15 percent) Domg so, however, tends to create other problems Specifically, mcreased photoinitiator levels tend to cause exothermic heat to be released at a relatively high rate durmg the reaction of the composition Premature release and/or lens crackmg tends to result Thus it is believed that lower amounts of photomitiator are prefened

The wet edge problem has been addressed by a variety of methods described m U S Patent No 5,529,728 to Buazza et al Such methods relate to removing the gasket and applying either an oxygen banier or a photomitiator enπched liquid to the exposed edge of the lens The lens is preferably re-madiated with sufficient activating hght to completely dry the edge of the lens pnor to demoldmg

An embodiment relates to improving the methods described m U S Patent No 5,529,728 to Buazza et al This embodiment relates to combmmg an oxygen barner with a photomitiator Specifically, in one embodiment an oxygen bamer 970 (e g , a thin stnp of polyethylene film or the like as shown m Fig 12) is preferably embedded or impregnated with a photoinitiator 972 The oxygen barner is preferably wrapped around the edge of a cured lens which is still encased between two molds (but with the gasket removed) While still "in the mold," the lens is preferably exposed to activating light, thereby drying its edge An improvement of this method over those previously disclosed is that there may be a significant reduction in the dosage of activatmg light necessary to bring the lens edge to dryness A plastic oxygen banier film which mcludes a photomitiator may be made by (a) immersing a plastic film m a solution comprising a photomitiator, (b) removmg the plastic film from the solution, and (c) drying the plastic film The solution may mclude an etchmg agent Preferably a surface of the plastic film is etched prior to or while immersing the plastic film m the solution

In one example, thm stnps (e g , about 10 mm wide) of high density polyethylene film (approximately 0 013 mm thick) may be soaked m a solution of 97% acetone and 3% Irgacure 184 (a photomitiator commercially available from Ciba Geigy located m Farmingdale, New Jersey) for about five minutes The polyethylene film may be obtamed from Tape Solutions, Inc (Nashville, Tennessee) In a more prefened embodiment, 0 5% BYK-300 (a flow agent commercially available from BYK Chemie located m Walhngford, Connecticut) may be mcluded m the soakmg solution It is believed that xylene in the BYK-300 tends to etch the surface of the film and make the film more receptive to absorption of the Irgacure 184 In a still more prefened embodiment, the treated polyethylene stnps may be dipped m acetone for about ten seconds to remove excess Irgacure 184 Excess photomitiator may be seen as a white powder which coats the strips after drying In either case, the strips are preferably allowed to air dry before applymg them to the edge of the lens as descnbed above

In one alternate embodiment, a plastic eyeglass lens may be made by the following steps (1) placmg a liquid polymenzable lens forming composition m a mold cavity defined by a gasket, a first mold member, and a second mold member, (2) duecting first activatmg light rays toward at least one of the mold members to cure the lens formmg composition so that it forms a lens with a back face, edges, and a front face, and wherem a portion of the lens formmg composition proximate the edges of the lens is not fully cured, (3) removmg the gasket to expose the edges of the lens, (4) applymg an oxygen barner which includes a photomitiator around the exposed edges of the lens such that at least a portion of the oxygen barner photomitiator is proximate lens formmg composition that is not fully cured, and (5) duecting second activatmg light rays towards the lens such that at least a portion of the oxygen barner photomitiator initiates reaction of lens formmg composition while the oxygen barner substantially prevents oxygen from outside the oxygen barner from contactmg at least a portion of the lens formmg composition The first and second activatmg light rays may (a) be at the same or different wavelengths and/or mtensities , (b) be contmuous or pulsed, and (c) be from the same or different light source

A purpose of the steps 4-5 is to reduce the amount of uncured liquid lens forming composition that is present when the lens is separated from the molds and/or gasket It has been found that reducing the amount of liquid lens formmg composition may be especially advantageous if such reduction occurs before the molds are separated from the cured lens Separatmg the molds from the cured lens may cause uncured liquids to at least partially coat the lens faces This coatmg may occur when uncured liquid lens formmg composition gets swept over the faces when the molds are separated from the lens It is believed that cunng of the lens tends to create a vacuum between the lens and the mold An may sweep over the mold faces to fill this vacuum when the molds are separated from the lens. This air tends to take liquid lens formmg composition mto the vacuum with it. In step 4 above, an oxygen barner which mcludes a photoinitiator is preferably applied to the edges or sides of the lens after the gasket is removed Preferably, this oxygen banier is applied while the lens is still attached to the molds. In an alternate embodiment, this oxygen banier is preferably applied to the edges or sides of the molds at the same time it is applied to the sides of the lens. In a prefened embodiment, the sides of the lenses are first cleaned or wiped to remove at least a portion of the uncured liquid lens formmg composition before the oxygen barner is applied.

After the oxygen banier is applied, second activatmg light rays may be duected towards the lens. After the second activatmg light rays are duected toward the lens, at least a portion of the liquid lens formmg composition that was not cured in the initial cure steps may be cured. It is believed that the photomitiator embedded m the oxygen barner facilitates faster and more complete curing of the uncured lens formmg composition As such, less second activating light rays may be employed, thereby lessenmg the tune and energy requued in this step. Furthermore, lens quality tends to be enhanced smce a lower application of the second activatmg light rays tends to reduce the potential for lens yellowmg.

In a prefened embodiment, substantially all of the remammg liquid lens formmg composition is cured after the second activatmg light rays are directed toward the lens. More preferably, the lens is substantially dry after the second activatmg light is duected towards the lens.

After the second activatmg light is duected toward the lens, the lens may then be demolded. The lens may then be tmted After the lens is demolded, a scratch resistant coatmg may be applied to the lens. In one embodiment, a scratch resistant coatmg is preferably applied to the demolded lens by applymg a liquid scratch resistant coatmg composition to a face of the lens and then applymg activatmg hght rays to this face to cure the liquid scratch resistant coatmg to a solid.

In an embodiment, the activatmg light for curmg the scratch resistant coatmg is ultraviolet light. The mtensity of the activating light applied to the face of the lens to cure the liquid scratch resistant coatmg composition to a solid is preferably about 150-300 mW/cm² at a wavelength range of about 360-370 nm, and about 50-150 mW/cm² at a wavelength range of about 250-260 nm. The lens may be heated after removal from the molds, or after application of a scratch resistant coatmg to the lens.

In a prefened embodiment, the above method may further mclude the additional step of duecting thud activatmg light rays towards the lens before the oxygen barner is applied. These thud activatmg light rays are preferably applied before the gasket is removed Preferably, the second and thud activatmg light rays are duected toward the back face of the lens (as stated above, the second and thud activatmg light rays are preferably applied while this lens is m the mold cavity). The thud activatmg light rays are preferably about the same range of mtensity as the second activating light rays The same apparatus may be used for both the second and thud activatmg light rays

In a prefened embodiment, the method described above also includes the step of removmg the oxygen barner from the edges of the lens. The second and third activating light rays may be repeatedly directed towards the lens For mstance, these activating light rays may be applied via a light assembly whereby the lens passes under a light source on a movable stand. The lens may be repeatedly passed under the lights Repeated exposure of the lens to the activatmg light rays may be more beneficial than one prolonged exposure. Preferably the oxygen bamer mcludes a film, and more preferably a plastic, flexible, and/or elastic film

In addition, the oxygen banier is preferably at least partially transparent to activatmg light so that activatmg light may penetrate the oxygen barner to cure any remammg liquid lens formmg composition Preferably, the oxygen barner is stretchable and self-sealing. These features make the film easier to apply. Preferably, the oxygen barner is resistant to penetration by liquids, thus keepmg any liquid lens formmg composition m the mold assembly. Preferably, the oxygen barner mcludes a thermoplastic composition. It is anticipated that many different oxygen bamers may be used (e.g., saran wrap, polyethylene, etc.). In one prefened embodiment, the film is "Parafilm M Laboratory Film" which is available from Amencan National Can (Greenwich, CT, U.S.A.). The oxygen barner may also mclude aluminum foil.

Preferably, the oxygen barner is less than about 1 0 mm thick. More preferably, the oxygen barner is 0.01 to 0.10 mm thick, and more preferably still, the oxygen barner is less than 0.025 mm thick. If the oxygen barner is too thick, then it may not be readily stretchable and/or conformable, and it may not allow a sufficient amount of light to pass through it. If the oxygen barner is too thm, then it may tend to tear

In an alternate method, a lens may be cured between two mold members. The gasket may be removed and any remammg liquid lens composition may be removed. At this pomt a mold member may be applied to a substantially solid conductive heat source. Heat may then be conductively applied to a face of the lens by (a) conductively transferring heat to a face of a mold member from the conductive heat source, and (b) conductively transferring heat through such mold member to the face of the lens. The oxygen barner ennched with photomitiator may then be applied, and second activatmg hght rays may be duected towards the lens to cure the remammg lens forming composition

4. Applying Coating Materials to Lenses

In an embodiment, coatmg apparatus 20 may be used to apply a pre-coat to a lens before the hardcoat is applied. The pre-coat may serve to mcrease the "wettabihty" of the surface to which the hardcoat is to be applied. A surfactant has been conventionally employed for this purpose, however surfactants tend to affect the volatility and flow charactenstics of lens coatings m an unfavorable manner. The pre-coat may mclude acetone and/or BYK- 300. Upon even distnbution of the hardcoat onto a lens, the coatmg may be wiped near the edges of the lens to prevent the formation of excessive flakes durmg cuπng.

5. Curing by the Application of Pulsed Activating Light A polymeπzable lens forming composition may be placed m a mold/gasket assembly and continuously exposed to appropπate levels of activatmg light to cure the composition to an optical lens. The progress of the cunng reaction may be determined by monitoring the internal temperature of the composition The lens formmg composition may be considered to pass through three stages as it is cured. (1) mduction, (2) gel formation & exotherm, and (3) extraction. These stages are illustrated m Fig 22 for a - 75 -1 00 power lens cured by continuous application of activating light. Fig 22 shows temperature withm the mold cavity as a function of time throughout a contmuous radiation cunng cycle.

The mduction stage occurs at the beginning of the curmg cycle and is typically characterized by a substantially steady temperature of the lens forming composition as it is irradiated with activating light (or falling temperature when the cunng chamber temperature is below that of the composition). Durmg the induction penod, the lens forming composition remams in a liquid state as the photomitiator breaks down and consumes inhibitor and dissolved oxygen present m the composition As the inhibitor content and oxygen content of the composition fall, decomposing photomitiator and the composition begin to form chains to produce a pourable, "syrup-like" matenal As inadiation contmues, the "syrup" proceeds to develop mto a soft, non-pourable, viscous, gel A noticeable quantity of heat will begin to be generated dunng this soft gel stage. The optical quality of the lens may be affected at this point. Should there be any sharp discontinuities m the mtensity of the activatmg light (for example, a drop of composition on the extenor of a mold which focuses light into a portion of the lens formmg composition proximate the drop), a local distortion will tend to be created m the gel structure, likely causmg an abenation m the final product. The lens forming composition will pass through this very soft gel state and through a firm gel state to become a crystalline structure When usmg OMB-91 lens formmg composition, a haze tends to form momentarily dunng the transition between the gel and crystalline stages. As the reaction contmues and more double bonds are consumed, the rate of reaction and the rate of heat generated by the reaction will slow, which may cause the internal temperature of the lens formmg composition to pass through a maximum at the pomt where the rate of heat generation exactly matches the heat removal capacity of the system. By the time the maximum temperature has been reached and the lens formmg composition begms to cool, the lens will typically have achieved a crystalline form and will tend to crack rather than crumble if it is broken. The rate of conversion will slow dramatically and the lens may begm to cool even though some reaction still may be occurring Inadiation may still be applied through this extraction phase. Generally, the curmg cycle is assumed to be complete when the temperature of the lens forming composition falls to a temperature near its temperature at the beginning of exotherm (l e , the pomt where the temperature of the composition increased due to the heat released by the reaction).

The contmuous inadiation method tends to work well for relatively low mass lenses (up to about 20-25 grams, see, e.g., U.S. Patents 5,364,256 and 5,415,816). As the amount of mateπal bemg cured mcreases, problems may be encountered. The total amount of heat generated duπng the exothermic phase is substantially proportional to the mass of the lens forming matenal. Dunng curmg of relatively high mass lenses, a greater amount of heat is generated per a given tune than dunng curmg of lower mass lenses. The total mold/gasket surface area available for heat transfer (e.g., heat removal from the lens formmg composition), however, remains substantially constant. Thus, the internal temperature of a relatively high mass of lens formmg material may rise to a higher temperature more rapidly than typically occurs with a lower mass of lens forming material. For example, the internal temperature of a low minus cast-to-finish lens typically will not exceed about 100 °F, whereas certain thicker semifinished lens "blanks" may attain temperatures greater than about 350 °F when continually exposed to radiation The lens formmg mateπal tends to shnnk as curing proceeds and the release of excessive heat dunng curmg tends to reduce the adhesion between the mold and the lens formmg matenal. These factors may lead to persistent problems of premature release and or crackmg during the curmg of lens formmg material havmg a relatively high mass

An advantage of the present method is the production of relatively high-mass, semi-finished lens blanks and high power cast-to-finish lenses without the above-mentioned problems of premature release and crackmg The methods descπbed below allow even more control over the process of cunng ophthalmic lenses with activating light-initiated polymerization than previous methods By interrupting or decreasmg the activatmg light at the proper time during the cycle, the rate of heat generation and release may be controlled and the mcidence of premature release may be reduced An embodiment relates to a method of controlling the rate of reaction (and therefore the rate of heat generation) of an activatmg light-curable, lens formmg matenal by applymg selected intermittent doses (e g , pulses) of radiation followed by selected periods of decreased activatmg light or "darkness" It is to be understood that in the descπption that follows, "darkness" refers to the absence of activating radiation, and not necessarily the absence of visible light

More particularly, an embodiment relates to (a) an initial exposure peπod of the lens formmg matenal to radiation (e g , continuous or pulsed radiation) extendmg through the induction period, (b) interrupting or decreasmg the inadiation before the matenal reaches a first temperature (e g , the maximum temperature the composition could reach if inadiation were contmued) and allowing the reaction to proceed to a second temperature lower than the first temperature, and (c) applying a sufficient number of alternating periods of exposure and decreased activating light or darkness to the lens forming matenal to complete the cure while controlling the rate of heat generation and/or dissipation via manipulation of the timing and duration of the radiation, or the coolmg m the cuπng chamber Fig 23 shows the temperature withm the mold cavity as a function of tune for both (a) continuous activatmg light exposure and (b) pulsed activatmg light exposure

In the context of this application, a "gel" occurs when the liquid lens formmg composition is cured to the extent that it becomes substantially non-pourable, yet is still substantially deformable and substantially not crystallized

In the following descnption, it is to be understood that the term "first peπod" refers to the length of tune of the initial exposure period where radiation (e g , m pulses) is applied to the lens formmg composition, preferably to form at least a portion of the composition mto a gel "Fust activatmg" rays or light refers to the radiation applied to the lens formmg composition duπng the initial exposure period "Second activating" rays or light refers to the radiation that is applied to the lens forming composition (e g , m pulses) after the composition has been allowed to cool to the "thud temperature" mentioned above "Second period" refers to the duration of tune that second activating rays are duected to the lens formmg composition "Thud period" refers to the duration of decreased activatmg light or darkness that ensues after activatmg light has been delivered m the second penod

In an embodiment, the lens formmg matenal is preferably placed in a mold cavity defined in part between a first mold member and a second mold member The first mold member and/or second mold member may or may not be contmuously cooled as the formation of the lens is completed dunng the second penod and/or thud penod One method of removmg heat from the lens forming material is to continuously duect au at a non- castmg face of at least one of the mold members It is prefened that air be directed at both the first and second mold members A cooler may be used to cool the temperature of the air to a temperature below ambient temperature, more preferably between about 0 °C and about 20 °C, and more preferably still between about 3 °C and about 15 °C. Air may also be used to cool at least one of the mold members (in any of the manners described previously) during the first period.

In an embodiment, the first period ends when at least a portion of the lens forming composition begins to increase in temperature or form a gel, and the first activating rays are decreased or removed (e.g., blocked) such that they cease to contact the first or second mold members. It is prefened that the first period be sufficient to allow the lens forming material to gel in the mold cavity such that there is substantially no liquid present (except small amounts proximate the edge of the material). The interruption of inadiation prior to complete gellation may in some circumstances produce optical distortions. It is prefened that the length of the first period be selected to inhibit the lens forming composition from reaching a first temperature. The first temperature is preferably the maximum temperature that the lens forming composition could reach if it was inadiated under the system conditions (e.g., flow rate and temperature of any cooling air, wavelength and intensity of radiation) until the "exothermic potential" (i.e., ability to evolve heat through reaction) of the composition was exhausted.

According to an embodiment, the reactions within the composition are preferably allowed to proceed after the first activating rays are removed until the composition reaches a second temperature. The second temperature is preferably less than the first temperature. The first temperature is preferably never reached by the composition. Thus, the composition is preferably prevented from achieving the first temperature and then cooling to the second temperature. The composition is preferably allowed to cool from the second temperature to the third temperature. This cooling may occur "inactively" by allowing heat to transfer to the ambient sunoundings, or at least one of the mold members may be cooled by any of the methods described above. In an embodiment, the curing of the lens forming material may be completed by directing second activating rays (e.g., in pulses) toward at least one of the mold members. The second activating rays may be directed toward the mold member(s) for a second period that may be determined according to the rate of reaction of the lens forming composition. The change in temperature of the composition or a portion of the mold cavity, or the air in or exiting the chamber may be an indicator of the rate of reaction, and the second period may be determined accordingly. The second period may be varied such that subsequent pulses have a longer or shorter duration than previous pulses. The time between pulses (i.e., the third period) may also be varied as a function of the temperature and or reaction rate of the composition. To achieve a light pulse, (a) the power to a light source may be turned on and then off, (b) a device may be used to alternately transmit and then block the passage of light to the lens forming composition, or (c) the light source and/or mold assembly may be moved to inhibit activating light from contacting the lens forming material. The second and/or third periods are preferably controlled to allow rapid formation of a lens while reducing the incidence of (a) premature release of the lens from the first and/or second mold member and/or (b) cracking of the lens.

In an embodiment, the second period is preferably controlled to inhibit the temperature of the composition from exceeding the second temperature. The temperature of the lens forming composition may continue to increase after radiation is removed from the first and/or second mold members due to the exothermic nature of reactions occurring within the composition. The second period may be sufficiently brief such that the pulse of second activating rays is removed while the temperature of the composition is below the second temperature, and the temperature of the composition increases during the third period to become substantially equal to the second temperature at the point that the temperature of the composition begins to decrease. In an embodiment, the third period extends until the temperature of the composition becomes substantially equal to the third temperature Once the temperature of the composition decreases to the third temperature, a pulse of second activating rays may be delivered to the composition In an embodiment, the second penod remams constant, and the thud penod is preferably controlled to mamtam the temperature of the composition below the second temperature The thud penod may be used to lower the temperature of the composition to a temperature that is expected to cause the composition to reach but not exceed the second temperature after a pulse is delivered to the composition

In an embodiment, a shutter system may be used to control the application of first and/or second activatmg rays to the lens formmg matenal The shutter system preferably mcludes air-actuated shutter plates that may be inserted mto the cunng chamber to prevent activating light from reachmg the lens formmg mateπal Alternatively, the shutter system may include an LCD panel Controller 50 may receive signals from thermocouple(s) located mside the lens-curmg chamber, proximate at least a portion the mold cavity, or located to sense the temperature of au m or exitmg the chamber, allowing the tune mtervals m which the shutters are inserted and/or extracted to be adjusted as a function of a temperature withm the cunng chamber The thermocouple may be located at numerous positions proximate the mold cavity and/or castmg chamber

The wavelength and mtensity of the second activatmg rays are preferably substantially equal to those of the first activatmg rays It may be desuable to vary the mtensity and or wavelength of the radiation (e g , first or second activating rays) The particular wavelength and mtensity of the radiation employed may vary among embodiments accordmg to such factors as the identity of the composition and cuπng cycle vanables Numerous cuπng cycles may be designed and employed The design of an optimal cycle should mclude consideration of a number of mteractmg vanables Significant mdependent vanables mclude 1) the mass of the sample of lens formmg mateπal, 2) the mtensity of the light applied to the mateπal, 3) the physical charactenstics of the lens forming mateπal, and 4) the coolmg efficiency of the system Significant cunng cycle (dependent) vanables include 1) the optimum initial exposure time for mduction and gelling, 2) the total cycle tune, 3) the time penod between pulses, 4) the duration of the pulses, and 5) the total exposure tune

Most of the experiments involving these methods were conducted using below descπbed OMB-91 monomer The OMB-91 formulation and properties are listed below

OMB-91 FORMULATION: INGREDIENT WEIGHT PERCENT Sartomer SR 351 (Tnmethylolpropane Tnacrylate) 20 0 +/- 1 0 Sartomer SR 268 (Tetraethylene Glycol Diacrylate) 21 0 +/- 1 0 Sartomer SR 306 (Tπpropylene Glycol Diacrylate) 32 0 +/- 1 0 Sartomer SR 239 (1,6 Hexanediol Dimethacrylate) 10 0 +/- 1 0 (Bisphenol A Bιs( Allyl Carbonate)) 17 0 +/- 1 0 Irgacure 184 (1-Hydroxycyclohexyl Phenyl Ketone) 0 017 +/- 0 0002 Methyl Benzoyl Formate 0 068 +/- 0 0007 Methyl Ester of Hydroquinone ("MeHQ") 35 ppm +/- 10 ppm Thermoplast Blue P (9,10 - Anthracenedione, 0 35 ppm+/- 0 1 ppm l-hydroxy-4-((4-methyl phenyl) Ammo) MEASUREMENTS/PROPERTIES

PROPERTY PROPOSED SPECIFICATION

Appearance Clear Liquid Color

(APHA) 50 maximum

(Test Tube Test) Match Standard

Acidity (ppm as Acrylic Acid) 100 maximum

Refractive Index 1 4725 +/- 0 002 Density 1 08 +/- 0 005 gm/cc at 23 °C

Viscosity @ 22 5 Degrees C 27 0 +/- 2 centipoise

Solvent Weight (wt %) 0 1 Maximum

Water (wt %) 0 1 Maximum

MeHQ (from HPLC) 35 ppm +/- 10 ppm

It should be recognized that methods and systems disclosed could be applied to a large vanety of radiation-curable, lens formmg matenals in addition to those mentioned herein It should be understood that adjustments to cuπng cycle variables (particularly the initial exposure tune) may be requued even among lens formmg compositions of the same type due to vanations m inhibitor levels among batches of the lens formmg compositions In addition, changes m the heat removal capacity of the system may requue adjustments to the cunng cycle vanables (e g duration of the coolmg penods between radiation pulses) Changes m the coolmg capacity of the system and/or changes m compositions of the lens formmg matenal may requue adjustments to cunng cycle vanables as well

Significant vanables impacting the design of a pulsed cunng cycle include (a) the mass of the matenal to be cured and (b) the mtensity of the activating light applied to the matenal If a sample is mitially overdosed with radiation, the reaction may progress too far and increase the likelihood of premature release and/or cracking If a sample is underdosed initially m a fixed (I e , preset) cunng cycle, subsequent exposures may cause too great a temperature nse later m the cycle, tendmg to cause premature release and/or crackmg Additionally, if the light mtensity varies more than about +/- 10% m a cycle that has been designed for a fixed light intensity level and/or fixed mass of lens forming mateπal, premature release and/or crackmg may result

An embodiment mvolves a cunng cycle having two processes A first process relates to forming a dry gel by continuously irradiating a lens forming composition for a relatively long penod The matenal is preferably cooled down to a lower temperature under darkness, after the inadiation is complete A second process relates to controllably discharging the remammg exothermic potential of the matenal by alternately exposmg the matenal to relatively short penods of irradiation and longer periods of decreased inadiation (e g , dark coolmg)

The behavior of the lens forming material dunng the second process will depend upon the degree of reaction of the lens formmg material that has occuned during the first process For a fixed cunng cycle, it is preferable that the extent of reaction occuπmg m the first process consistently fall withm a specified range If the progress of reaction is not controlled well, the incidence of crackmg and or premature release may rise For a curing cycle involving a composition having a constant level of inhibitor and initiator, the mtensity of the radiation employed is the most likely source of vanabihty m the level of cure attained in the first process. Generally, a fluctuation of +/- 5% m the mtensity tends to cause observable differences in the cure level achieved in the first process. Light intensity variations of +/- 10% may significantly reduce yield rates. The effect of various light intensities on the material bemg cured depends upon whether the intensity is higher or lower than a prefened mtensity for which the curing cycle was designed. Fig 25 shows temperature profiles for three embodiments in which different light levels were employed If the light mtensity to which the matenal is exposed is higher than a prefened mtensity, the overdosage may cause the reaction to proceed too far. In such a case, excessive heat may be generated, mcreasmg the possibility of crackmg and/or premature release duπng the first process of the curing cycle. If premature release or crackmg of the overdosed mateπal does not occur m the first process, then subsequent pulses administered during the second process may create very little additional reaction.

If the light mtensity is lower than a prefened mtensity and the lens formmg matenal is underdosed, other problems may arise. The material may not be dnven to a sufficient level of cure m the first process. Pulses applied dunng the second process may then cause relatively high amounts of reaction to occur, and the heat generated by reaction may be much greater than the heat removal capacity of the system. Thus the temperature of the lens formmg mateπal may tend to excessively mcrease Premature release may result. Otherwise, undercured lenses that contmue generatmg heat after the end of the cycle may be produced.

The optimal initial radiation dose to apply to the lens forming matenal may depend pπmanly upon its mass. The initial dose may also be a function of the hght mtensity and exposure tune. A method for designmg a cuπng cycle for a given mold/gasket/monomer combmation may mvolve selectmg a fixed light mtensity.

The methods disclosed may mvolve a wide range of light mtensities. Usmg a relatively low intensity may allow for the length of each cooling step to be decreased such that shorter and more controllable pulses are applied Where a fluorescent lamp is employed, the use of a lower mtensity may allow the use of lower power settings, thereby reducmg the load on the lamp coolmg system and extendmg the life of the lamp A disadvantage of usmg a relatively low light mtensity is that the initial exposure peπod may be somewhat longer. Relatively high mtensity levels tend to provide shorter initial exposure times while placmg more demand upon the lamp drivers and/or lamp coolmg system, either of which tends to reduce the life of the lamp.

Once a light mtensity is selected, the initial exposure tune may be detemuned. A convenient method of monitoring the reaction dunng the cycle mvolves fashionmg a fine gauge thermocouple, positionmg it mside the mold cavity, and connecting it to an appropnate data acquisition system. A prefened thermocouple is Type J, 0.005 mch diameter, Teflon-insulated wire available from Omega Engmeenng. The insulation is preferably snipped back about 30 to 50 mm and each wire is passed through the gasket wall via a fine bore hypodermic needle The needle is preferably removed and the two wires may be twisted together to form a thermocouple junction mside the inner cucumference of the gasket The other ends of the leads may be attached to a miniature connector which may be plugged mto a permanent thermocouple extension cord leadmg to the data acquisition unit after the mold set is filled

The data acquisition unit may be a Hydra 2625A Data Logger made by John Fluke Mfg. Company. It is preferably connected to an IBM compatible personal computer running Hydra Data Logger software The computer is preferably configured to display a trend plot as well as numeric temperature readmgs on a monitor The scan interval may be set to any convenient tune period and a period of fi\ e or ten seconds usually provides good resolution

The position of the thermocouple junction m the mold cavity may affect its readmg and behavior through the cycle When the junction is located between the front and back molds, relatively high temperatures may be observed compared to the temperatures at or near the mold face The distance from the edge of the cavity to the junction mav affect both absolute temperature readmgs as well as the shape of the curmg cycle's temperature plot The edges of the lens formmg material may begm to mcrease m temperature slightly later than other portions of the material Later in the cycle, the lens forming matenal at the center may be somewhat ahead of the mateπal at the edge and will tend to respond little to the radiation pulses, whereas the mateπal near the edge may tend to exhibit significant activity When performing experiments to develop cuπng cycles, it is prefened to insert two probes mto the mold cavity, one near the center and one near the edge The center probe should be relied upon early m the cycle and the edge probe should guide the later stages of the cycle

Differing rates of reaction among vaπous regions of the lens forming matenal may be achieved by applymg a differential light distnbution across the mold face(s) Tests have been performed where "minus type" light distπbutions have caused the edge of the lens formmg matenal to begm reactmg before the center of the mateπal The potential advantages of usmg light distnbuting filters to cure high mass semi- finished lenses may be offset by non-uniformity of total light transmission that tends to occur across large numbers of filters

After the selection and or configuration of (a) the radiation intensity, (b) the radiation-curable, lens formmg mateπal, (c) the mold/gasket set, and (d) the data acquisition system, the optimum mitial exposure peπod may be detemuned It is useful to expose a sample of lens formmg material to continuous radiation to obtam a temperature profile This will provide an identifiable range of elapsed tune withm which the optimal mitial exposure time will fall Two pomts of mterest may be the time where the temperature nse m the sample is first detected ("T mitial" or "Ti"), and the tune where the maximum temperature of the sample is reached ("Tmax") Also of interest is the actual maximum temperature, an indication of the "heat potential" of the sample under the system conditions (e g , in the presence of coolmg)

As a general rule, the temperamre of high mass lenses (l e , lenses greater than about 70 grams) should remam under about 200 °F and preferably between about 150 °F and about 180 °F Higher temperatures are typically associated with reduced lens yield rates due to crackmg and/or premature release Generally, the lower mass lenses (l e , lenses no greater than about 45 grams) should be kept under about 150 °F and preferably between about 110 °F and about 140 °F

The first period may be selected accordmg to the mass of the lens formmg matenal In an embodiment, the lens forming mateπal has a mass of between about 45 grams and about 70 grams and a selected second temperature between about 150 °F and about 200 °F Accordmg to another embodiment, the lens formmg mateπal has a mass no greater than about 45 grams and a second temperature less than about 150 °F In yet another embodiment the lens formmg material has a mass of at least about 70 grams and a second temperature between about 170 °F and about 190 °F

An expeπment may be performed in which the radiation is removed from the mold members slightly before one-half of the time between T initial and Tmax The initial exposure tune may be interactively reduced or increased accordmg to the results of the above experiment m subsequent experiments to provide a Tmax m a prefened range This procedure may allow the determination of the optimal mitial exposure time for any given mold/gasket set and light mtensity

A qualitative summary of relationships among system vanables related to the above-descnbed methods is shown m Fig. 24

After the mitial exposure period, a series of inadiation pulse/cooling steps may be performed to controllably discharge the remammg exothermic potential of the material and thus complete the cure. There may be at least two approaches to accomplish this second process. The first involves applying a large number of very short pulses and short coolmg periods. The second approach mvolves applying a fewer number of longer pulses with conespondmgly longer coolmg periods. Either of these two methods may produce a good product and many acceptable cycles may exist between these extremes.

The descπbed method relates to usmg pulsed application of light to produce a large range (e g., from -6 to +4 diopter) of lenses without requiring refrigerated coolmg fluid (e.g., cooled au) With proper light application, au at ambient may be used as a coolmg fluid, thus significantly reducmg system costs. The following general rules for the design of pulse/cooling cycles may be employed to allow rapid cuπng of a lens while inhibiting premature release and/or crackmg of the lens. The duration of the pulses preferably does not result m a temperature that exceeds the maximum temperature attamed in the initial exposure penod. The length of the coolmg peπod may be detemuned by the length of tune necessary for the mtemal temperature of the lens formmg mateπal to return to near the temperature it had immediately before it received a pulse. Following these general rules duπng routine experimentation may permit proper cunng cycles to be established for a broad range of lens formmg matenals, light mtensity levels, and coolmg conditions.

Preferably, hght output is measured and controlled by varying the amount of power applied to the lights m response to changes m light output. Specifically, a prefened embodiment mcludes a light sensor mounted near the lights. This light sensor measures the amount of light, and then a controller mcreases the power supplied to mamtam the first activatmg light rays as the mtensity of the first activatmg light rays decreases dunng use, and vice versa. Preferably, the power is vaπed by varying the electee frequency supplied to the lights

In an embodiment, a medium pressure mercury vapor lamp is used to cure the lens formmg matenal and the lens coating. This lamp and many conventional light sources used for activatmg light cunng may not be repeatedly turned on and off smce a several minute warm-up penod is generally requued pnor to operation Mercury vapor light sources may be idled at a lower power setting between exposure periods (l e., second penods), however, the hght source will still generate significant heat and consume electncity while at the lower power setting.

In an embodiment, air at ambient temperature may be used to cool the lens forming composition. When a xenon flash lamp is used, the pulses of light generally have a duration of much less than about one second and considerably less radiative heat tends to be transfened to the lens forming composition compared to curing methods employing other activatmg light sources. Thus, the reduced heat imparted to the lens formmg composition may allow for au at ambient temperature to remove sufficient heat of exotherm to substantially inhibit premature release and/or crackmg of the lens. In an embodiment, a xenon source is used to direct first activating light rays toward the fust and second mold members to the point that a temperature mcrease is measured and/or the lens forming composition begms to or forms a gel. It is prefened that the gel is formed with less than 15 pulses of radiation, and more preferably with less than about 5 pulses. It is prefened that the gel is formed before the total time to which the composition has been exposed to the pulses exceeds about 1/10 or 1/100 of a second

In an embodiment, a reflecting device is preferably employed m conjunction with the xenon light source. The reflecting device is positioned behmd the flash source and preferably allows an even distnbution of activating light rays from the center of the composition to the edge of the composition

In an embodiment, a xenon light flash lamp is preferably used to apply a plurality of activatmg light pulses to the lens forming composition to cure it to an eyeglass lens in a time penod of less than 30 mmutes, or more preferably, less than 20 or 15 minutes

The use of a xenon light source also may allow the formation of lenses over a wider range of diopters Higher power lenses exhibit greatest thinnest to thickest region ratios, meanmg that more shrinkage-induced stress may be created, causing greater mold flexure and thus mcreased tendency for premature release. Higher power lenses also possess thicker regions Portions of lens formmg mateπal withm these thicker regions may receive less light than regions closer to the mold surfaces. Contmuous inadiation lens forming techniques typically requue the use of relatively low light mtensities to control the heat generated dunng cuπng. The relatively low light mtensities used tends to result in a long, slow gellation period. Optical distortions tend to be created when one portion of the lens is cured at a different rate than another portion. Methods characterized by non-uniform cunng are typically poorly suited for the production of relatively high power lenses, smce the deeper regions (e g., regions withm a thick portion of a lens) tend to gel at a slower rate than regions closer to the mold surfaces.

The relatively high mtensity attainable with the xenon source may allow deeper penetration mto, and/or saturation of, the lens formmg matenal, thereby allowing uniform cunng of thicker lenses than m conventional radiation-initiated cunng. More uniform gelation may occur when the lens formmg mateπal is dosed with a high intensity pulse of activating light and then subjected to decreased activating light or darkness as the reaction proceeds without activatmg radiation. Lenses havmg a diopter of between about +5 0 and about -6 0 and greater may be cured. It is believed that light distnbution across the sample is less critical when cuπng and especially when gelation is mduced with relatively high mtensity light. The lens formmg mateπal may be capable of absorbmg an amount of energy per time that is below that delivered dunng a relatively high mtensity pulse. The lens formmg mateπal may be "oversaturated" with respect to the light delivered via a high mtensity flash source. In an embodiment, the xenon source is preferably used to cure a lens havmg a diopter between about -4.0 and about -6.0. In an embodiment, the xenon source is preferably used to cure a lens having a diopter between about +2.0 and about +4.0.

The methods disclosed herem allow curmg of high-mass semi-finished lens blanks from the same matenal used to cure cast-to-finish lenses Both are considered to be "eyeglass lenses" for the purposes of this patent. These methods may also be used to cure a vanety of other lens formmg matenals These methods have been successfully used to make cast-to-fmish lenses in addition to semi-finished lenses 6. Improved Lens Curing Process

When casting an eyeglass lens with activating light, the gelation pattern of the lens forming composition may affect the resultant optical quality of the lens If there are localized discontinuities m the light intensities received by the monomer contained m the casting cavity durmg the early stages of the polymerization process, optical distortions may be seen m the finished product Higher power lenses are, by definition, thicker m certain regions than relatively lower power lenses of the same diameter The layers of a lens closest to the mold faces of the casting cavity tend to receive a higher light mtensity than the deeper layers because the lens formmg composition absorbs some of the mcident light This causes the onset of polymerization to be delayed m the deeper layers relative to the outer layers, which may cause optical distortions m the finished product It is believed that concunent with this differential cunng rate, there is a difference m the rate of exothermic heat generation, specifically, the deeper regions will begin to generate heat after the outer regions m the cavity have already cured and the effectiveness of the heat removal may be impaued, contnbuting to optical waves and distortions m the finished product This phenomena is particularly observable m high powered positive lenses due to the magnification of such defects In an embodiment, the lens formmg composition contamed withm the castmg cavity is exposed to relatively high mtensity activatmg light for a tune peπod sufficient to initialize the reaction Inadiation is preferably terminated before the polymerization of the lens forming composition proceeds far enough to generate a substantial amount of heat This mitial relatively high mtensity dose preferably substantially uniformly gels the mateπal withm the castmg cavity such that the difference m the rate of reaction between the inner and outer layers of the lens bemg cured is preferably reduced, thereby elimmatmg the waves and distortions often encountered when usmg contmuous low mtensity inadiation to initialize the reaction, particularly with high dioptπc power positive lenses

In an embodiment, the relatively high mtensity dose of activating hght is preferably applied to the lens formmg composition m the form of pulses The pulses preferably have a duration of less than about 10 seconds, preferably less than about 5 seconds, and more preferably less than about 3 seconds The pulses preferably have an mtensity of at least about 10 milliwatts/cnr, more preferably at least about 100 milliwatts/cm², and more preferably still between about 150 milliwatts/cm² and about 250 milliwatts/cm² It is prefened that substantially all of the lens forming composition forms mto a gel after the mitial application of the relatively high mtensity activating light In an embodiment, no more than an msubstantial amount of heat is generated by exothermic reaction of the lens formmg composition duπng the mitial application of the relatively high mtensity activatmg light

Subsequent to this initial high mtensity dose, a second inadiation step may be performed m which the mateπal contamed withm the castmg cell is preferably inadiated for a relatively longer time at a relatively lower mtensity while cool fluid is directed at the non-castmg surface of at least one of the molds formmg the cavity The coolmg fluid preferably removes the exothermic heat generated by the polymerization of the lens formmg composition If the mtensity of the activatmg light is too great during this second inadiation step, the rate of heat generation will tend to be too rapid and the lens may release prematurely from the castmg face of the mold and/or crack Similarly, should the rate of heat removal from the lens formmg composition be too slow, the lens may release prematurely and/or crack It is prefened that the mold/gasket assembly containing the lens forming composition be placed within the coolmg environment as shortly after the initial dose of activating light as possible In an embodiment, the activatmg light applied to the lens formmg composition durmg the second inadiation step is preferably less than about 350 microwatts/cπr, more preferably less than about 150 microwatts/cm and more preferably still between about 90 microwatts/cm² and about 100

Durmg the second inadiation step, the activating light may be applied to the lens formmg composition contmuously or in pulses A translucent high density polyethylene plate may be positioned between the activatmg light generator and at least one of the mold members to reduce the intensity of the activating light to withm a prefened range

In an embodiment, relatively high intensity activatmg hght is preferably applied to the lens cunng composition m a third inadiation step to post-cure the lens subsequent to the second relatively low mtensity inadiation step In the thud inadiation step, pulses of activating light are preferably directed toward the lens formmg composition, although the composition may be contmuously inadiated mstead The pulses preferably have an mtensity of at least about 10 milliwatts/cm², more preferably at least about 100 milliwatts/cm², and more preferably still between about 100 milliwatts/cm² and about 150 milliwatts/cm²

Each of the above-mentioned irradiation steps is preferably performed by directmg the activating light through each of the first and second mold members The eyeglass lens is preferably cured m a total time of less than 30 mmutes and is preferably free of cracks, stπations, distortions, hazmess, and yellowness

It is believed that the above-descnbed methods enable the production of whole lenses m prescnption ranges beyond those cunently attainable with contmuous low mtensity inadiation The method may be practiced m the cuπng of relatively high or low power lenses with a reduced mcidence of optical distortions m the finished lens as compared to conventional methods It is to be understood that the above-descnbed methods may be used mdependently or combmed with the methods and apparatus of prefened embodiments descnbed above m the previous sections

7. Improved Scratch Resistant Lens Formation Process

The "m-mold" method mvolves formmg a scratch resistant coatmg over an eyeglass lens by placmg the liquid coatmg m a mold and subsequently cunng it The m-mold method may be advantageous to "out-of-mold" methods smce the m-mold method exhibits less occunences of coatmg defects manifested as lπegulanties on the antenor surface of the coatmg Usmg the m-mold method produces a scratch resistant coatmg that replicates the topography and smoothness of the mold casting face However, a problem encountered when usmg conventional m-mold scratch resistant coatmgs is that minute "pmholes" often form in the coatmg It is believed that the pmholes may be caused by either contammants on the mold, aubome particles fallmg on the coating before it is cured, or bubbles formed durmg the application of the coating which burst afterwards The formation of such pmholes is especially prevalent when usmg a flat-top bifocal mold, such as the one depicted m Fig 29 As illustrated, the segment lme 454 of a bifocal segment 452 below the mam surface 456 of the mold reduces the smoothness of the casting face When a coatmg is spm-coated over the mold face, this indentation mav become an obstacle to the even flow of the castmg face The pmhole defects may be a problem m tmted lenses because the dye used to tint a lens may penetrate through the pmholes, resultmg m a tiny speck of dye visible m the lens

Accordmg to an embodiment, a first coatmg composition (I e , a polymenzable "pnmer ' matenal) is preferably passed through a filter and then placed within a mold member havmg a castmg face and a non-castmg face The first coatmg composition preferably contams a photomitiator to make it curable upon exposure to activating light The mold member may then be spun so that the first composition becomes distributed over the castmg face The mold member may be rotated about a substantially vertical axis at a speed between about 750 and about 1500 revolutions per minute, preferably between about 800 and about 1000 revolutions per minute, more preferably at about 900 revolutions per mmute. Further, a dispensmg device may be used to duect an additional amount of the first composition onto the castmg face while the mold member is spinning. The dispensmg device preferably moves from the center of the mold member to an edge of the mold member so that the additional amount is preferably directed along a radius of the mold member. Activatmg light is preferably duected at the mold member to cure at least a portion of the first composition

A second coatmg composition may then be placed upon the first composition m the mold member The second coatmg is also preferably curable when exposed to activatmg light because it contams a photomitiator. The mold member is preferably spun to distπbute the second coatmg composition over the cured portion of the first coatmg composition. The mold member may also be spun simultaneously while addmg the second composition to the mold member. Activating light is then preferably duected at the mold member to simultaneously cure at least a portion of the second coatmg composition and form a transparent combmation coat havmg both coating compositions. The combmation coat is preferably a substantially scratch-resistant coatmg. The mold member may then be assembled with a second mold member by positionmg a gasket between the members to seal them. Therefore, a mold havmg a cavity shared by the ongmal two mold members is formed. An edge of the gasket may be displaced to insert a lens-formmg composition mto the cavity. The combmation coat and the lens-forming matenal preferably adhere well to each other. This lens-formmg composition preferably compnses a photomitiator and is preferably cured usmg activatmg light. Air which preferably has a temperature below ambient temperature may be directed toward a non-castmg face of the second mold member to cool the lens-formmg composition while it is bemg cured.

The pπmer coat preferably compnses a mixture of high viscosity monomers, a low viscosity, low flashpoint orgamc solvent, and a suitable photoinitiator system. The solvent may make up more than about 80 % of the mixture, preferably about 93% to 96%. This mixture preferably has low viscosity and preferably covers any surface lπegulanty dunng the spm application, for example the segment lme of a flat-top bifocal mold. The low flashpoint solvent preferably evaporates off relatively quickly, leavmg a thm layer of high viscosity monomer, contammg photomitiator, which coats the castmg face of the mold. The cured primer coat is preferably soft to allow it to adhere well to the glass mold face. Since the pπmer coat is soft, it may not possess scratch resistant characteristics. However, applying a high scratch resistance hard coating (i.e., the second coating composition) to the pnmer coat preferably results m a scratch resistant combmation coat. The hard coat preferably contams a solvent which evaporates when the mold member is rotated to distπbute the hard coatmg over the pnmer coat.

In general, the ideal pnmer material preferably possesses the following charactenstics: exhibits chemical stability at normal storage conditions (e.g , at room temperature and m the absence of activatmg light); flows well on an lπegular surface, especially over a flat-top bifocal segment, when cured with a specified activatmg light dose, leaves a crack-free coatmg, with a high double bond conversion (approximately greater than 80%); mamtams adhesion with the mold face through the lens forming cunng cycle, especially the segment part of the flat-top bifocal mold; and is chemically compatible with the hard coat that is subsequently applied on top of it (e.g., forms an optically clear combmation coat) Even though pmhole defects may be present m either the primer coat or the hard coat, it is highly unlikely that defects m one coat would coincide with defects of another coat Each coat preferably covers the holes of the other coat, resultmg in less pmholes in the combmation coat Thus, the finished m-mold coated lens may be tinted usmg dye without problems created by pmholes It is also preferably free of cracks, yellowness, haziness, and distortions In an embodiment, the gasket between the first mold member and the second mold member may be removed after a portion of the lens-formmg matenal has been cured The removal of the gasket preferably exposes an edge of the lens An oxygen barner having a photomitiator may be placed around the exposed edge of the lens, wherem the oxygen bamer photoinitiator is preferably near an uncured portion of the lens-formmg composition. Additional activating light rays may then be duected towards the lens to cause at least a portion of the oxygen barner photoinitiator to initiate reaction of the lens-formmg material. The oxygen banier preferably prevents oxygen from contacting at least a portion of the lens formmg composition dunng exposure of the lens to the activating rays

Accordmg to one embodiment, a substantially solid conductive heat source is preferably applied to one of the mold members Heat may be conductively transfened from the heat source to a face of the mold member Further, the heat may be conductively transfened through the mold member to the face of the lens.

8. Method for Forming a Plastic Lens Containing Ultraviolet/Visible Light Absorbing Compounds.

Matenals (hereinafter refened to as "ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds") that absorb vanous degrees of ultraviolet/visible light may be used m an eyeglass lens to inhibit ultraviolet/visible light from bemg transmitted through the eyeglass lens. Such an eyeglass lens advantageously inhibits ultraviolet/visible light from bemg transmitted to the eye of a user wearing the lens. Cuπng of an eyeglass lens usmg activating light to mitiate the polymerization of a lens formmg composition generally requues that the composition exhibit a high degree of activating light transmissibility so that the activatmg radiation may penetrate to the deeper regions of the lens cavity Otherwise the resulting cast lens may possess optical abenations and distortions. The cast lens may also contam layers of cured material m the regions closest to the transparent mold faces, sandwiching inner layers which may be either incompletely cured, gelled, barely gelled, or even liquid Often, when even small amounts of ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compounds of the types well known m the art are added to a normally activatmg light curable lens formmg composition, substantially the entue amount of lens forming composition contamed withm the lens cavity may remam liquid m the presence of activating radiation Photochromic pigments which have utility for photochromic eyeglass lenses absorb ultraviolet/visible light strongly and change from an unactivated state to an activated state when exposed to ultraviolet/visible light. The presence of photochromic pigments, as well as other ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds withm a lens formmg composition, generally does not permit enough activating radiation to penetrate mto the depths of the lens cavity sufficient to cause photomitiators to break down and initiate polymerization of the lens forming composition Thus, it may be difficult to cure a lens forming composition contammg ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compounds usmg activatmg light It is therefore desuable to provide a method for usmg activating hght to mitiate polymerization of an eyeglass lens formmg monomer which contams ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds, m spite of the high activatmg light absorption charactenstics of the ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds Examples of such ultraviolet visible light absorbing compounds other than photochromic pigments are fixed dyes and colorless additives.

In an embodiment, an ophthalmic eyeglass lens may be made from a lens formmg composition compnsmg a monomer, an ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compound, an photomitiator, and a co-mitiator. Examples of these compounds are listed m the section "Lens Formmg Compositions Including Ultraviolet/Visible Light Absorbmg Matenals" The lens formmg composition, in liquid form, is preferably placed in a mold cavity defined by a first mold member and a second mold member It is believed that activating light, which is duected toward the mold members to activate the photoinitiator, causes the photomitiator to form a polymer cham radical. The polymer cham radical preferably reacts with the co-initiator more readily than with the monomer. The co-initiator may react with a fragment or an active species of either the photomitiator or the polymer cham radical to produce a monomer mitiatmg species m the regions of the lens cavity where the level of activating light is either relatively low or not present.

The co-initiator is preferably activated only m the presence of the photoinitiator. Further, without the co- tnitiator, the photoinitiator may exclusively be activated near the surface of the lens formmg composition but not withm the middle portion of the composition Therefore, using a suitable photomitiator combmed with a co- lmtiator permits polymerization of the lens formmg composition to proceed through the depths of the lens cavity A cured, clear, abenation free lens is preferably formed m less than about 30 mmutes, more preferably m less than about 10 mmutes. The lens, when exposed to ultraviolet/visible hght preferably inhibits at least a portion of the ultraviolet/visible light from bemg transmitted through the lens that is preferably formed. A lens that permits no ultraviolet light from passmg through the lens (at least with respect to certam ultraviolet wavelengths) is more prefened.

The identity of the major polymenzable components of the lens formmg composition tends to affect the optimal cuπng process. It is anticipated that the identity of the ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compound present m the monomer or blend of monomers may affect the optimal photoinitiator/co-initiator system used as well as the optimal curmg process used to initiate polymerization Also, varymg the identities or the proportions of the monomer(s) in the lens formmg composition may requue adjustments to various production process vanables mcludmg, but not limited to, exposure tunes, exposure mtensities, coolmg tunes and temperatures, activating hght and thermal postcure procedures and the like For example, compositions compπsmg relatively slow reacting monomers, such as bisphenol A bis allyl carbonate or hexanediol dimethacrylate, or compositions compπsmg relatively higher proportions of such monomers may requue either longer exposure tunes, higher mtensities, or both. It is postulated that mcreasmg the amount of either fast reactmg monomer or the mitiator levels present m a system will requue reduced exposure tunes, more ngidly controlled light doses, and more efficient exothermic heat removal.

Exothermic reactions may occur durmg the curmg process of the lens forming composition. The thicker portions of the lens formmg composition may generate more heat than the thinner portions of the composition as a result of the exothermic reactions taking place It is believed that the speed of reaction in the thicker sections is slower than m the thinner sections Thus, in a positive lens a "donut effect" may occur m which the relatively thm outer portion of the lens formmg composition reaches its fully cured state before the relatively thick inner portion of the lens formmg composition. Conversely, m a negative lens the relatively thm inner portion of the lens formmg composition may reach its fully cured state before the relatively thick outer portion of the lens formmg composition

After the lens forming composition is preferably loaded mto a mold assembly, the mold assembly is preferably inadiated with activating light at an appropπate mtensity and duration Typically, the intensity and duration of activatmg light required to produce a lens contammg ultraviolet/visible light absorbers is preferably significantly higher than the intensity and duration of light required for forming non-ultraviolet/visible light absorbing lenses The mold assembly may also requue multiple doses for cuπng This may require a different apparatus and/or setup from that used to form non-UV absorbmg lenses

In one embodiment, an apparatus may be capable of formmg clear, colored, or photochromic lenses without significantly altermg the apparatus In order to achieve this the lens formmg composition will preferably mclude ulttaviolet/visible hght absorbers By placmg ultraviolet/visible light absorbers in a clear non- photochromic lens formmg composition, a clear lens may be obtamed under similar conditions to those used for colored and photochromic lenses Thus, the addition of ultraviolet/visible light absorbers to a non-photochromic lens formmg composition, allows both photochrormc and non-photochromic lens forming compositions to be cured usmg the same apparatus and similar procedures An added advantage, is that the produced clear lenses provide additional ultraviolet/visible light protection to the user that may not be present m clear lenses formed without ultraviolet/visible light absorbers In this manner, plastic lenses may be formed which exhibit many of the same properties as glass lenses however, the plastic lenses may be produced more rapidly, at lower cost, and have a weight significantly less than theu glass counterparts

9. Actinic Light Initiated Polymerization Ultraviolet/Visible Light Absorbing Compositions.

Cunng of an eyeglass lens usmg activating light to mitiate the polymerization of a lens formmg composition generally requues that the composition exhibit a high degree of activating light transmissibility so that the activating light may penetrate to the deeper regions of the lens cavity Otherwise the resultmg cast lens may possess optical abenations and distortions The cast lens may also contain layers of cured matenal m the regions closest to the transparent mold faces, sandwichmg inner layers which may be either incompletely cured, gelled, barely gelled, or even liquid Often, when even small amounts of activatmg light absorbmg compounds have been added to a normally curable lens formmg composition, substantially the entue amount of lens formmg composition contamed withm the lens cavity may remam liquid m the presence of activatmg light Photochrormc pigments that have utility for photochromic eyeglass lenses typically absorb activatmg light strongly and change from an mactivated state to an activated state when exposed to activatmg light The presence of photochromic pigments, as well as other activatmg light absorbmg compounds withm a lens formmg composition, generally does not permit enough activatmg radiation to penetrate mto the depths of the lens cavity sufficient to cause photomitiators to break down and mitiate polymerization of the lens forming composition Examples of such activatmg light absorbing compounds other than photochrormc pigments are fixed dyes and colorless additives

It is therefore difficult to cure a lens formmg composition contammg activatmg light absorbing compounds usmg activating light One solution to this problem mvolves the use of a co-initiator By usmg a co- mitiator, activatmg light may be used to initiate the polymerization reaction It is believed that activatmg light that is duected toward the mold members may cause the photoinitiator to form a polymer chain radical The polymer cham radical preferably reacts with the co-mitiator more readily than with the monomer The co-initiator mav react with a fragment or an active species of either the photomitiator or the polymer cham radical to produce a monomer mitiatmg species m the regions of the lens cavity where the level of activating light is either relatively low or not present It is therefore desuable to provide a method for polymerizing an eyeglass lens forming composition that contams light absorbing compounds by using activating light having a wavelength that is not absorbed by the light absorbing compounds, thus avoidmg the need for a co-initiator

In an embodiment, an ophthalmic eyeglass lens may be made from a lens formmg composition compπsmg a monomer, a light absorbing compound, and a photomitiator, by inadiation of the lens formmg composition with activatmg light As used herem "activatmg light" means light that may effect a chemical change Activatmg light may include ultraviolet light, actinic light, visible light or mfrared hght Generally any wavelength of light capable of effectmg a chemical change may be classified as activatmg Chemical changes may be manifested m a number of forms A chemical change may mclude, but is not limited to, any chemical reaction which causes a polymerization to take place Preferably the chemical change causes the formation of a mitiator species withm the lens formmg composition, the mitiator species being capable of mitiatmg a chemical polymerization reaction

The lens formmg composition, m liquid form, is preferably placed m a mold cavity defined by a first mold member and a second mold member It is believed that activating light, when duected toward and through the mold members to activate the photoinitiator, causes the photoinitiator to form a polymer cham radical The polymer chain radical may react with a fragment or an active species of either photomitiator or the polymer cham radical to produce a monomer mitiatmg species m other regions of the lens cavity

The use of activatmg light of the appropnate wavelength preferably prevents the lens from darkenmg duπng the cuπng process Herem, "darkening" means becoming at least partially non-transparent to the incoming activating light such that the activating light may not significantly penetrate the lens formmg composition Photochromic compounds may cause such darkening Ultraviolet visible light absorbing compounds present in the lens formmg composition may prevent activating light havmg a wavelength substantially below about 380 nm from penetrating mto the lens forming composition When treated with activating hght containing light with wavelengths m the ultraviolet region, e g light with wavelengths below about 380 nm, the ultraviolet/visible hght absorbmg compounds may darken, preventmg further ultraviolet activating light from penettatmg the lens formmg composition The darkenmg of the lens forming composition may also prevent non-ultraviolet activatmg light from penettatmg the composition This darkenmg effect may prevent activatmg light of any wavelength from mitiatmg the polymerization reaction throughout the lens formmg composition

When the ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compounds absorb m the ultraviolet region, activating light havmg a wavelength above about 380 nm (e g , actmic light) may be used to prevent the darkenmg effect Because the wavelength of the activatmg light is substantially above the wavelength at which the ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds absorb, the darkenmg effect may be avoided Additionally, activatmg light with a wavelength above about 380 nm may be used to initiate the polymerization of the lens formmg material By the use of such activating light an eyeglass lens containing ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compounds may m some cucumstances, be formed without the use of a co-initiator In an embodiment, the above-descnbed lens forming composition, where the ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compound absorbs, predominantly, ultraviolet light, may be treated with activatmg light havmg a wavelength above about 380 nm to activate the photomitiator Preferably, activatmg light havmg a wavelength substantially between about 380 nm to 490 nm is used By using activating light above about 380 nm the darkenmg effect caused by the ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compounds may be avoided The activating light may penetrate mto the lens forming composition, mitiatmg the polymerization reaction throughout the composition A filter which blocks light having a wavelength that is substantially below about 380 nm may be used to prevent the ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds from darkening

The use of activating light permits polymerization of the lens formmg composition to proceed through the depths of the lens cavity A cured, clear, abenation free lens is preferably formed m less than about 30-60 mmutes, more preferably in less than about 20 mmutes As used herem a "clear lens" means a lens that transmits visible light without scattering so that objects beyond the lens may be seen clearly As used herein "abenation" means the failure of a lens to produce point- to-pomt conespondence between an object and its image The lens, when exposed to ultraviolet/visible light, preferably inhibits at least a portion of the ultraviolet/visible light from bemg transmitted through the lens In this manner the eye may be protected from certain light A lens that permits no ultraviolet/visible light from passmg through the lens (at least with respect to certam wavelengths) is more prefened

In an embodiment, the lens formmg composition that contams an ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compound may be cured with an activatmg light Preferably, the activating light has a wavelength substantially above about 380 nm The lens formmg composition may be cured by exposmg the composition to activatmg light multiple tunes Alternatively, the lens forming composition may be cured by exposmg the composition to a plurality of activating light pulses, at least one of the pulses havmg a duration of less than about one second (more preferably less than about 0 1 seconds, and more preferably between 0 1 and 0 001 seconds) Preferably, all activatmg light duected toward the mold members is at a wavelength between about 380 nm to 490 nm The previously descnbed embodiments which descnbe various methods and compositions for formmg eyeglass lenses may also be utilized to form the eyeglass lens hereof, by replacmg the ultraviolet light m these examples with activatmg hght havmg a wavelength substantially greater than about 380 nm

In an embodiment, the activating light may be generated from a fluorescent lamp The fluorescent lamp is preferably used to duect activating light rays toward at least one of the mold members At least one and preferably two fluorescent light sources, with strong emission spectra m the 380 to 490 nm region may be used When two light sources are used, they are preferably positioned on opposite sides of the mold cavity A fluorescent lamp emitting activating light with the described wavelengths is commercially available from Philips Electronics as model TLD-15W/03

Preferably, three or four fluorescent lamps may be positioned to provide substantially uniform radiation over the entue surface of the mold assembly to be cured The activating light source may be turned on and off quickly between exposures A flasher ballast may be used for this function A flasher ballast may operate m a standby mode wherein a low cunent is supplied to the lamp filaments to keep the filaments warm and thereby reduce the strike time of the lamp Such a ballast is commercially available from Magnatek, Inc of Bridgeport, Connecticut Alternately, the light source may employ a shutter system to block the light between doses This shutter system is preferably controlled by a micro-processor based control system in order to provide the necessary doses of light A feedback loop may be used to control the light mtensity so that mtensity fluctuations due to envuonmental vanables (e g lamp temperature) and lamp agmg may be minimized A light sensor mav be incorporated mto the control system to minimize vaπances m dose for a given exposure tune The identity of the major polymenzable components of the lens formmg composition tends to affect the optimal curmg process It is anticipated that the identity of the light absorbing compound present m the monomer or blend of monomers may affect the optimal photomitiator system used as well as the optimal curmg process used to initiate polymerization Also, varymg the identities or the proportions of the monomer(s) m the lens formmg composition may require adjustments to vaπous production process variables mcludmg, but not limited to, exposure tunes, exposure intensities, coolmg times and temperatures, postcure procedures and the like For example, compositions mcludmg relatively slow reacting monomers, such as bisphenol A bis allyl carbonate or hexanediol dimethacrylate, or compositions mcludmg relatively higher proportions of such monomers may requue either longer exposure tunes, higher intensities, or both It is postulated that mcreasmg the amount of either fast reacting monomer or the initiator levels present m a system will requue reduced exposure tunes, more ngidly controlled light doses, and more efficient exothermic heat removal

Preferably, the monomers selected as components of the lens formmg composition are capable of dissolving the light absorbmg compounds added to them As used herein "dissolving" means being substantially homogeneously mixed For example, monomers may be selected from a group mcludmg polyether (allyl carbonate) monomers, multi-functional acrylate monomers, and multi-functional methacrylic monomers for use m an ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg lens formmg composition

In an embodiment, the mixture of monomers, previously descnbed as PRO-629, may be blended together before addition of other components requued to make the lens formmg composition This blend of monomers is preferably used as the basis for a lens formmg composition to which ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds are added A polymerization inhibitor may be added to the monomer mixture at relatively low levels to inhibit polymerization of the monomer at inappropnate tunes (e g , dunng storage) Preferably about 0 to 50 ppm of monomethylether hydroqumone (MEHQ) are added to the monomer mixture It is also prefened that the acidity of the monomer mixture be as low as possible Preferably less than about 100 ppm residual acrylic acid exists m the mixture It is also prefened that the water content of the monomer mixture be relatively low, preferably less than about 0 15 percent

Photomitiators which have utility m the present method have been descπbed m previous embodiments Ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds which may be added to a normally ultraviolet/visible light transmissible lens formmg composition have also been descnbed m previous embodiments The quantity of photochromic pigments present m the lens formmg composition is preferably sufficient to provide observable photochromic effect The amount of photochromic pigments present m the lens formmg composition may widely range from about 1 ppm by weight to 1-5% by weight In prefened compositions, the photochromic pigments are present in ranges from about 30 ppm to 2000 ppm In the more prefened compositions, the photochromic pigments are present m ranges from about 150 ppm to 1000 ppm The concentration may be adjusted dependmg upon the thickness of the lens being produced to obtam optimal visible light absorption charactenstics In another embodiment co-mitiators may be added to the lens forming composition As described previously, such compositions may aid the polymenzation of the lens forming composition by interacting with the photomitiator such that the composition polymerizes in a substantially uniform manner It is anticipated that the optimal amount of the initiators is where the total amount of both initiators are minimized subject to the constraint of complete polymenzation and production of a rigid, abenation free lens The relative proportions of the photomitiator to the co-mitiator may be optimized by experimentation For example, an ultraviolet/visible light absorptive lens formmg composition that mcludes a photomitiator with no co-initiator may be cured If waves and distortions are observed m the resultmg lens, a co-initiator may then be added to the lens formmg composition by mcreasmg amounts until a lens havmg the best optical properties is formed It is anticipated that excess co-initiator m the lens formmg composition should be avoided to inhibit problems of too rapid polymerization, yellowmg of the lens, and migration of residual, unreacted co-mitiator to the surface of the finished lens

In an embodiment, hmdered amine light stabilizers may be added to the lens formmg composition It is believed that these matenals act to reduce the rate of degradation of the cured polymer caused by exposure to ultraviolet light by deactivatmg harmful polymer radicals These compounds may be effective m terminating oxygen and carbon free radicals, and thus mterfenng with the different stages of auto-oxidation and photo- degradation Preferably, more than one monomer and more than one mitiator are used m a lens formmg composition to ensure that the initial polymerization of the lens forming composition with activatmg light does not occur over too short a peπod of tune The use of such a lens formmg composition may allow greater control over the gel formation, resultmg m better control of the optical quality of the lens An eyeglass lens formed usmg the lens formmg compositions descnbed may be applicable for use as a prescnption lens and for a non-prescπption lens Particularly, such a lens may be used m sunglasses Advantageously, photochromic sunglass lenses would remam light enough in color to allow a user to see through them clearly while at the same time prohibiting ultraviolet/visible light from passmg through the lenses In one embodiment, a background dye may be added to the photochromic lens to make the lens appear to be a dark shade of color at all tunes like typical sunglasses

SPECIFIC EXAMPLES

The following examples are mcluded to demonstrate embodiments of the mvention Those of skill in the art, m light of the present disclosure, should appreciate that many changes may be made m the specific examples that are disclosed and still obtam a like or similar result without departmg from the sp rt and scope of the mvention EXAMPLE 1: Formation of a Plastic Lens by Curing With Activating Light

Formulation- 17% Bisphenol A bιs(allyl carbonate)

10% 1,6 Hexanediol dimethacrylate 20% Tπmethylolpropane tnacrylate

21% Tettaethyleneglycol diacrylate

32% Tπpropyleneglycol diacrylate 0.012% 1 Hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone

0.048 Methyl benzoylformate <10 ppm Hydroquinone & Methylethylhydroqumone

Hydroqumone and Methylethylhydroqumone were stabilizers present m some of the diacrylate and or tnacrylate compounds obtamed from Sartomer. Preferably the amount of stabilizers is mmimized since the stabilizers affect the rate and amount of cunng. If larger amounts of stabilizers are added, then generally larger amounts of photomitiators must also be added.

Light Condition: mW/cm² measured at plane of sample with Spectrolme DM 365N Meter from Spectronics Corp. (Westbury, N.Y.)

Center Edge

Top: 0.233 0.299

Bottom: 0.217 0.248

Au Flow: 9.6 standard cubic feet per minute ("CFM") per manifold - 19.2 CFM total on sample

Au Temperature: 4.4 degrees Centigrade

Molds: 80 mm diameter Commg #8092 glass

Radius Thickness

Concave: 170.59 2.7

Convex: 62.17 5.4

Gasket- General Electric SE6035 sihcone rubber with a 3 mm thick lateral lip dimension and a vertical lip dimension sufficient to provide an initial cavity center thickness of 2.2 mm Fillmg The molds were cleaned and assembled mto the gasket The mold/gasket assembly was then temporarily positioned on a fixture which held the two molds pressed agamst the gasket lip with about 1 kg of pressure The upper edge of the gasket was peeled back to allow about 27.4 grams of the monomer blend to be charged into the cavity. The upper edge of the gasket was then eased back mto place and the excess monomer was vacuumed out with a small aspiratmg device It is preferable to avoid having monomer drip onto the noncasting surface of the mold because a drop tends to cause the activating light to become locally focused and may cause an optical distortion m the final product.

Curing- The sample was irradiated for fifteen mmutes under the above conditions and removed from the lens cuπng unit The molds were separated from the cured lens by applying a sharp impact to the junction of the lens and the convex mold. The sample was then postcured at 110 °C in the post-cure unit for an additional ten mmutes, removed and allowed to cool to room temperature.

Results The resultmg lens measured 72 mm m diameter, with a central thickness of 2.0 mm, and an edge thickness of 9.2 mm. The focusing power measured -5.05 diopter. The lens was water clear ("water-white"), showed negligible haze, exhibited total visible light transmission of about 94%, and gave good overall optics. The Shore D hardness was about 80. The sample withstood the impact of a 1 mch steel ball dropped from fifty mches m accordance with ANSI 280.1-1987, 4.6 4 test procedures.

EXAMPLE 2: Oxygen Barrier Example #1

A liquid lens formmg composition was mitially cured as m a process and apparatus similar to that specified m Example 1. The composition was substantially the same as specified m Example 1, with the exception that hydroqumone was absent, the concenttation of methylethylhydroquinone was about 25-45 ppm, the concentration of 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone was 0 017 percent, and the concentration of methylbenzoylformate was 0.068 percent The composition underwent the initial 15 minute cure under the "1st activatmg light." The apparatus was substantially the same as descnbed for the above Example 1, with the following exceptions-

1. The au flowrate on each side of the lens mold assembly was estimated to be about 18-20 cubic feet per mmute.

2 The air flowrate m and out of the chamber sunoundmg the lights was vaned m accordance with the surface temperature of the lights. The au flowrate was vaned m an effort to keep the temperamre on the surface of one of the lights between 104 5 ° F and 105 ° F

3 The activatmg light output \\ as controlled to a set point by varying the power sent to the lights as the output of the lights vaned

4 Frosted glass was placed between the lights and the filters used to vary the intensity of the activating light across the face of the molds Preferably the glass was frosted on both sides The frosted glass acts as a diffuser between the lights and these filters This frosted glass tended to yield better results if it was placed at least about 2 mm from the filter, more preferably about 10-15 mm, more preferably still about 12 mm, from the filter Frosted glass was found to dampen the effect of the filters For mstance, the presence of the frosted glass reduced the systems' ability to produce different lens powers by varying the light (see Example 1 and Figure 1)

After mitial cure, the lens mold assembly was removed from the curmg chamber The lens mold assembly mcluded a lens sunounded by a front mold, a back mold, and a gasket between the front and back molds (see, e g , the assembly m Figure 11)

At this pomt the protocol m Example 1 stated that the lens was demolded (see above) While demoldmg at this pomt is possible, as stated above, generally some liquid lens forming composition remamed, especially in areas of the lens proximate the gasket Therefore, the lens was not demolded as stated in Example 1 Instead, the gasket was removed, liquid lens formmg composition was wiped off the edges of the lens, and a layer of oxygen banier (Parafilm M) with photomitiator was wrapped around the edges of the lens while the lens was still between the molds The Parafilm M was wrapped tightly around the edges of the lens and then stretched so that it would adhere to the lens and molds (l e , m a manner similar to that of Saran wrap) The lens mold assembly was then placed in the post-cure unit so that the back face of the lens (while between the molds) could then be exposed to additional activatmg light

This second activatmg light was at a substantially higher intensity than the mitial cure light, which was duected at an mtensity of less than 10 mW/cm² The mold assembly was inadiated with ultraviolet light for about 22 seconds The total light energy applied dunng these 22 seconds was about 4500 rmlhjoules per square centimeter ("mJ/cm²") It has been found that applying activating light at this pomt helped to cure some or all of the remammg liquid lens formmg composition The second activating light step may be repeated In this example, the second activatmg light step was repeated once It is also possible to expose the front or both sides of the lens to the second activatmg light

After the second activating light was applied, the mold assembly was allowed to cool The reactions caused by exposure to activating light may be exothermic The activating lights also tend to emit mfra-red light which m turn heats the mold assembly The lens was then demolded The demolded lens was substantially drier and harder than lenses that were duectly removed from mold assemblies after the mitial cure step

EXAMPLE 3: Oxygen Barrier Example #2 The protocol of Oxygen Barner Example #1 was repeated except that prior to removal of the gasket the lens mold assembly was positioned so that the back face of the lens was exposed to third activatmg light In this case the thud activating light was at the same intensity and for the same time peπod as one pass of the second activating light It has been found that applymg thud activating light at this point helped to cure some or all of the remammg liquid lens forming composition so that when the gasket was removed less liquid lens formmg composition was present. All of the remammg steps in Oxygen Banier Example #1 were applied, and the resultant lens was substantially dry when removed from the molds

EXAMPLE 4: Conductive Heating Example A liquid lens formmg composition was initially cured m a process and apparatus similar to that specified m Example 1 except for post-cure treatment, which was conducted as follows-

After the sample was inadiated for 15 minutes, the lens was placed in the post-cure unit to receive a dose of about 1500 mJ/cm² (+/- 100 mJ) of activating light per pass The gasket was then removed from the mold assembly and the edges of the mold were wiped with an absorbent tissue to remove incompletely cured lens formmg matenal proximate the mold edges. A stnp of plastic mateπal impregnated with photomitiator was wrapped around the edges of the molds that were exposed when the gasket was removed. Next, the mold assembly was passed through the post-cure unit once to expose the front surface of the mold to a dose of about 1500 mJ/cm² The mold assembly was then passed through the post-cure unit four more tunes, with the back surface of the mold receivmg a dose of about 1500mJ/cm² per pass. The heat source of the post-cure unit was operated such that the surface of the hot plate reached a temperature of 340 °F (+/- 50 °F) A conformable "beanbag" contamer havmg a covermg made of NOMEX fabnc was placed on the hot plate. The contamer contamed glass beads and was turned over such that the portion of the container that had duectly contacted the hot plate (l e., the hottest portion of the container) faced upward and away from the hot plate. The mold assembly was then placed onto the heated, exposed portion of the contamer that had been m direct contact with the hot plate. The concave, non-casting face of the mold was placed onto the exposed surface of the contamer, which substantially conformed to the shape of the face. Heat was conducted through the container and the mold member to the lens for 13 mmutes A lens havmg a Shore D hardness of 84 was formed.

EXAMPLE 5: Curing Cycles Some established cycles are detailed in Table 7 below for three semi-finished mold gasket sets: a 6 OOD base curve, a 4 50D base curve, and a 3 OOD base curve These cycles have been performed with coolmg au, at a temperature of about 56 °F, duected at the front and back surfaces of a mold assembly Frosted diffusing wmdow glass was positioned between the samples and the lamps, with a layer of PO-4 acrylic matenal approximately 1 mch below the glass. A top light mtensity was adjusted to 760 microwatts/cn and a bottom light mtensity was adjusted to 950 microwatts/cm², as measured at about the plane of the sample. A Specttolme meter DM365N and standard detector stage were used. An m-mold coatmg as descnbed m U.S. Patent No 5,529,728 to Buazza et. al. was used to coat both the front and back molds.

Table 7

Figures 26, 27, and 28 each show temperature profiles of the above-detailed cycles for a case where the activating light exposure is contmuous and a case where the activating light delivery is pulsed. In Figures 26-28, "Io" denotes the mitial mtensity of the activatmg light used in a cuπng cycle. The phrase "Io=760/950" means that the light mtensity was adjusted to mitial settings of 760 microwatts/cm² for the top lamps and 950 microwatts/cm² for the bottom lamps. The "mteπor temperature" of Figures 26-28 refers to a temperature of the lens formmg mateπal as measured by a thermocouple located withm the mold cavity.

EXAMPLE 6: Pulse Method Using a Medium Pressure Vapor Lamp

An eyeglass lens was successfully cured with activatmg light utilizing a medium pressure mercury vapor lamp as a source of activating hght (i.e., the UVEXS Model 912 previously descnbed herem). The cunng chamber mcluded a six mch medium pressure vapor lamp operating at a power level of approximately 250 watts per mch and a defocused dichroic reflector that is highly activatmg light reflective A high percentage of mfrared radiation was passed through the body of the reflector so that it would not be duected toward the matenal to be cured. The cunng chamber further mcluded a conveyer mechanism for transporting the sample underneath the lamp. With this cunng chamber, the transport mechamsm was set up so that a carnage would move the sample from the front of the chamber to the rear such that the sample would move completely through an uradiation zone under the lamp. The sample would then be ttansported through the zone agam to the front of the chamber. In this manner the sample was provided with two distmct exposures per cycle One pass, as defined hereinafter, consists of two of these distmct exposures. One pass provided a dosage of approximately 275 milhJoules measured at the plane of the sample using an International Light IL 1400 radiometer equipped with a XRL 340 B detector. A lens cavity was created usmg the same molds, lens formmg composition, and gasket as descnbed m Example 7 below. The reaction cell contammg the lens forming material was placed on a supporting stage such that the plane of the edges of the convex mold were at a distance of approximately 75 mm from the plane of the lamp. The lens cavity was then exposed to a senes of activating light doses consistmg of two passes duected to the back surface of the mold followed immediately by one pass directed to the front surface of the mold. Subsequent to these first exposures, the reaction cell was allowed to cool for 5 mmutes m the absence of any activating radiation at an au temperature of 74.6 degrees F and at an au flow rate of approximately 15 to 25 scf per mmute to the back surface and 15 to 25 scf to the front surface of the cell. The lens cavity was then dosed with one pass to the front mold surface and returned to the coolmg chamber for 6 mmutes. Then the back surface was exposed m one pass and then was cooled for 2 minutes. Next, the front surface was exposed in two passes and then cooled for 3.5 mmutes. The front surface and the back surface were then each exposed to two passes, and the gasket was removed to expose the edges of the lens. A stnp of polyethylene film impregnated with photomitiator was then wrapped around the edge of the lens and the front and back surfaces were exposed to another 3 passes each. The back surface of the cell was then placed on the conductive thermal m-mold postcure device usmg a "bean-bag" contamer filled with glass beads on a hot plate at about 340 °F descπbed previously (see Example 4) for a time peπod of 13 mmutes, after which the glass molds were removed from the finished lens. The finished lens exhibited a distance focusmg power of -6.09 diopters, had excellent optics, was abenation-free, was 74 mm m diameter, and had a center thickness of 1.6 mm. Dunng the coolmg steps , a small surface probe thermistor was positioned agamst the outside of the gasket wall to monitor the reaction. The results are summarized below.

EXAMPE 7: Pulse Method Using a Single Xenon Flash Lamp

An eyeglass lens was successfully cured with activating light utilizing a xenon flash lamp as a source of activatmg light The flash lamp used was an Ultra 1800 White Lightning photographic strobe, commercially available from Paul C Buff Incorporated of Nashville, Tennessee This lamp was modified by replacmg the standard borosilicate flash tubes with quartz flash tubes A quartz flash tube is prefened because some of the activating light generated by the arc mside the tube tends to be absorbed by borosilicate glass The strobe possessed two semicircular flash tubes that trigger simultaneously and the flash tubes were positioned to form a nng approximately 73 millimeters in diameter. The hole m the reflector behind the lamps, which normally contams a modelmg lamp for photographic purposes, was covered with a flat piece of highly-polished activatmg light reflective matenal that is commercially available under the trade name of Alzac from Ultra Violet Process Supply of Chicago, Illinois The power selector switch was set to full power The activatmg light energy generated from one flash was measured usmg an International Light IL 1700 Research Radiometer available from International Light, Incorporated of Newburyport, Massachusetts The detector head was an International Light XRL 340 B, which is sensitive to radiation m the 326 nm to 401 nm region The window of the detector head was positioned approximately 35 mm from the plane of the flash tubes and was approximately centered withm the nng formed by the tubes.

A mold cavity was created by placmg two round 80 mm diameter crown glass molds mto a sihcone rubber ring or gasket that possessed a raised lip around its inner cucumference. The edges of the glass molds rested upon the raised hp to form a sealed cavity in the shape of the lens to be created The inner cucumference of the raised lip conesponded to the edge of the finished lens. The concave surface of the first mold conesponded to the front surface of the finished lens and the convex surface of the second mold conesponded to the back surface of the finished lens The height of the raised p of the rubber nng mto which the two glass molds are inserted controls the spacmg between the two glass molds, thereby controlling the thickness of the finished lens By selectmg proper gaskets and first and second molds that possess vanous radu of curvature, lens cavities may be created to produce lenses of vanous powers

A lens cavity was created by placing a concave glass mold with a radius of curvature of 407 20 mm and a convex glass mold with a radius of curvature of 65.26 mm mto a gasket which provided spacmg between the molds of 1 8 mm measured at the center of the cavity. Approximately 32 grams of a lens formmg monomer was charged mto the cavity. The lens formmg material used for this test was OMB-91 lens monomer. The reaction cell contammg the lens formmg material was placed horizontally on a supporting stage such that the plane of the edges of the convex mold were at a distance of approximately 30 mm from the plane of the flash tubes and the cell was approximately centered under the light source.

The back surface of the lens cavity was then exposed to a first senes of 5 flashes, with an interval of approximately 4 seconds in between each flash. The cell was then turned over and the front surface was exposed to another 4 flashes with mtervals of about 4 seconds m between each flash It is preferable to apply the first set of flashes to the back surface to start to cure the matenal so that any air bubbles m the liquid monomer will not migrate from the edge of the cavity to the center of the optical zone of the lens Subsequent to these first nine flashes, the reaction cell was allowed to cool for five mmutes in the absence of any activating radiation. To cool the reaction cell, au at a temperature of 71 4 degrees F and at a flow rate of approximately 15 to 25 scf per mmute was applied to the back surface and air at a temperature of 71.4 degrees F and at a flow rate of approximately 15 to 25 scf per mmute was applied to the front surface of the cell. The back surface of the lens cavity was then dosed with one more flash and returned to the cooling chamber for four mmutes

Next, the cell was exposed to one flash on the front surface and cooled m the coolmg chamber for seven mmutes. Then the cell was exposed to one flash on the front surface and one flash on the back surface and cooled for three mmutes. Next, the cell was exposed to two flashes on the front surface and two flashes on the back surface and cooled for four and a half mmutes. The cell was then exposed to five flashes each to the back surface and front surface, and the gasket was removed to expose the edges of the lens. A stnp of polyethylene film impregnated with photomitiator (Irgacure 184) was then wrapped around the edge of the lens, and the cell was exposed to another five flashes to the front surface and fifteen flashes to the back surface. The back surface of the cell was then placed on the conductive thermal m-mold postcure device (i.e , "bean bags" filled with glass beads sitting on a hot plate at approx. 340 ° F) as described previously (see conductive heating example above) for a time penod of 13 mmutes, after which the glass molds were removed from the finished lens. The finished lens exhibited a distance focusmg power of -6 16 diopters and a +2.55 bifocal add power, had excellent optics, was abenation- free, was 74 mm m diameter, and had a center of thickness of 1.7 mm. Dunng the cooling steps , a small surface probe thermistor was positioned agamst the outside of the gasket wall to monitor the reaction. The results are summarized below.

EXAMPLE 8: Improved Curing Example

An 80 mm diameter glass progressive addition mold with a nominal distance radius of curvature of -6.00 diopters and a +2.50 diopter bifocal add power was sprayed with a mixture of isopropyl alcohol and distilled water in equal parts and wiped dry with a lint free paper towel. The progressive mold was lenticulanzed to provide an optical zone 68 mm m diameter along the 180 degree mendian and 65 mm m diameter along the 90 degree mendian. The non-castmg face of the mold was mounted to a suction cup, which was attached to a spmdle The spmdle was placed on a spm coat unit A one mch diameter pool of liquid Pnmer was dispensed mto the center of the horizontally positioned glass mold from a soft polyethylene squeeze bottle equipped with a nozzle with an orifice diameter of approximately 0 040 inches The composition of the Primer is discussed m detail below (see Scratch Resistant Lens Formation Process Example)

The spin motor was engaged to rotate the mold at a speed of approximately 850 to 900 revolutions per mmute, which caused the liquid matenal to spread out over the face of the mold. Immediately thereafter, a steady stream of an additional 1.5 to 2.0 grams of Primer mateπal was dispensed onto the castmg face of the spinning mold with the nozzle tip positioned at a 45 degree angle approximately 12 mm from the mold face such that the stream was flowing with the duection of rotation of the mold. The stream of Primer material was directed first at the center of the mold face and then dispensed along the radius of the mold face in a direction from the center toward the edge of the mold face The solvent present m the Primer was allowed to evaporate off for 8 to 10 seconds while the mold was rotated. The rotation was stopped and the Primer coat present on the mold was cured via two exposures to the activating light output from the medium pressure mercury vapor lamp, totalmg approximately 300 mJ/cm².

The spin motor was again engaged and approximately 1.5 to 2.0 grams of HC8-H Hard Coat (see descnption below), commercially available from the FastCast Corporation of Louisville, Kentucky was dispensed onto the spinning mold in a similar fashion as the Pπmer coat The solvent present in the HC8-H was allowed to evaporate off for 25 seconds while the mold was rotated. The rotation was stopped and the HC8-H coat was cured m the same manner as the Primer coat.

The mold was removed from the FlashCure unit and assembled mto a sihcone rubber gasket m combmation with a cleaned convex mold possessmg a radius of curvature of +2 00 diopters. The raised lip present on the inner circumference of the rubber gasket provided a spacmg of 6.3 mm between the two molds at the center pomt The mold/gasket assembly was positioned on a fillmg stage and the edge of the gasket was peeled back to permit the cavity to be filled with OMB-91 lens formmg composition, commercially available from the FastCast Corporation of Louisville, Kentucky. The edge of the gasket was returned to its sealmg relationship with the edges of the molds and the excess lens formmg composition was vacuumed off the non-castmg surface of the back mold with a suction device. The filled mold/gasket assembly was placed on a stage m a lens curmg unit and subjected to four exposures of the activatmg light output from the six mch medium pressure mercury vapor lamp, totalmg approximately 600 mJ/cm².

Immediately following this mitial dose of high mtensity activating light, the assembly was continuously exposed to streams of air havmg a temperature of 42 °F while being inadiated with very low intensity activatmg light for eight minutes. The light mtensity measured approximately 90 microwatts/cm² from above plus approximately 95 microwatts/cm² from below, accordmg to the plus lens light distnbution pattern called for by the manufacturer. The lamp racks are typically configured to deliver activating light havmg an intensity of about 300 microwatt/cm² for the standard fifteen mmute cunng cycle The reduction in activating light mtensity was accomplished by inserting a translucent high density polyethylene plate mto the light distnbution filter plate slot along with the plus lens light distribution plate. A ttanslucent high density polyethylene plate was positioned between the front mold member and one light distnbution plate and between the back mold member and the other light distribution plate.

The non-casting surface of the back mold was subsequently exposed to four doses of high mtensity activatmg light totalmg approximately 1150 mJ/cm² The gasket was stripped from the assembly and residual uncured matenal wiped from the exposed edge of the lens. An oxygen banier strip (polyethylene) was wrapped around the edge of the lens and the mold was exposed to two more doses of high mtensity activatmg light totaling 575 mJ/cm² to the non-castmg surface of the front mold followed by eight more flashes to the non-casting surface of the back mold totalmg 2300 mJ/cm² The non-castmg surface of the back mold was placed m contact with a thermal transfer pad, commercially available from the FastCast Corporation of Louisville, Kentucky, at a temperature of approximately 150 to 200 °F for thirteen minutes The assembly was removed from the thermal transfer pad and the back mold was removed with a slight impact from an appropriately sized wedge. The front mold with the lens attached thereto was placed m a container of room temperamre water and the lens separated from the front mold. The now-finished lens was sprayed with a mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water m equal parts and wiped dry The lens read +3.98 D with an addition power of +2.50, was clear , non-yellow, and exhibited good optics.

EXAMPLE 9: Scratch Resistant Lens Formation Example A first coating composition, heremafter refened to as "Primer", was prepared by mixing the following components by weight:

93.87% acetone;

3.43% SR-399 (dipentaerythπtol pentaacrylate), available from Sartomer,

2.14% CN-104 (epoxy acrylate), available from Sartomer; 0.28% Irgacure 184 (1-hydroxycyclohexylphenylketone), available from Ciba-Geigy, and

0.28% Darocur 1173 (2-hydroxy-2-methyl-l-phenyl-propan-l-one) available from Ciba-Geigy

A second coatmg composition, heremafter refened to as "HC8-H" was prepared by mixing the following components by weight: 84.69% 1 -methoxy 2-propanol;

9.45% SR-399 (dipentaerythntol pentaacrylate), available from Sartomer; 4.32% SR601 (ethoxylated bisphenol A diacrylate), available from Sartomer; and 1.54% Irgacure 184 (1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone), available from Ciba-Geigy. Each of these coatmg compositions was prepared by first dissolving the monomers mto the solvent, then addmg the photomitiators, mixing well, and finally passing the composition through a one micron filter prior to use

An 80 mm diameter glass, 28 mm flattop mold with a distance radius of curvature of -6 00 diopters and a +2.00 diopter bifocal add power were sprayed with a mixture of isopropyl alcohol and distilled water m equal parts The flattop mold was wiped dry with a lmt free paper towel. The non-castmg face of the mold was mounted to a suction cup, which was attached to a spmdle. The spmdle was placed on the spin coating unit. A one mch diameter pool of liquid Primer was dispensed mto the center of the horizontally positioned glass mold The Pπmer was dispensed from a soft polyethylene squeeze bottle equipped with a nozzle havmg an onfice diameter of approximately 0.040 mches A spm motor of the spinning device was engaged to rotate the mold at a speed of approximately 850 to 900 revolutions per mmute, causmg the liquid Pnmer to spread out over the face of the mold. Immediately thereafter, a steady stteam of an additional 1.5 to 2.0 grams of Primer material was dispensed onto the casting face of the spmnmg mold The stteam of Pnmer material was duected onto the casting face with the nozzle tip positioned at a 45 degree angle approximately 12 mm from the mold face This positionmg of the nozzle tip made the stteam to flow with the direction of rotation of the mold The stteam of Pπmer matenal was duected first at the center of the mold face and then dispensed along the radius of the mold face m a duection from the center toward the edge of the mold face The solvent present m the Primer was allowed to evaporate off for 8 to 10 seconds durmg rotation of the mold The rotation was stopped and the Pnmer coat which remained on the mold was cured via two exposures to the activatmg output from a medium pressure mercury vapor lamp, totaling approximately 300 mJ/cπr All light mtensity/dosage measurements cited herem were taken with an International Light IL-1400 Radiometer equipped with an XLR-340B Detector Head, both commercially available from International Light, Inc of Newburyport, Massachusetts.

Upon exposure to the activating light, the spm motor was again engaged and approximately 1.5 to 2.0 grams of HC8-H Hard Coat, commercially available from the FastCast Corporation of Louisville, Kentucky was dispensed onto the spinning mold in a similar fashion as the Primer coat. The solvent present in the HC8-H was allowed to evaporate off for 25 seconds while the mold was spmnmg. The rotation was stopped, and the HC8-H coat was cured m the same manner as the Primer coat

The mold was removed from the spm coatmg unit and assembled mto a sihcone rubber gasket in combmation with a cleaned convex mold possessmg a radius of curvature of +7 50 diopters. The raised hp present on the inner cucumference of the rubber gasket provided a spacmg of 1.8 mm between the two molds at the center pomt. At this pomt, the mold/gasket assembly was positioned on a fillmg stage and the edge of the gasket was peeled back to permit the cavity to be filled with OMB-91 lens formmg composition, commercially available from the FastCast Corporation of Louisville, Kentucky. The edge of the gasket was returned to its sealing relationship with the edges of the molds and the excess lens forming composition was vacuumed off the non-casting surface of the back mold with a suction device. The filled mold/gasket assembly was transfened from the fillmg stage to a lens cunng unit. While m the lens curmg umt, the assembly was contmuously inadiated with activating light from both sides for a penod of 15 mmutes at approximately 300 microwatts/cm² from above and at approximately 350 micro watts/cm² from below, according to the minus lens light distnbution pattern called for by the manufacturer. Dunng the inadiation, the casting cell was contmuously exposed to streams of au havmg a temperature of 42 °F. The non-castmg surface of the back mold was exposed to four doses of high mtensity activatmg light totalmg approximately 1150 mJ/cm². The gasket was stopped from the assembly and residual uncured mateπal was wiped from the exposed edge of the lens. An oxygen barner stop (polyethylene) was wrapped around the edge of the lens. The mold/gasket assembly was exposed to two more doses of high intensity activating hght, wherem 575 mJ/cm² total was duected to the non-castmg surface of the front mold. Subsequently, eight more flashes of the activating light were duected to the non-castmg surface of the back mold, totalmg 2300 mJ/cm²

The non-castmg surface of the back mold was placed m contact with a thermal transfer pad, commercially available from the FastCast Corporation of Louisville, Kentucky, at a temperature of approximately 150 to 200° F for thirteen mmutes. The mold/gasket assembly was removed from the thermal transfer pad, and the back mold was removed with a slight impact from an appropriately sized wedge. The front mold with the lens attached thereto was placed m a container of room temperature water While withm the water, the lens became separated from the front mold The now-finished lens was sprayed with a mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water m equal parts and wiped dry

The lens was positioned in a holder and placed mto a heated dye pot for 5 minutes The dye pot contamed a solution of BPI Black, commercially available from Brain Power, Inc of Miami, Florida, and distilled water at a temperature of approximately 190 degrees F. The lens was removed from the dye pot, nnsed with tap water, and wiped dry. The lens exhibited a total visible light absorbance of approximately 80%. When mspected for cosmetic defects on a light table, no pmhole defects were observed. Further, the tint which had been absorbed by the back surface of the lens was found to be smooth and even.

EXAMPLE 10: Formation of a Plastic Lens Containing Photochromic Material.

A polymenzable mixture of PRO-629 (see above for a description of the components of PRO-629), photochromic pigments, and a photoinitiator/co-imtiator system was prepared according to the following procedure. A photochromic stock solution was prepared by dissolving the following pigments into 484 grams of HDDMA

Pigment grams % by wt.

Dye #94 1.25 0.250%

Dye # 266 0.45 0.090%

Vanacrol Red PNO 2.66 0.532%

Vanacrol Yellow L 1.64 0.328%

Reversacol Com Yellow 3.58 0.716%

Reversacol Berry Red 2.96 0.590%

Reversacol Sea Green 2.17 0.434%

Reversacol Palatmate Purple 1.29 0.258% Total 16.0 3.200%

Dye #94 and Dye #266 are lndilino-spnopyrans commercially available from Chroma Chemicals, Inc. m Dayton, Ohio. Vanacrol Red PNO is a spiro-napthoxazine material and Vanacrol Yellow L is a napthopyran material, both commercially available from Great Lakes Chemical m West Lafayette, Indiana. Reversacol Com Yellow and Reversacol Berry Red are napthopyrans and Reversacol Sea Green, and Reversacol Palatmate Purple are spiro-napthoxazme matenals commercially available from Keystone Analme Corporation m Chicago, Illinois.

The powdered pigments were weighed and placed m a beaker. The HDDMA was added to the powdered pigments, and the entue mixture was heated to a temperature m the range from about 50°C to 60°C and stirred for two hours. Subsequently, the photochromic stock solution was cooled to room temperature and then gravity fed through a four mch deep bed of alummum oxide basic m a one mch diameter column. Prior to passing the stock solution through the alumma, the alumma was washed with acetone and dried with air. The remaming HDDMA was forced out of the alumma with pressurized au. It is believed that this filtration step removes any degradation by-products of the photochromic pigments and/or any unpuπties present in the mixture. After the filtration step, the stock solution was passed through a 1 micron filter to remove any alumma particles which may have passed out of the column with the stock solution A photoinitiator stock solution containing a photomitiator combined with an ultraviolet/visible light absorber was also prepared by mixing 2.56 grams of CGI-819 and 0.2 grams of Tinuvm 400, an ultraviolet/visible light absorber commercially available from Ciba Additives of Tarrytown, New York, with 97 24 grams of PRO- 629. The stock solution was stored for two hours at room temperature in the absence of light. The photomitiator stock solution was then filtered by passmg it through a layer of alumma and a one micron filter. The stock solution was placed in an opaque polyethylene contamer for storage

A background dye stock solution was prepared by mixing 50 grams of a 422 ppm solution of A241/HDDMA, 50 grams of a 592 ppm solution of Thermoplast Red 454/HDDMA, 50 grams of 490 ppm solution of Zapon Brown 286/HDDMA, 50 grams of 450 ppm solution of Zapon Brown 287/HDDMA, 50 grams of 1110 ppm solution of Oil Soluble Blue II/HDDMA, and 50 grams of a 1 110 ppm solution of Thermoplast Blue P/HDDMA, all with 700 grams of PRO-629. The entue mixture was heated to a temperature ranging from about 50°C to 60°C and subsequently stored for two hours.

A lens formmg composition was prepared by addmg 12.48 grams of the above descnbed photochromic stock solution, 10 grams of the photomitiator stock solution, 27 grams of the background dye stock solution, and 7.3 grams of the NMDEA co-mitiator to 943.22 grams of PRO-629. The components of the lens forming composition were stined at room temperature for several minutes until well mixed. This composition is hereafter refened to as PC #1. The PC#1 contained the following amounts of components.

Component Amount

Tπpropyleneglycol diacrylate 31.16 %

Tetraethyleneglycol diacrylate 20.45 %

Tnmethylolpropane tnacrylate 19.47 %

Bisphenol A bis allyl carbonate 16.55 %

Hexanediol dimethacrylate 11.56 %

Dye #94 31.20 ppm

Dye # 266 11.20 ppm

Vanacrol Red PNO 66.40 ppm

Vanacrol Yellow L 40.90 ppm

Reversacol Com Yellow 89.30 ppm

Reversacol Berry Red 73.60 ppm

Reversacol Sea Green 54.20 ppm

Reversacol Palatinate Purple 32.20 ppm

A241 0.57 ppm

Thermoplast Red 454 0.80 ppm

Zapon Brown 286 0.66 ppm

Zapon Brown 287 0.61 ppm

Oil Soluble Blue II 1.50 ppm

Thermoplast Blue 1.50 ppm

CGI-819 255.90 ppm

NMDEA 0.73 %

Tmuvm 400 20.00 ppm An 80mm diameter concave glass progressive addition mold having a distance radius of curvature of 6 00 diopters and a +1.75 diopter bifocal add power was sprayed with a mixture of isopropyl alcohol and distilled water in equal parts and wiped dry with a lint free paper towel The mold was then mounted with its casting face upward on the center of a stage. The mold was fixed securely to the stage using three equidistant clip-style contact pomts to hold the penphery of the mold. The mold stage had a spmdle attached to it which was adapted to connect to a spm coatmg device The mold stage, with the mold affixed, was placed withm the spin coatmg device The mold was rotated at approximately 750 to 900 revolutions per mmute A stteam of isopropyl alcohol was duected at the casting surface while the castmg surface was simultaneously brushed with a soft camel hau brush to clean the surface. After the cleaning step, the mold surface was dned by duectmg a stteam of reagent grade acetone over the surface and allowing it to evaporate off, all while contmumg the rotation of the mold

The rotation of the mold was then terminated and a one mch diameter pool of a liquid coatmg composition was dispensed mto the center of the horizontally positioned glass mold from a soft polyethylene squeeze bottle equipped with a nozzle having an orifice diameter of approximately 0.040 mches The spm motor was engaged to rotate the mold at a speed of approximately 750 to 900 revolutions per mmute, causmg the liquid matenal to spread out over the face of the mold. Immediately thereafter, a steady stteam of an additional 1 5 to 2 0 grams of the coating composition was dispensed onto the casting face of the spmnmg mold The stteam was moved from the center to the edge of the castmg face with a nozzle tip positioned at a 45° angle approximately 12 mm from the mold face Thus, the stteam was flowing with the duection of rotation of the mold

The solvent present in the coating composition was allowed to evaporate while rotating the mold for 10 to 15 seconds. The rotation was stopped, and then the coating composition on the mold was cured via a total exposure of approximately 300 mJ/cm² of activating light. The light was provided from a medium pressure mercury vapor lamp. All light intensity/dosage measurements cited herem were taken with an International Light IL-1400 Radiometer equipped with an XLR-340B Detector Head, both commercially available from International Light, Inc. of Newburyport, Massachusetts. At this pomt, the spm motor was agam engaged and approximately 1.5 to 2.0 grams of additional coatmg composition was dispensed onto the spmnmg mold The solvent of the composition was allowed to evaporate, and the composition was cured m a sumlar fashion to the first layer of coatmg composition

The above described coatmg composition compnsed the following matenals.

Material % by wt.

Irgacure 184 0.91 %

Tmuvin 770 0.80 %

CN-104 2 00 %

SR-601 1.00 %

SR-399 8 60 %

Acetone 26 00 %

Ethanol 7 00 %

1 -Methoxypropanol 53 69 % Irgacure 184 is a photoinitiator commercia.lv available from Ciba Additives, Inc CN-104 is an epoxy acrylate o gomer, SR-601 is an ethoxylated bisphenol A diacrylate, and SR-399 is dipentaerythntol pentaacrvlate, all available from Sartomer Company in Exton, Pennsylvania The acetone, the ethanol, and the 1- methoxypropanol were all reagent grade solvents. The Tmuvm 770 improves the impact resistance of the lens and is available from Ciba Additives, Inc

An 80 mm diameter convex mold with radii of curvature of 6 80/7 80 diopters was cleaned and coated usmg the same procedure described above except that no pooling of the coatmg composition occuned in the center of the mold when the composition was dispensed thereto

The concave and convex molds were then assembled together with a si cone rubber gasket A raised hp on the inner circumference of the mbber gasket provided a spacmg of 2 8 mm between the two molds at the center point At this point the mold/gasket assembly was positioned on a fillmg stage The edge of the gasket was peeled back to permit the cavity to be filled with PC #1 lens formmg composition The edge of the gasket was returned to its sealing relationship with the edges of the molds, and the excess lens forming composition was vacuumed from the non-castmg surface of the back mold with a suction device The filled mold/gasket assembly was then transfened from the fillmg stage to a lens curmg unit The assembly was placed with the back mold facmg upward on a black stage configured to hold the mold/gasket assembly

An activating light filter was then placed on top of the back mold The filter was approximately 80 mm in diameter which is the same as the mold diameter The filter also had a spherical configuration with a center thickness of 6 7 mm and an edge thickness of 5 5 mm The filter was taken from a group of previously made filters These filters were formed by usmg eyeglass lens castmg molds and gaskets to create cavities that were thickest m the center (a plus spheπcal cavity) and cavities that were thinnest m the center (a minus spheπcal cavity) A tone component was also incorporated with some of these cavities to form compound cavities

The filter cavities were filled with an activatmg light curable composition compnsmg by weight 99 37% PRO-629, 0 35 % K-Resin, 0 27% NMDEA, 121 ppm CGI-819, and 10 ppm Tmuvin 400 K-resin is a styrene- butadiene copolymer commercially available from Phillips Chemical Company To form this composition, the K- resm was first dissolved m toluene An appropriate amount of the K-resm toluene solution was added to the PRO- 629, and then the toluene was evaporated off by heat and stirring The NMDEA, CGI-819, and the Tmuvm 400 were then added to the PRO-629/K-Resιn solution The compositions contamed m the cavities were cured by exposure to activating light When the cured article was removed from the mold cavity, it exhibited a high degree of haze caused by the mcompatibihty of the PRO-629 and the K-Resm In the stoctest sense of the word, it should be noted that these filters were not "lenses" because then function was not to focus light but rather to scatter and diffuse light

The mold/gasket assembly and the filter were then inadiated with four consecutive doses of activatmg light totalmg approximately 1150 mJ/cm², as previously measured at the plane of the mold cavity with no filter or any other intervening media between the light source and the plane The mold/gasket assembly was then turned over on the stage so that the front mold was facing upward The mold/gasket assembly was further rotated 90 degrees around the paraxial axis from its original position The light filter was then placed over the front mold The entire assembly was then exposed to two more doses of activating light totaling approximately 575 mJ/cm² The mold/gasket assemblv was removed from the curing chamber The gasket was removed from the molds, and the exposed edge of the lens was wiped to remove any residual liquid The molds with lens were then placed in a vertical orientation m a rack, and the non-castmg faces of both the front and back molds were exposed to ambient room temperature air for a period of approximately ten mmutes Then, without the aforementioned light filter m place, the mold assembly was dosed with four exposures totaling 600 mJ/cm² directed toward the back mold and two exposures totaling 300 mJ/cm² directed toward the front mold.

Subsequent to these exposures, the junction of the back mold and the lens was scored with the edge of a brass spatula. The back mold was then removed from the lens by positioning an appropriate sized Delnn wedge between the front and back molds and applying a sharp impact to the wedge. The lens, along with the front mold to which it was attached, was held under running tap water and simultaneously brushed with a soft brush to remove any flakes or particles of polymer from the edges and surface of the lens The front mold was then separated from the lens by breaking the seal between the two with the pomt of a pm pressed agamst the junction of the front mold and the lens. The lens was then placed concave side upward on a lens stage of similar design to the mold stage, except that the penpheral clips were configured to secure a smaller diameter workpiece. The lens stage, with the lens affixed, was positioned on the spm coatmg unit and rotated at about 750 to 900 revolutions per mmute. A stteam of isopropyl alcohol was duected at the concave surface while simultaneously brushing the surface with a soft, clean brush.

After brushing, a stteam of isopropyl alcohol was duected at the surface of the lens, and the rotation was contmued for a period of approximately 30 seconds until the lens was dry. The lens was turned over on the stage so that the convex surface of the lens faced upward. Then the cleanmg procedure was repeated on the convex surface. With the convex surface facmg upward, the lens was dosed with four exposures of activatmg light totalmg approximately 1150 mJ/cm². The lens was agam turned over on the stage such that the concave surface was upward. The lens was subjected to an additional two exposures totalmg 300 mJ/cm². The lens was removed from the stage and placed m a convection oven at 115°C for five mmutes. After annealing the lens, it was removed from the oven and allowed to cool to room temperature At this point the lens was ready for shapmg by conventional means to fit into an eyeglass frame.

The resulting lens was approximately 72 mm m diameter. The lens had a center thickness of 2.6 mm, a distance focusmg power of -0.71 -1 00 diopters, and a bifocal addition strength of 1 74 diopters. The lens appeared to have a bleached color of tan. Also, the lens that was formed exhibited approximately 75 % visible transmittance as measured with a Hoy a ULT-3000 meter. The lens was exposed to midday sunlight at a temperature of approximately 75 ° F for 3 mmutes. After bemg exposed to sunlight, the lens exhibited a gray color and a visible light transmittance of approximately 15 % The optics of the lens appeared to be cnsp, without abenations in either the distance or the bifocal segment regions. The same lens formmg composition was cured to form a piano lens so that the lens could be scanned with a Hewlett Packard Model 8453 UV-Vis spectrophotometer See Fig 30 for a plot of % transmittance versus wavelength (nm), as exhibited by the piano lens m its lightened state (i.e., without sunlight exposure) The lens exhibited very little transmittance of light at wavelengths below about 370 nm.

The eyeglass lens of this example was formed from a lens forming composition mcluded ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg photochromic compounds by usmg activatmg light. Since photochrormc pigments tend to absorb ultraviolet/visible light strongly, the activatmg light might not have penetrated to the depths of the lens forming composition The lens forming composition, however, contamed a co-initiator m conjunction with a photomitiator to help promote the curing of the entire lens formmg composition The present example thus demonstrates that a photochromic lens contammg both a photomitiator and a co-mitiator may be cured usmg activatmg light to initiate polymerization of the lens forming composition

EXAMPLE 11: Casting a Colorless Lens Containing Ultraviolet/Visible Light Absorbers

According to a prefened embodiment, a polymeπzable mixture of PRO-629 (see above for a descπption of the components of PRO-629), colorless ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compounds, an ultraviolet stabilizer, background dyes, and a photomitiator/co-initiator package was prepared accordmg to the followmg procedure Six separate stock solutions were prepared One stock solution contamed the photoinitiator, two stock solutions contamed ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compounds, one stock solution contained co-initiators, one stock solution contamed an ultraviolet light stabilizer, and one stock solution contamed a background dye package. Each of these stock solutions were treated by passmg them through a one mch diameter column packed with approximately 30 grams of alumma basic It is believed that this step reduced the impunties and trapped the acidic byproducts present in each of the additives to the PRO-629 The followmg is a detailed descnption of the preparation of the polymenzable mixture mentioned above

About 500 grams of a photoinitiator stock solution was prepared by dissolving 2 5% by weight of phenyl bιs(2,4,6-tnmethylbenzoyl) phosphme oxide (CGI-819 commercially available from Ciba Additives) m Pro-629 This mixture was passed through an alumma basic column m the dark About 500 grams of the ultraviolet light absorber stock solution was prepared by dissolving 2 5% by weight of 2(2H-benzotπazol-2-yl)-4-(l,l,3,3-tettamethyl)phenol (98% purity) m PRO-629 This mixture was also passed through an alumina basic column

About 500 grams of a co-initiator stock solution was prepared by mixmg 70% by weight of CN-384 (a reactive amine co-mitiator commercially available from Sartomer Company) m Pro- 629 This mixture was passed through an alumma basic column

About 271 grams of an ultraviolet light stabilizer stock solution was prepared by mixmg 5 55% by weight of Tmuvin 292 m PRO-629 This mixture was passed through an alumma basic column

About 250 grams of an ultraviolet/visible light absorber stock solution was prepared by mixmg 5 0% Tmuvm 400 (a mixture of 2-[4-((2-hydroxy-3-dodecyloxypropyl)-oxy)-2-hydroxyphenyl]-4,6-bιs(2,4- dιmethylphenyl)-l,3,5-tπazιne and 2-[4-((2-hydroxy-3-todecyloxypropyl)-oxy)-2-hydroxyphenyl]-4,6-bιs(2,4- dιmethylphenyl)-l,3,5-tnazιne) by weight m PRO-629 This mixture was passed through an alumma basic column

About 1000 grams of a background dye stock solution was prepared by mixmg about 50 grams of a 592 ppm solution of Thermoplast Red 454/HDDMA, 50 grams of 490 ppm solution of Zapon Brown 286/HDDMA, 50 grams of 450 ppm solution of Zapon Brown 287/HDDMA, 50 grams of 1110 ppm solution of Oil Soluble Blue II/HDDMA, and 50 grams of a 1110 ppm solution of Thermoplast Blue P/HDDMA, all with 750 grams of PRO- 629 The entire mixture was heated to a temperamre between about 50° and 60° C and stined for two hours This mixture was passed through an alumma basic column

About 250 grams of CN-386 (a reactive amine co-initiator commercially available from Sartomer Company) was passed through an alumma basic column A lens forming composition was prepared by mixing 967 75 grams of PRO-629 with 12 84 grams of the 2 5% 2(2H-benzotoazol-2-yl)-4-(l,l,3,3-tetramethyl)phenol ultraviolet/visible light absorber stock solution, 4 3 grams of the 70% CN-384 co-initiator stock solution, 8 16 grams of the 2 5% CGI-819 photomitiator stock solution, 0 53 grams of the CN-386, 1 54 grams of the Tmuvm 400 ultraviolet/visible light absorber stock solution, 0 92 grams of the Tmuvm 292 ultraviolet light stabilizer stock solution, and 4 0 grams of the background dye stock solution The resultmg lens formmg composition contained the following components

Matenal % by weight

PRO-629 99 10%

2(2H-benzotoazol-2 -yl)-4. -(1,1 ,3 ,3-tettamethyl)phenol 321 ppm

Tmuvm 400 77 ppm

Tinuvm 292 51 ppm

CN-384 0 3%

CN-386 0 53%

CGI-819 204 ppm

Thermoplast Red 0 12 ppm

Zapon Brown 286 0 10 ppm

Zapon Brown 287 0 10 ppm

Oil Soluble Blue II 0 22 ppm

Thermoplast Blue 0 22 ppm

An 80mm diameter flattop concave glass mold with a distance radius of curvature of 2 85 diopters and a +3 00 diopter bifocal add power was cleaned and coated as descnbed m Example 10

An 80 mm diameter convex mold with radii of curvature of 7 05 diopters was cleaned and coated m the same fashion descnbed above except that no poolmg of the coatmg composition occuned in the center of the mold when the composition was dispensed thereto

Both the concave and convex molds were then provided with a cured adhesion-promoting coatmg composition By providmg such a coatmg, the adhesion between the castmg surface of the glass mold and the lens formmg composition was mcreased, thereby reducing the possibility of premature release of the lens from the mold The coatmg further provided abrasion resistance, chemical resistance, and unproved cosmetics to the finished lens

The concave and convex molds were then assembled and placed withm a lens curmg unit as descnbed m Example 10

An activatmg light filter was then placed on top of the back mold The filter was approximately 80 mm m diameter which is the same as the mold diameter It had a piano configuration with a thickness of 3 1 mm This filter transmitted approximately 30% of the incident activatmg light from the source as measured using the IL1400 radiometer with a XRL-340B detector head The filter was taken from a group of previously made filters The fabrication of these filters was discussed m Example 10

The mold/gasket assembly in which the lens forming composition had been placed and which had been covered by the above described filter was then inadiated with four consecutive doses of activating light totaling approximately 600 mJ/cm², as measured using the IL-1400 Radiometer equipped with the XLR-340B detector This measurement was taken at the plane of the mold cavity while no filter or any intervening media was present between the light source and the plane The mold/gasket assembly was then turned over on the stage so that the front mold was facmg upward The mold/gasket assembly was further rotated 90 degrees around the paraxial axis from its oπgmal position The light filter was then replaced over the front mold The entire assembly was exposed to two more doses of activating hght totalmg approximately 300 mJ/cm²

The mold/gasket assembly was then removed from the curmg chamber, and the gasket was removed from the assembly The mold was then returned to the lens cunng chamber such that the back mold was facmg upward An opaque mbber disc, approximately 80 mm m diameter was placed over the back mold This disc had the function of preventing activating light from impmgmg on the major portion of the matenal contamed withm the cavity With the disc m position, the cell was exposed to two more exposures at 300 mJ/ cm² This subsequent exposure was used to cure the residual liquid around the edges of the lens, particularly around the junction between the front mold and the lens and to help seal the penphery The mold assembly was removed from the cuπng chamber and placed m a vertical orientation m a rack The non-castmg faces of both the front and back molds were then exposed to ambient room temperature au for a period of approximately fifteen mmutes At this pomt, the entire mold assembly was dosed with two exposures totalmg 300 mJ/cm² directed toward the back mold and two exposures totalmg 300 mJ/cm² directed toward the front mold, without the aforementioned light filter or opaque disc m place

The lens was removed from the mold assembly and post-cured as descnbed m Example 10 The resultmg lens was approximately 72 mm m diameter, had a center thickness of 1 5 mm, a distance focusmg power of —4 08 diopters, and a bifocal addition strength of 3 00 diopters The resultant lens was water white The optics of the lens were cπsp, without abenations m either the distance or the bifocal segment regions The same lens formmg composition was cured to form a piano lens The piano lens was scanned with a Hewlett Packard Model 8453 UV-Vis spectrophotometer See Fig 31 for a plot of % transmittance versus wavelength (nm), as exhibited by the photochromic lens when exposed to sunlight The lens exhibited virtually no transmittance of hght at wavelengths below about 370 nm Also shown m Fig 31 are the results of a similar scan made on a piano lens formed usmg the OMB-91 lens forming composition (see Curmg by the Application of Pulsed Activatmg Light above for components of OMB-91) The OMB-91 lens, which has no ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compounds, appears to transmit light at wavelengths shorter than 370 nm, unlike the colorless lens that contamed ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compounds

The eyeglass lens of this example was cured usmg activating light even though the lens forming composition mcluded activating light absorbing compounds Smce activatmg light absorbmg compounds tend to absorb activatmg light strongly, the activating light might not have penetrated to the depths of the lens formmg composition The lens formmg composition, however, contamed a co-initiator m conjunction with a photomitiator to help promote the cunng of the entue lens formmg composition The present example thus demonsttates that a lens contammg ultraviolet visible light absorbing compounds may be cured using activating light to mitiate polymerization of a lens formmg composition which contains a photoimtiator/co-mitiator system The lens was also produced usmg activating light of comparable intensity and duration as was used for the production of photochromic lenses Thus, the addition of ultraviolet/visible light absorbers to a non-photochromic lens formmg composition, allows both photochromic and non-photochromic lens forming compositions to be cured usmg the same apparatus and similar procedures

EXAMPLE 12: Casting a Colored Lens Containing Ultraviolet/Visible Light Absorbers According to a prefened embodiment, a polymenzable mixture of PRO-629 (see above for a descnption of the components of PRO-629), fixed pigments, and a photoinitiator/co-imtiator package was prepared accordmg to the following procedure. Nine separate stock solutions were prepared Seven of the stock solutions contamed fixed pigments, one of the stock solutions contamed an ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg compound, and one of the stock solutions contamed a photoinitiator. Each of these stock solutions were treated by passing them through a one mch diameter column packed with approximately 30 grams of alumma basic. It is believed that this step reduces the impunties and traps the acidic byproducts present in each of the additives to the PRO-629.

For each of the followmg fixed pigments, a stock solution was prepared by the following procedure. The pigments used were Thermoplast Red 454, Thermoplast Blue P, Oil Soluble Blue II, Zapon Green 936, Zapon Brown 286, Zapon Brown 287, and Thermoplast Yellow 284 One gram of each pigment was dissolved m 499 grams of HDDMA. Each mixture was heated to a temperature in the range of from about 50°C to about 60°C for approximately two hours. This mixture was passed through an alumina basic column. The alumina was then washed with 200 grams of HDDMA at a temperature of about 50°C to about 60°C followed by 300 grams of PRO- 629 at a temperature of about 50°C to about 60°C. This washmg step ensured that any pigments trapped m the alumina were washed mto the stock solution This resulted m stock solutions which contained a 0.1% concenttation of each pigment in 29.97% PRO-629 and 69.93% HDDMA.

About 250 grams of the ultraviolet/visible light absorber stock solution was prepared by dissolving 5.0% Tmuvm 400 by weight m PRO-629. This mixture was passed through an alumma basic column

About 500 grams of the photomitiator stock solution was prepared by dissolving 2.5% by weight of phenyl bis(2,4,6-tamethylbenzoyl) phosphme oxide (CGI-819 commercially available from Ciba Additives) m PRO-629 This mixture was passed through an alumina basic column m the dark.

A lens formmg composition was prepared by mixmg 685 3 grams of PRO-629 with 1048 grams of the 2.5% CGI-819 photomitiator stock solution, 5.3 grams of NMDEA (N -methyldiethanolamine is commercially available from Aldnch Chemicals), 0.6 grams of Tmuvm 400 ultraviolet/visible light absorber stock solution, 7 grams of the Thermoplast Red stock solution, 58.3 grams of the Thermoplast Blue stock solution, 55.5 of the Oil Soluble Blue II stock solution, 29 2 grams of the Zapon Green 936 stock solution, 68.1 grams of the Zapon Brown 286 stock solution, 38.9 grams of the Zapon Brown 287 stock solution, and 41.3 grams of the Thermoplast Yellow 104 stock solution. The resultmg lens forming composition contained the following components

Material % by weight

Bisphenol A bis allyl carbonate 13.35% Tπpropyleneglycol diacrylate 25.13%

Tettaethyleneglycol diacrylate 16.49%

Tnmethylolpropane tnacrylate 15.71%

Hexanediol dimethacrylate 28.75%

Thermoplast Red 7 0 ppm Zapon Brown 286 68 1 ppm

Zapon Brown 287 38.9 ppm

Oil Soluble Blue II 55.5 ppm

Thermoplast Blue 58.3 ppm

Zapon Green 936 29.2 ppm Thermoplast Yellow 104 41.3 ppm

NMDEA 0.53%

CGI-819 262 ppm

Tmuvm 400 30 ppm

An 80mm diameter flattop concave glass mold with a distance radius of curvature of 6.0 diopters was cleaned and coated as descnbed m Example 10.

An 80 mm diameter convex mold with radii of curvature of 6 05 diopters was cleaned and coated m the same fashion except that no poolmg of the coatmg composition occuned in the center of the mold when the composition was dispensed thereto. The concave and convex molds were then coated with a cured adhesion-promoting coatmg composition

By providmg such a coatmg, the adhesion between the castmg surface of the glass mold and the cuπng lens forming composition was mcreased, thereby reducmg the possibility of premature release of the lens from the mold. The coatmg also provided abrasion resistance, chemical resistance, and improved cosmetics to the finished lens

An activating hght filter was then placed on top of the back mold. The filter was approximately 80 mm m diameter, which is the same as the mold diameter. It had a piano configuration with a thickness of 3 1 mm. This filter transmitted approximately 30% of the mcident activatmg light from the source as measured usmg the IL1400 radiometer with a XRL-340B detector head. The filter was taken from a group of previously made filters. The fabncation of these filters was discussed in Example 10

The mold/gasket assembly contammg the lens formmg composition was then inadiated with six consecutive doses of activating light totaling approximately 1725 mJ/cm², as previously measured using the IL- 1400 Radiometer equipped with the XLR-340B detector, at the plane of the mold cavity with no filter or any intervening media between the light source and the plane The mold/gasket assembly was then turned over on the stage so that the front mold was facing upward The entire assembly was then exposed to six more doses of activating light totalmg approximately 1725 mJ/cm² The mold/gasket assembly was removed from the curmg chamber The gasket was removed from the molds, and the assemblv was placed m a vertical orientation in a rack such that the non-castmg faces of both the front and back molds were exposed to ambient room temperature au for a penod of approximately ten mmutes At this point, the assembly was returned to the lens curmg chamber and was dosed with four exposures totalmg 600 mJ/cm² directed toward the back mold and four exposures totalmg 600 mJ/cm² directed toward the front mold

The lens was removed from the mold assembly and post-cured as descnbed in Experiment 10

The resulting lens was approximately 74 mm m diameter, had a center thickness of 2 7 mm, and a distance focusmg power of +0 06 diopters The resultant lens was dark green/grayish m color and could be used as a sunglass lens The optics of the lens were cnsp, without abenations The lens exhibited visible light transmission of approximately 10% When scanned with a Hewlett Packard Model UV-Vis spectrophotometer, the lens transmitted virtually no light at wavelengths less than 650 nm

The sunglass lens of this example was cured usmg activating light even though the lens formmg composition mcluded ultraviolet/visible absorbmg fixed pigments Since such fixed pigments tend to absorb a portion of the activatmg light strongly, the activatmg light might not have penetrated to the depths of the lens forming composition The lens formmg composition, however, contamed a co-initiator m conjunction with a photoinitiator to help promote the curing of the entue lens formmg composition The present example thus demonsttates that a sunglass lens contammg ultraviolet/visible light absorbmg fixed pigments may be cured usmg activatmg light, which includes ultraviolet/visible light, to mitiate polymerization of a lens formmg composition that contains a photornitiator/co-initiator system

EXAMPLE 13: Altering the Activated color of a Photochromic Lens

Accordmg to a prefened embodiment, a polymenzable mixture of PRO-629 (see above for a descnption of the components of PRO-629), fixed pigments, a photoinitiator/co-initiator, and two photochromic compounds was prepared m a manner sumlar to that described m Example 12 The resulting lens forming composition mcludes PRO-629, and the followmg components

Matenal amount IRG-184 80 ppm

IRG 819 280 ppm

CN-384 1 0 %

CN-386 1 0 %

Thermoplast Blue 0 67 ppm Thermoplast Red 0 04 ppm

Reversacol Sea Green 300 ppm

Reversacol Berry Red 600 ppm After the lens formmg composition was prepared, a vaπety of light effectors were added to the lens forming composition descπbed above The modified lens formmg composition was then placed within a mold cavity, prepared as descπbed m Example 12

Table 8

Both sides of the mold assembly was irradiated with two doses of actmic light (e g , light having a wavelength above about 380 nm). The first dose was applied for between 20 to 40 seconds The final dose was applied for about 5 minutes The resulting lens was demolded and treated with additional actmic light m a post- cure unit The formed lens was exposed to sunlight and the activated color of the lens observed Table 8 summarizes the results when MEHQ, Tmuvin 400, ITX, and IRG-369 are used as light effectors. S9 represents a lens formed without any added light effectors

The activated color of the formed lens was noted after exposmg the formed lens to sunlight The presence of light effectors can have a significant effect on the color of the lens. It should be noted that this change m color may be obtained without altermg the relative ratio of the photochromic compounds (i.e., Berry Red and Sea Green) MEHQ which exhibits absorption m the low ultraviolet light region tends to shift the color of the lens toward red, thus causmg the lens to take on a brown color when exposed to sunlight. The absorbers Tmuvm 400, ITX, and IRG-369 all tend to produce lenses havmg vanous green shades Because of the broad photochromic activatmg light absorbance range of these compounds they may be effectmg the photochromic activity of both photochrormc compounds.

The above examples represent specific examples of how an activated color of a lens may be altered by the addition of a light effector to a lens formmg composition. By running sumlar studies with other light effectors, the activated color of a lens may be adjusted to a vaπety of different colors (e.g., red, orange, yellow, green, blue, mdigo, or violet) without changmg the nature of the photochromic compounds.

FURTHER IMPROVEMENTS

In an embodiment, a lens formmg composition may be cured into a vaπety of different lenses The lens formmg composition includes an aromatic containing polyether polyethylenic functional monomer, a co-initiator composition configured to activate curing of the monomer, and a photoinitiator configured to activate the co- initiator composition m response to bemg exposed to activating light The lens formmg composition may mclude other components such as ultraviolet light absorbers and photochromic compounds Lenses which may be cured usmg the lens forming composition include, but are not limited to, spheric single vision, asphenc single vision lenses, flattop bifocal lenses, and asymmetncal progressive lenses.

One lens formmg composition, herem refened to as OMB-99, includes a mixture of the following monomers. The OMB-99 mixture is commercially available as "OMB-99 Clear Monomer" from Optical Dynamics Corporation, Louisville Kentucky.

OMB-99

98.25 % Ethoxylated₍₄₎bιsphenol A dimethacrylate (CD-540)

0.75 % Difunctional reactive amine coi tiator (CN-384) 0.75 % Monofunctional reactive amme couutiator (CN-386)

0.15 % Phenyl bιs(2,4,6-tπmethylbenzoyl) phosphme oxide (Irgacure-819)

0.10 % 2-(2H-Benzotnazol-2-yl)-4-( 1 , 1 ,3,3-tetramethylbutyl)phenol

0.87 ppm Thermoplast Blue 684

0.05 ppm Thermoplast Red LB 454

Another lens forming composition, herem refened to as Phases II, mcludes a mixture of the following monomers. The presence of photochromic compounds allows the Phases II composition to be used to form photochromic lenses.

Phases II

97.09 % Ethoxylated(4)bιsphenol A dimethacrylate (CD-540)

1.4 % Difunctional reactive amme coimtiator (CN-384)

1.4 % Monofunctional reactive amme coimtiator (CN-386)

0.09 % Phenyl bιs(2,4,6-ttιmethylbenzoyl) phosphme oxide (Irgacure-819) 0.9 ppm Thermoplast Red LB 454

50 ppm Vanacrol Blue D

73.5 ppm Vanacrol Yellow

145 ppmBerry Red

29 ppm Palatmate Purple 55.5 ppm Com Yellow

62 ppm Sea Green

85 ppm Plum Red

The Phases II mixture is commercially available as "PHASES II Monomer" from Optical Dynamics Corporation, Louisville Kentucky.

A lens formmg composition which mcludes an aromatic contammg polyether polyethylenic functional monomer, a co-initiator composition and a photomitiator may be used to form a vanety of prescnption eyeglass lenses, including eyeglass lenses which have a sphere power rangmg from about +4 0 diopter to about -6.0 diopter

The lenses formed from this lens forming composition are substantially free of distortions, cracks, patterns and stoations, and that have negligible yellowing, in less than thirty minutes by exposing the lens formmg composition to activating light and heat. An advantage of the lens formmg composition is that it exhibits increased adhesion to the molds. This may reduce the incidence of premature release of the formed lens from the molds. Additionally, the use of adhesion promoting agents, typically applied to the molds to prevent premature release, may no longer be necessary The increased adhesion of the lens forming composition to the molds allows cunng of the lens forming composition at higher temperatures. Typically, control of the temperamre of the lens formmg composition may be necessary to prevent premature release of the lens from the molds Premature release may occur when the lens formmg composition shrinks as it is cured. Shrinkage typically occurs when the lens formmg composition is rapidly heated dunng curmg Lens forming compositions which include an aromatic contammg polyether polyethylenic functional monomer, a co-initiator composition and a photomitiator may reduce the mcidence of premature release. The mcreased adhesion of this lens formmg composition may allow higher cunng temperatures to be used without increasing the incidence of premature release. It is also believed that this lens formmg composition may exhibit less shrinkage durmg cuπng which may further reduce the chance of premature release.

An advantage of curmg at higher temperatures is that an eyeglass lens havmg a high crosslink density may be formed The crosslink density of an eyeglass lens is typically related to the curing temperamre. Cunng a lens formmg composition at a relatively low temperamre leads to a lower crosslink density than the crosslink density of a lens cured at a higher temperature. Lenses which have a higher crosslink density generally absorb tmtmg dyes substantially evenly without blotching or streaking. Lenses which have a high crosslink density also may exhibit reduced flexibility. The formation of lenses mvolves: 1) Preparing the mold assembly; 2) Fillmg the mold assembly with the lens formmg composition; 3) Cunng the lens; 4) Post-curing the lens; and 5) Annealing the lens. Optionally, the lens may be coated before use. The formation of lenses may be accomplished usmg the plastic lens curmg apparatus described above.

The preparation of a mold assembly includes selectmg the appropπate front and back molds for a desued prescnption and lens type, cleanmg the molds, and assemblmg the molds to form the mold assembly. The prescnption of the lens determines which front mold, back mold, and gasket are used to prepare the mold assembly In one embodiment, a chart which includes all of the possible lens prescnptions may be used to allow a user to determine the appropnate molds and gaskets. Such a chart may mclude thousands of entries, makmg the determination of the appropnate molds and gaskets somewhat time consuming. In a prefened embodiment, the controller 50 of the plastic lens curmg apparatus 10 (see FIG. 1) will display the appropnate front mold, back mold, and gasket identification markmgs when a prescnption is submitted to the controller. The controller will prompt the user to enter the 1) the monomer type; 2) the lens type; 3) sphencal power; 4) cylindncal power; 5) axis; 6) add power, and 7) the lens location (l e., right or left lens) Once this information is entered the computer will determine the conect front mold, back mold and gasket to be used. The controller may also allow a user to save and recall prescnption data

FIG 40 shows an embodiment of a front panel for the controller 50. The controller mcludes an output device 610 and at least one input device A variety of input devices may be used Some mput devices include pressure sensitive devices (e.g., buttons), movable data entry devices (e g., rotatable knobs, a mouse, a trackball, or moving switches), voice data entry devices (e.g , a microphone), light pens, or a computer coupled to the controller Preferably the input devices include buttons 630, 640, 650 and 660 and a selection knob 620 The display panel preferably displays the controller data requests and responses The output device may be a cathode ray tube, an LCD panel, or a plasma display screen

When mitially powered, the controller will preferably display a mam menu, such as the menu depicted in FIG. 40 If the mam menu is not displayed, a user may access the mam menu by pressmg button 650, which may be labeled Mam Menu. In response to activating the Main Menu button 650, the controller will cause the mam menu screen to be displayed As depicted m FIG 40, a display screen offers a number of initial options on the openmg menu. The options may include 1) NEW Rx, 2) EDIT Rx; and 3) VIEW Rx. The mam menu may also offer other options which allow the operator to access machine status information and instrument setup menus. The scrolling buttons 630 preferably allow the user to navigate through the options by moving a cursor 612 which appears on the display screen to the appropπate selection Selection knob 620 is preferably configured to be rotatable to allow selection of options on the display screen. Knob 620 is also configured to allow entry of these items. In one embodiment, selection knob 620 may be depressed to allow data entry. That is, when the appropπate selection is made, the knob may be pushed down to enter the selected data. In the mam menu, when the cursor 612 is moved to the appropπate selection, the selection may be made by depressmg the selection knob 620.

Selection of the NEW Rx menu item will cause the display screen to change to a prescnption mput menu, depicted in FIG. 41. The prescnption mput menu will preferably allow the user to enter data pertaining to a new lens type. The default starting position will be the lens monomer selection box Once the area is highlighted, the selection knob 620 is rotated to make a choice among the predetermined selections. When the proper selection is displayed, the selection knob may be pushed down to enter the selection. Entry of the selection may also cause the cursor to move to the next item on the list. Alternatively, a user may select the next item to be entered usmg the scrolling anows 630.

Each of the menu items allows entry of a portion of the lens prescnption. The lens prescnption information mcludes 1) the monomer type; 2) the lens type; 3) lens location (i.e., left lens or right lens), 4) spherical power; 5) cylindrical power; 6) axis; and 7) add power. The monomer selection may mclude choices for either clear or photochromic lenses. The lens type item may allow selection between sphenc smgle vision, asphenc smgle vision lenses, flattop bifocal lenses, and asymmetrical progressive lenses. The sphere item allows the sphere power of the lens to be entered. The cylinder item allows the cylmder power to be entered. The axis item allows the cylmder axis to be entered. The add item allows the add power for multifocal prescnptions to be added. Smce the sphere power, cylmder power, cylmder axis, and add power may differ for each eye, and smce the molds and gaskets may be specific for the location of the lens (i.e., right lens or left lens), the controller preferably allows separate entπes for πght and left lenses. If an enor is made m any of the entry fields, the scrolling anows 630 preferably allow the user to move the cursor to the mconect entry for conection

After the data relatmg to the prescription has been added, the controller may prompt the user to enter a job number to save the prescnption type This preferably allows the user to recall a prescription type without having to renter the data. The job number may also be used by the controller to control the curmg conditions for the lens The curing conditions typically vary depending on the type and prescription of the lens By allowing the controller access to the prescription and type of lens being formed, the controller may automatically set up the cunng conditions without further mput from the user After the job is saved, the display screen will preferably display information which allows the user to select the appropriate front mold, back mold and gasket for preparing the lens, as depicted m FIG 42 This information is preferably generated by the use of a stored database which conelates the inputted data to the appropπate lenses and gasket The prescription information is also summarized to allow the user to check that the prescnption has been entered conectly The mold and gasket information may be printed out for the user A printer may be incorporated mto the controller to allow prmt out of this data Alternatively, a communication port may be incorporated into the controller to allow the data to be transfened to a printer or personal computer Each of the molds and gaskets has a predetermined identification markmg Preferably, the identification markmgs are alphanumeric sequences The identification markmgs for the molds and gasket preferably conespond to alphanumeric sequences for a library of mold members The user, having obtamed the mold and gasket identification markmgs, may then go to the library and select the appropriate molds and gaskets

The controller is preferably configured to run a computer software program which, upon mput of the eyeglass prescnption, will supply the identification markings of the appropπate front mold, back mold and gasket The computer program includes a plurality of instructions configured to allow the controller to collect the prescnption information, determine the appropπate front mold, back mold, and gasket required to a form a lens havmg the inputted prescription, and display the appropπate identification markmgs for the front mold, back mold and gasket In one embodiment, the computer program may mclude an information database The information database may mclude a multidimensional anay of records Each records may mclude data fields conespondmg to identification markmgs for the front mold, the back mold, and the gasket When the prescription data is entered, the computer program is configured to look up the record conespondmg to the entered prescnption The information from this record may be transmitted to the user, allowing the user to select the appropnate molds and gasket

In one embodiment the information database may be a three dimensional anay of records An example of a portion of a three dimensional anay of records is depicted m Table 9 The three dimensional anay mcludes anay vanables of sphere, cylmder, and add A record of the three dimensional anay includes a list of identification markings Preferably this list includes identification markings for a front mold (for either a left or right lens), a back mold and a gasket When a prescnption is entered the program includes instructions which take the cylmder, sphere and add information and look up the record which is associated with that information The program obtains from the record the desued information and transmits the information to the user For example, if a prescnption for left lens having a sphere power of +1 00, a cylmder power of -0 75 and an add power of 2 75 is entered, the front mold identification markmg will be FT-34, the back mold identification markmg will be TB-101, and the gasket identification markmg will be G25 These values will be transmitted to the user via an output device The output device may mclude a display screen or a prmter It should be understood that the examples shown m Table 9 represent a small portion of the entue database The sphere power may range from +4 00 to -4 00 in 0 25 diopter mcrements, the cylmder power may range from 0 00 diopters to -2 00 diopters m 0 25 diopter mcrements, and the add power may range from +1 00 to +3 00 in 0 25 diopter mcrements

Table 9

A second information database may mclude information related to curmg the lens forming composition based on the prescription variables. Each record may include information related to cunng clear lenses (i.e., non- photochromic lenses) and photochrormc lenses The cunng information may mclude filter mformation, mitial curmg dose mformation, postcure time and conditions, and anneal time. An example of a portion of this database is depicted in Table 10. Curmg conditions typically depend on the sphere power of a lens, the type of lens bemg formed (photochromic or non-photochromic), and whether the lens will be tmted or not Cunng information mcludes type of filter being used, initial dose conditions, postcure time, and anneal time. A filter with a 50 mm aperture (denoted as "50 mm") or a clear plate filter (denoted as "clear") may be used. Initial dose is typically m seconds, with the inadiation pattern (e.g., top and bottom, bottom only) being also designated. The postcure time represents the amount of time the mold assembly is treated with activating light and heat m the postcure unit. The anneal time represents the amount of time the demolded lens is treated with heat after the lens is removed from the mold assembly While this second database is depicted as a separate database, the database may be incorporated into the mold and gasket database by addmg the lens curmg mformation to each of the appropπate records

The controller may also be used to control the operation of the various components of the plastic lens curing apparatus. A series of mput devices 640 may allow the operation of the various components of the system. The mput devices may be configured to cause the commencement of the lens coatmg process (640a), the cure process (640b), the postcure process (640c), and the anneal process (640d)

In an embodiment, activating any of the mput devices 640 may cause a screen to appear requesting a job number conespondmg to the type of lenses being formed. The last job used may appear as a default entry. The user may change the displayed job number by cycling through the saved jobs. When the proper job is displayed the user may enter the job by depressmg the selection knob

Table 10

After the job has been entered, the system will be ready to commence the selected function. Activatmg the same mput device again (e.g., depressing the button) will cause the system to commence the selected function. For example, pressmg the cure button a second time may cause a preprogrammed cure cycle to begm. After the selected function is complete the display screen may display a prompt informing the user that the action is finished The mam menu may also include selections allowing a saved job to be edited. Returning to the mam menu screen, depicted m FIG 40, selecting the edit menu item will cause an interactive screen to be displayed similar to the mput screen. This will allow a user to change the prescription of a preexisting job. The view menu item will allow a user to view the prescription information and mold/gasket selection information from an existmg job

Once the desired mold and gasket information has been obtained, the proper molds and gasket are selected trom a collection of molds and gaskets. The molds may be placed mto the gasket to create a mold assembly. Pπor to placmg the molds m the gasket, the molds are preferably cleaned In one embodiment, the molds may be sprayed with a mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water and wiped dry Alternatively, they may be spm-cleaned by mounting them on the spm coatmg unit (e g , the spm coating units depicted in FIG. 2). The mold may be spun while directing streams of solvents such as isopropyl alcohol, acetone, water, or mixtures thereof onto the mold. After application of the cleaning solvent the molds may be dried by continued spinning m the absence of a cleaning solvent. The molds may also be dried with a lmt free cleanmg cloth. The clean molds are placed on the gasket to form a mold assembly. The front mold is preferably placed on the gasket first. For smgle vision prescriptions, the front mold does not have to be placed in any particular alignment. For flat-top bifocal or progressive front molds, the molds are preferably aligned with alignment marks positioned on the gasket. Once the front mold has been placed mto the gasket, the back mold is placed onto the gasket. If the prescnption calls for cylinder power, the back mold must be aligned with respect to the front mold. If the prescription is spherical (e.g., the lens has no cylmder power), the back mold may be placed mto the gasket without any special alignment. Once assembled the mold assembly will be ready for fillmg.

The lens formmg composition is typically stored at temperatures below about 100 °F At these temperatures, however, the lens forming composition may be relatively viscous. The viscosity of the solution may make it difficult to fill a mold cavity without creating bubbles withm the lens forming composition The presence of bubbles m the lens forming composition may cause defects m the cured eyeglass lens. To reduce the viscosity of the solution, and therefore reduce the incidence of air bubbles durmg filling of the mold cavity, the lens forrmng composition may be heated prior to filling the mold cavity. In an embodiment, the lens forming composition may be heated to a temperamre of about 70 °F to about 220 °F, preferably from about 130 °F to about 170 °F pnor to filing the mold cavity.. Preferably, the lens forming composition is heated to a temperature of about 150 °F pπor to fillmg the mold cavity.

The lens formmg composition may be heated by usmg an electric heater, an mfrared heatmg system, a hot au system, a hot water system, or a microwave heating system. Preferably, the lens forming composition is heated in a fill system, such as depicted in FIG. 43 The fill system mcludes a body 1500 configured to hold the lens forrmng composition, a heatmg system 1510 coupled to the body, and a conduit 1520 for transferring the heated lens formmg composition from the body to a mold assembly

The body 1500 is preferably formed from stainless steel. The body preferably includes a bottom 1502 and sidewalls 1504 extending upward from the bottom. The top of the body 1500 is preferably open to allow the lens forrmng composition to be introduced mto the body. The body may mclude a hd (depicted m FIG. 50) to cover the top of the body after the lens forming composition has been added. A heatmg system 1510 is preferably coupled to the body. The heatmg system 1510 is preferably configured to heat the lens forrmng composition to a temperature of between about 80 °F to about 220 °F Preferably a resistive heater is used to heat the lens forrmng composition. Other heating systems such as hot au system, hot water systems, and infrared heating systems may also be used

The heatmg system is preferably disposed withm the body, as depicted m FIG. 43. In an embodiment, the body may be divided mto a mam chamber 1506 and a heating system chamber 1508. The lens formmg composition is preferably disposed within the mam chamber 1506, while the heatmg system 1510 is preferably disposed withm the heatmg system chamber 1508 The heatmg system chamber 1508 preferably isolates the heating system 1510 from the mam chamber 1506 such that the lens forming composition is inhibited from contacting the heatmg system Typically, the heatmg system 1510 may attain temperatures significantly higher than desired If the heatmg system 1510 were to come mto contact with the lens formmg composition, the higher temperature of the heatmg system may cause the contacted lens forrmng composition to become partially polymerized By isolating the heatmg system 1510 from the lens formmg composition such partial polymenzation may be avoided To further prevent partial polymerization, the heatmg system is preferably insulated from the bottom surface of the mam chamber An insulating material may be placed between the heatmg system and the bottom of the main chamber Alternatively, an air gap may be formed between the heatmg system and the bottom of the main chamber to prevent overheating of the bottom of the main chamber

A thermostat 1530 may be placed withm the chamber, preferably m contact with the lens formmg composition The thermostat 1530 preferably monitors the temperamre of the lens forming composition A conttoller 1540 may be coupled to the thermostat 1530 and the heatmg system 1510 The controller 1540 preferably monitors the temperamre of the lens formmg composition and controls the heatmg system 1510 to keep the lens formmg composition at a predetermmed temperature For example, as the lens forrmng composition becomes cooler the conttoller may activate the heatmg system 1510 to heat the lens formmg composition back to the desued temperamre The controller 1540 may be a computer, programmable logic conttoller, or any of other known conttoller systems known in the art These systems may include a proportional-mtegral ("PI") conttoller or a proportional-integral-deπvative ("PID") conttoller

A conduit 1520 is preferably coupled to the body 1500 for ttansfeπing the lens formmg composition out of the body The conduit 1520 preferably includes an mlet 1522 and an outlet 1524 The lens forrmng composition preferably enters the conduit 1520 from the body via the inlet 1522, passes through the conduit, and exits the conduit via the outlet 1524 The conduit 1520 may be substantially flexible A flexible conduit may allow the outlet of the conduit to be aligned with a fill port of a mold assembly

The inner width 1526 of the conduit is herem defined as the width of the internal space defined by the conduit sidewalls In an embodiment, the inner width 1526 is variable over the length of the conduit Preferably, the inner width 1526 is substantially wider near the body 1510 and nanows near the outlet 1524 The nanowmg of the inner width 1526 allows the lens forming solution disposed withm the conduit 1520 to remam warm before dispensing The portion of the conduit proximate the body 1510 is preferably wider than the portion of the conduit proximate the outlet 1524 This wider portion of the conduit allows better heat exchange with the lens formmg composition m the body The nanower portion of the conduit allows better control of the flow rate of the lens forrmng composition as it passes through the conduit An elongated member 1550 is preferably positioned near the outlet of the conduit The elongated member

1550 is preferably movable withm the conduit The elongated member 1550 preferably inhibits the flow of lens forming composition through the conduit when the elongated member is in a closed position The elongated member may be moved into an open position such that the lens forming composition may flow through the conduit The elongated member 1550 is preferably composed of stainless steel covered with a chemically inert plastic (e g , a polyacetal plastic such as DELRIN) The use of a plastic coatmg allows a more leak resistant fit between the elongated member and the conduit

As depicted m FIG 44 the elongated member 1550 is m a closed position The elongated member 1550 is preferably oriented perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the conduit, as depicted m FIG 44 The elongated member 1550 preferably resides in a channel 1552 extending through the conduit In a closed position, the elongated member 1550 may extend to the outer surface of the conduit near the outlet 1524 Preferably, the elongated member 1550 extends past the outer surface of the conduit 1520 proximate the outlet 1524, when m the closed position Configuring the elongated member 1550 such that it extends past the outer surface of the conduit may inhibit any residual lens forming composition from building up near the outlet. As the elongated member 1550 is extended toward the outlet any lens formmg composition present m the channel 1552 is preferably forced out. leaving the channel substantially clear of lens forrmng composition. The outlet may be subsequently cleaned by removmg the excess lens forming composition from the outer surface of the conduit and the elongated member.

When m the open position, as depicted m FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the elongated member 1550 is positioned away from the outlet. The end of the elongated member has been moved past a portion of the inner surface 1554 of the conduit such that the lens forming solution may flow through the conduit into the channel 1552. The elongated member may be positioned to control the flow of the lens formmg composition through the conduit. For example, as depicted m FIG. 45, the elongated member, although in an open position, still partially blocks the conduit, thus partially inhibiting flow of the lens formmg composition through the conduit. As the elongated member is moved further away from the outlet, the flow may of the lens forrmng composition may mcrease. The flow rate of the lens forming composition may reach a maximum when the elongated member no longer blocks the conduit, as depicted in FIG. 46

The interaction of the elongated member 1550 with the movable member 1560 allows the elongated member to be positioned m either a closed or open position. The movable member 1560 preferably includes a groove 1562 formed withm the movable member. The groove 1562 preferably extends from a bottom surface of the movable member 1560 toward an upper surface of the movable member. The groove 1562 preferable partially extends through the movable member 1560, stoppmg before the upper surface of the movable member is reached The distance from the bottom surface of the movable member 1560 to the top of the groove is herein refened to as the height of the groove. The height of the groove 1562 is preferably varied along the length of the groove Preferably the height of the groove has a minimum value and a maximum value. The inner surface of the groove is preferably tapered such that the height of the groove gradually increases from a minimum value to a maximum value. The tapered inner surface may be a linear taper or non-linear taper (i.e., curved).

A movable member 1560 is preferably coupled to the elongated member 1550 to control the positionmg of the elongated member withm the conduit. The elongated member 1550 preferably extends mto the groove 1562 of the movable member 1560, as depicted m FIGS 44-46. An elastic member 1564 may be coupled to the elongated member 1550 to exert a force agamst the elongated member. The force from the elastic member 1564 preferably forces the elongated member 1550 mto the groove 1562. The elastic member 1564 is preferable positioned withm the channel 1552 formed m the conduit. The elastic member is preferably a sprmg. The elongated member 1550 preferably includes an annular member 1554 positioned proximate a first end of the elongated member, the first end of the elongated member being positioned distal to the outlet 1524. The annular member 1554 is preferably coupled to the elastic member 1564. The elastic member 1564 preferably exerts a force agamst the annular member 1554 The force agamst the armular member 1554 preferably causes the armular member, and thus the elongated member 1550, to move out of the channel 1552 away from the conduit outlet 1524 and mto the groove 1562 of the movable member. The movable member 1560 prevents the elongated member 1550 from being forced from the conduit In one embodiment, the movable member 1560 is a substantially circular knob, as depicted in FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG 47 represents a cut-away perspective view of the knob 1560 The knob 1560 is configured to rotate such that rotation of the knob causes the elongated member 1550 to move from a closed position to an open position, or from an open position to a closed position The knob 1560 mcludes a circular groove 1562 formed within the knob. The groove 1562 is preferably tapered such that the height of the groove vanes along the groove. The groove 1562 may only extend through a portion of the knob 1560. For example, the groove 1562 may be a semi-circular groove, endmg at the midpoint of the movable member 1560 The ends of the groove 1562 may be used to prevent overturning of the knob.

The center of the knob 1560 may include an indentation 1568 configured to hold a mounting pm which couples the knob to the conduit Refenmg back to FIG. 44, the movable member is preferably coupled to the conduit via a pin 1570. The pm includes a lower portion 1572 and an upper portion 1554. The lower portion 1552 may be threaded to couple the pin to the conduit. The upper portion 1554 is substantially non-threaded. The upper section 1554 preferably serves as a center point around which the knob 1560 is rotatable. In one embodiment, the pm 1554 may be a spnng washer. A spring washer allows the knob to be easily rotated, while supplymg a small amount of tension to the knob

Referring back to FIGS 44 -46, the movement of the elongated member 1550 from a closed position to an open position is sequentially depicted. FIG. 44 depicts the system in a closed position. The elongated member 1550 is positioned such that it entuely blocks the conduit To move the elongated member 1550 to an open position, the knob 1560 may be turned. The elongated member 1550, will preferably stay withm the groove 1562 as the knob is turned. As the height of the groove 1562 increases the elongated member 1550 will move further away from the outlet 1524. The elastic member 1564 will continue to force the elongated member 1550 agamst the groove 1562 as the knob 1560 is turned. When the elongated member 1550 reaches an intermediate position, as depicted in FIG. 45, the lens forming composition begms to flow through the conduit 1520 and out of the outlet 1524. If the knob 1560 is turned further, the elongated member 1550 will move further away from the outlet 1524. As depicted in FIG. 46, the elongated member 1550 may be moved completely out of the flow path for the lens formmg composition.

In order to achieve proper control of the flow rate throughout the outlet, the height of the groove may be vaned. As depicted m FIG 49, the groove may be tapered at more than one angle. FIG. 49 depicts a straightened out cross sectional view of a groove. It should be understood that while depicted in a linear manner, the groove is actually serm-cucular in shape. At a first position 1580 the elongated member 1550 is forced mto a closed position smce the height of the groove is at a minimum. Tummg the knob will bnng the knob to an intermediate position 1584. At this intermediate position 1584, the lens forming composition may begm to flow through the conduit. Further tummg of the knob will bring the knob to a second position 1588 m which the elongated member is in a fully open position. The groove may be divided mto two portions The first portion extends from the first position 1580 to the intermediate position 1584. The second portion extends from the intermediate position 1584 to the second position 1588 It is prefened that the first portion of the groove have a substantially greater slope than the second portion of the groove The steeply tapered first portion allows the elongated member to be rapidly moved to an open position. After the intermediate position 1584 has been reached, the groove is tapered to a lesser extent. Thus, the position of the elongated member withm he conduit may be finely adjusted to achieve the desued flow rate.

The body of the fill system may be incorporated onto a platform 1590 The platform may mclude a holder 1592 for the mold assembly, as depicted in FIG. 50. The body 1510 of the fill system may be positioned on the platform 1590. A vertical support 1594 may also be attached to the platform. The body of the fill system may be removable from the platform to allow filling and cleanmg of the body. The platform 1590 may also mclude a hd 1596 for covenng the top of the body A mold assembly 1592 holder is preferably formed on the platform The mold assembly holder 1592 is configured to hold the mold assembly at a prefened location with respect to the conduit. The mold assembly holder may secure the mold assembly during fillmg. In one embodiment, the platform may be configured to be mounted on a table or work bench. Preferably the platform is configured to fit on a portion of a plastic lens curing apparatus (e.g., the apparatus of FIG 1) Preferably, the fill system is mounted onto a portion of the post cure unit 50 of the plastic lens curmg apparatus 10

To fill the mold assembly, the mold assembly is placed on the mold assembly holders and secured m place. The monomer solution is preferably introduced into the body of the fill station and heated to a temperature of about 150 °F. It is prefened that the monomer solution is stored in the reservoir for a period of tune that will allow air bubbles formed durmg the filling of the body to dissipate Typically, the monomer is allowed to settle for about 1 hour to about 16 hours before use.

The mold assembly holder may include a clampmg system to secure the mold assembly After the mold assembly is m place, the conduit of the mold fill station is aligned with a fill port of the mold assembly. The lens forrmng composition is now flowed through the conduit and into the mold assembly. The movable member 1560, may be adjusted to control the flow rate of the monomer.

After the mold assembly is filled, any monomer which may have spilled on the surface of the molds is removed using a lint free wipe. Excess monomer that may be around the edge of the fillmg port may be removed by usmg a micro vacuum unit. The mold assembly may be mspected to insure that the mold cavity is filled with monomer. The mold assembly is also inspected to insure that no au bubbles are present in the mold cavity Any air bubbles in the mold cavity may be removed by rotatmg the mold assembly such that the an bubbles rise to the top of the assembly

After the mold assembly has been filled with the monomer and mspected, the mold assembly is transfened to a lens curing unit. A lens curing unit such as lens curing unit 30 (see FIG. 1) described above may be used The curmg conditions for the lens forrmng composition may depend on the type of lens being formed and the type of lens forming composition being used. The use of a lens forming composition which includes an aromatic contammg polyether polyethylenic functional monomer, a co-initiator composition and a photomitiator (e.g., the OMB-99 and Phases II compositions) may allow a vaπety of lenses to be formed usmg sumlar lens cuπng conditions Table 1 1 summarizes the lens curmg conditions required to cure most types of lenses In one embodiment, the curmg of the lens forming composition may be accomplished by a procedure involving the application of heat and activatmg light to the lens formmg composition. Initially, activatmg light is directed toward at least one of the mold members The activatmg light is directed for a sufficient time to initiate curing of the lens forrmng composition Preferably, the activating light is directed toward at least one of the mold members for a time of less than about 2 minutes. In some embodiments, the activatmg light is directed toward at least one of the mold members for a time of less than about 25 seconds In other embodiments, the activatmg light is duected toward at least one of the mold members for a time of less than about 10 seconds The activating light is preferably stopped before the lens formmg composition is completely cured

After the curing is initiated, the mold assembly may be transfened to a post cure unit. In the post cure unit the mold assembly is preferably treated with additional activating light and heat to further cure the lens forrmng composition The activating light may be applied from the top, bottom, or from both the top and bottom of the curing chamber during the post cure process The lens forming composition may exhibit a yellow color after the curmg is initiated. It is believed that the yellow color is produced by the photoinitiator As the lens formmg composition cures, the yellow color may gradually disappear as the photomitiator is used up Preferably, the mold assembly is tteated in the post cure unit for a time sufficient to substantially remove the yellow color from the formed eyeglass lens. The mold assembly may be treated in the post cure unit for a tune of up to about 15 mmutes, preferably for a time of between about 10 mmutes to 15 mmutes. After the lens is tteated m the post cure unit, the formed eyeglass lens may be demolded and placed back into the post cure unit

Table 11

In some mstances, it may be desuable to subject the lens to an anneal process When a lens, cured by the activatmg light, is removed from a mold assembly, the lens may be under a stressed condition It is believed that the power of the lens can be more rapidly brought to a final restmg power by subjectmg the lens to an anneal tteatment to relieve the internal sttesses developed dunng the cure Prior to annealmg, the lens may have a power that differs from the desired final restmg power The anneal tteatment is believed to reduce stress m the lens, thus altering the power of the lens to the desued final restmg power Preferably, the anneal treatment involves heatmg the lens at a temperature between about 200 °F to 225 °F for a period of up to about 10 mmutes The heatmg may be performed in the presence or absence of activatmg light The use of a lens forming composition which includes an aromatic contammg polyether polyethylenic functional monomer, a co-mitiator composition and a photomitiator (e g , the OMB-99 and Phases II compositions) allows much simpler curmg conditions than other lens forrmng compositions While pulsed activated light curing sequences may be used to cure the lenses, contmuous activatmg light sequences may also be used, as described in Table 1 1. The use of continuous activatmg light sequences allows the lens curmg equipment to be simplified. For example, if continuous activating light is used, rather than pulsed light, equipment for generatmg light pulses is no longer requued. Thus, the cost of the lens cunng apparatus may be reduced. Also the use of such a lens formmg composition allows more general curmg processes to be used. As shown in Table 11 , seven different processes may be used to cure a wide variety of lenses This greatly simplifies the programming and operation of the lens cunng unit

Furthermore, the use a lens forrmng composition which includes an aromatic containing polyether polyethylenic functional monomer, a co-initiator composition and a photomitiator (e.g., the OMB-99 and Phases II compositions) may alleviate the need for coolmg of the lens forming composition durmg curmg. This may further simplify the procedure smce coolmg fans, or other coolmg systems, may no longer be requued Thus, the lens cunng apparatus may be further simplified by removing the mold apparatus coolmg systems.

Table 1 1 shows the preferable cunng conditions for a vanety of lenses The sphere column refers to the sphere power of the lens. The monomer type is either clear (i.e , non-photochromic) or photochromic. Note that the lens type (e.g., spheric single vision, asphenc single vision lens, flat-top bifocal lens or progressive multifocal lens) does not significantly alter the lens curmg conditions. Tmted refers to whether the formed eyeglass lens will be soaked m a dye bath or not.

Based on the prescnption information the lens cunng conditions may be determined. There are four cunng variables to be set. The type of light filter refers to the filter placed between the lamps and the mold assembly m the curmg unit and the post cure unit. The mitial does refers to the tune that activating light is applied to the lens formmg composition m the cunng unit. The inadiation pattern (e.g., inadiation of the front mold only, the back mold only, or both molds) is also dependent on the lens being formed After the initial dose is applied the mold assembly is transfened to the post cure unit where it is tteated with activatmg light and heat. The chart lists the prefened time spent m the post cure chamber. After treatment m the post cure chamber the formed eyeglass lens is removed from the mold assembly. The lens may undergo an annealing process, for the time listed, m which the lens is heated either in the presence or absence of activatmg light. It should be noted that all of the lens curmg processes recited are preferably performed without any coolmg of the mold apparatus.

To further illustrate this procedure, the method will be descπbed in detail for the production of a clear, non-tmted lens havmg sphere power of +3.00 A mold assembly is filled with a non-photochromic monomer solution (e.g , the OMB-99 composition) The mold assembly is placed in a lens curmg unit to apply the mitial dose to the lens formmg composition. The cuπng of the lens forming composition is preferably controlled by controller 50. As shown m FIG. 40, the controller 50 includes a number of input devices which allow an operator to mitiate use of the various components of the plastic lens curmg apparatus 10. In an embodiment, buttons 640 may be used to control operation of the coating process (640a), the curing process (640b), the postcure process (640c), and the anneal process (640d). After the mold assembly is placed m the lens curing umt, the cunng process button 640b may be pressed to set the curmg conditions In one embodiment, an operator has preloaded the prescription information and saved the mformation as descπbed above Pressing the cure button may cause the conttoller to prompt the user to enter a reference code conespondmg to the saved prescription information. The conttoller is preferably configured to analyze the prescription information and set up the appropπate initial dose conditions

After determmmg the appropriate lens formmg conditions, the controller may inform the user of the type of filters to be used The conttoller may pause to allow the proper filters to be installed withm the lens curing unit. Typically, two types of filters may be used for the initial cure process The filters are preferably configured to distribute the light so that the activatmg light which is impaπed to the lens molds is properly distributed with respect to the prescription of the lens. A clear plate filter refers to a plate that is substantially transparent to activating light The clear plate may be composed of polycarbonate or glass. A 50 mm filter refers to filter which includes a 50 mm aperture positioned in a central portion of the filter. The 50 mm aperture is preferably aligned with the mold assembly when the filter is placed m the curing unit Preferably, two filters are used, the first bemg placed between the top lamps and the mold assembly, the second being placed between the bottom lamps and the mold assembly

After the filters have been placed, the user may mdicate to the conttoller that the filters are in place Alternatively, the conttoller may include a sensor disposed withm the lens curing unit which informs the conttoller when a filter is placed withm the curing unit After the filters are placed m the curing unit, the controller may prompt the user to ensure that the mold assembly is m the curmg unit pπor to commencing the cunng process. When the filters and mold are m place, the initial dose may be started by the conttoller. For a clear, non-tmted lens havmg sphere power of +3.00 the initial dose will be 90 seconds of activatmg light applied to both the front and back molds. A 50 mm filter is preferably positioned between the top and bottom lamps After the mitial cure process is completed, the mold assembly is transfened to the post cure unit. The completion of the mitial cure process may cause the conttoller to alert the operator that the process is completed. An alarm may go off to mdicate that the process is completed. To initiate the post cure process, the post cure button 640c may be pressed. Pressmg the post cure button may cause the controller to prompt the user to enter a reference code conespondmg to the saved prescription information. The conttoller is preferably configured to analyze the prescnption information and set up the appropriate post cure conditions For a clear, non-tinted lens havmg sphere power of +3 00 the post cure conditions will include duecting activating light toward the mold assembly in a heated post cure unit for 13 mmutes. The post cure unit is preferably heated to a temperature of about 200 °F to about 225 °F durmg the post cure process.

After the post cure process is completed, the mold assembly is disassembled and the formed lens is removed from the mold members The completion of the post cure process may cause the conttoller to alert the operator that the process is completed An alarm may go off to mdicate that the process is completed. After the molds are removed from the post cure unit, the gasket is removed and the molds placed in a demolding solution A demoldmg solution is commercially available as "Q-Soak Solution" commercially available from Optical Dynamics Corporation The demoldmg solution causes the lens to separate from the molds The demoldmg solution also aids m the subsequent cleanmg of the molds After the lens has been demolded, the lens is preferably cleaned of dust particles using a solution of isopropyl alcohol and water

In some instances it is desirable that the formed lens undergoes an anneal process To initiate the anneal process the anneal button 640d may be pressed Pressing the anneal button will set the conditions for the anneal process For a clear, non-tinted lens having sphere power of +3 00 the anneal conditions will include heatmg the lens in the post cure unit, m the absence of activatmg light, for about 7 mmutes The post cure unit is preferably heated to a temperamre of about 200 °F to about 225 °F during the anneal process

In one embodiment, the drawer of the post cure unit includes a front row of mold assembly holders and a back row of lens holders For the post cure process, the mold assemblies are preferably placed in the front row The front row is preferably oriented under the post cure lamps when the post cure drawer is closed. For the anneal process the lenses are preferably placed in the back row of the post-cure drawer. The back row may be misaligned with the lamps such that little or no activating light reaches the back row.

After the anneal process, the lens may be coated in the coatmg unit with a scratch resistant hard coat. The lens may also be tinted by placing in a tinting bath. It is believed that tinting of the lens is influenced by the crosslink density of the lens Typically, a lens havmg a relatively high crosslink density exhibits more homogenous absorption of the dye. Problems such as blotching and streaking of the dye are typically minimized by highly crosslinked lenses. The crosslink density of a lens is typically controlled by the temperature of curmg of the lens. A lens which is cured at relatively high temperatures typically exhibits a crosslink density that is substantially greater than a low temperamre cured lens. The cuπng time may also influence the hardness of a lens. Treatmg a lens for a long period of tune m a post cure unit will typically produce a lens having a greater crosslink density than lenses tteated for a shorter amount of tune. Thus, to produce lenses which will be subsequently treated m a tmtmg bath, the lens forrmng composition is tteated with heat and activating light m the post cure unit for a longer penod of time than for the production of non-tmted lenses. As shown m table 11, non-tmted clear lenses are treated m the postcure unit for about 13 minutes For clear lenses which will be subsequently tmted, the post cure tune is extended to about 15 mmutes, to produce a lens havmg a relatively high crosslink density.

The formation of flat-top bifocal lenses may also be accomplished using the above descnbed procedure. One problem typical of cunng flat-top bifocal eyeglass lenses with activatmg light is premature release. Flat-top bifocals mclude a far vision conection zone and a near vision conection region. The far vision conection zone is the portion of the lens which allows the user to see far away objects more clearly. The near vision conection zone is the region that allows the user to see nearby objects clearer. The near vision conection zone is characterized by a semicucular protrusion which extends out from the outer surface of an eyeglass lens. As seen in FIG 53, the portion of the mold cavity which defines the near vision conection zone 1610 is substantially thicker than the portion of the mold cavity defining the far vision conection zone 1620. Duecting activatmg light toward the mold members causes the polymerization of the lens formmg composition to occur. It is believed that the polymerization of the lens formmg composition begins at the castmg face of the inadiated mold and progresses through the mold cavity toward the opposite mold. For example, inadiation of the front mold 1630 causes the polymerization to begin at the castmg surface of the front mold 1632 and progress toward the back mold 1640. As the polymerization reaction progresses, the lens forming composition is transformed from a liquid state to a gel state. Thus, shortly after the front mold 1632 is inadiated with activating hght, the portion of the lens forrmng composition proximate the castmg face of the front mold member 1632 will become gelled while the portion of the lens forrmng composition proximate the back mold member 1640 will remain substantially liquid. If the polymerization is initiated from the back mold 1640. the lens forming composition throughout the far vision conection zone 1620 may become substantially gelled prior to gelation of the lens formmg composition m the near vision conection zone proximate the castmg surface of the front mold member 1610 (herem refened to as the "front portion of the near vision conection zone") It is believed that when the gelation of the lens formmg composition in the front portion of the near vision conection zone 1610 occurs after the far vision conection zone 1620 has substantially gelled, the resulting strain may cause premature release of the lens

To reduce the mcidence of premature release m flat-top bifocal lenses, it is prefened that polymerization of the lens forming composition in the front portion of the near vision conection zone 1610 is initiated before the portion of the lens forming composition m the far vision conection zone proximate the back mold member 1640 is substantially gelled. Preferably, this may be achieved by inadiatmg the front mold 1630 with activatmg light prior to inadiatmg the back mold 1640 with activatmg light This causes the polymenzation reaction to begin proximate the front mold 1630 and progress toward the back mold 1640. It is believed that inadiation in this manner causes the lens forming composition in the front portion of the near vision conection zone 1610 to become gelled before the lens forming composition proximate the back mold 1640 becomes gelled. After the polymerization is initiated, activating light may be directed at either mold or both molds to complete the polymerization of the lens forming composition. The subsequent post cure and anneal steps for the production of flat-top bifocal lenses are substantially the same as descnbed above Alternatively, the incidence of premature release may also be reduced if the front portion of the near vision conection zone 1610 is gelled before gelation of the lens forrmng composition extends from the back mold member 1640 to the front mold member 1630. In this embodiment, the polymerization of the lens formmg composition may be mitiated by inadiation of the back mold 1640. This will cause the gelation to begm proximate the back mold 1640 and progress toward the front mold 1630. To reduce the mcidence of premature release, the front mold 1630 is inadiated with activating light before the gelation of the lens formmg composition m the far vision conection zone 1620 reaches the front mold. After the polymerization is initiated m the front portion of the near vision conection zone 1610, activating light may be duected at either mold or both molds to complete the polymerization of the lens formmg composition. The subsequent post cure and anneal steps for the production of flat-top bifocal lenses are substantially the same as descnbed above In another embodiment, a single curmg unit may be used to perform the initial cunng process, the post cure process, and the anneal process. A lens curmg unit is depicted in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52 The curmg unit 1230 may mclude an upper light source 1214, a lens drawer assembly 1216, and a lower light source 1218. Lens drawer assembly 1216 preferably mcludes a mold assembly holder 1220 (see FIG. 52), more preferably at least two mold assembly holders 1220. Each of the mold assembly holders 1220 is preferably configured to hold a pair of mold members that together with a gasket form a mold assembly. Preferably, the lens drawer assembly may also mclude a lens holder 1221 (see FIG. 52), more preferably at least two lens holders 1221. The lens holders 1221 are preferably configured to hold a formed eyeglass lens. The lens drawer assembly 1216 is preferably slidmgly mounted on a guide 1217 Durmg use, mold assemblies and or lenses may be placed m the mold assembly holders 1220 or lens holders 1221, respectively, while the lens drawer assembly is m the open position (i.e., when the door extends from the front of the lens cunng unit). After the holders have been loaded, the door may be slid into a closed position, with the mold assemblies directly under the upper light source 1214 and above the lower light source 1218 The lens holders and lenses disposed upon the lens holders may not be oriented directly under the upper and lower light sources. As depicted m FIG. 52, the light sources 1214 and 1218 preferably extend across a front portion of the curmg unit, while no lamps are placed in the rear portion of the curmg unit When the lens drawer assembly is slid back into the curing unit, the mold assembly holders 1220 are oriented under the lamps, while the lens holders 1221 are onented m the back portion where no lamps are present. By orienting the holders in this manner curing process which involve light and heat (e g , post cure processes) and annealing processes, which may mvolve either application of heat and light or the application of heat only, may be performed in the

The light sources 1214 and 1218, preferably generate activatmg light. Light sources 1214 and 1218 may be supported by and electrically cormected to suitable fixtures 1242. Lamps 1214 may generate either ultraviolet light, actmic light, visible hght, and/or mfrared light. The choice of lamps is preferably based on the monomers and photomitiator system used in the lens forming composition In one embodiment, the activating light may be generated from a fluorescent lamp. The fluorescent lamp preferably has a sttong emission spectra in the 380 to 490 nm region A fluorescent lamp emitting activating light with the described wavelengths is commercially available from Philips as model TLD-15W/03. In another embodiment, the lamps may be ultraviolet lights.

In one embodiment, an upper light filter 1254 may be positioned between upper light source 1214 and lens drawer assembly 1216, as depicted m Fig 51 A lower light filter 1256 may be positioned between lower light source 1218 and lens drawer assembly 1216 Examples of suitable light filters have been previously descπbed. The light filters are used to create a proper distribution of light with regard to the prescription of the eyeglass lens. The light filters may also insulate the lamps from the curmg chamber. During post cure and annealing process it is prefened that the chamber is heated to temperatures between about 200 and 225 °F Such temperatures may have a detrimental effects on the lamps such as shortening the lifetime of the lamps and alteπng the intensity of the light bemg produced. The light filters 1254 and 1256, when mounted mto the guide 1217, will form an umer chamber which partially msulates the lamps from the heated portion of the chamber. In this manner, the temperatures of the lamps may be maintained withm the usual operating temperatures.

Alternatively, a heat banier 1260 may be disposed withm the curing chamber. The heat banier preferably msulates the lamps from the cunng chamber, while allowing the activated light generated by the lamps to pass mto the chamber In one embodiment, the heat banier may mclude a borosilicate plate of glass (e.g., PYREX glass) disposed between the hght sources and the mold assembly Preferably, a pair of borosilicate glass plates 1264 and 1262 with an intervening air gap between the plates 1263 serves as the heat bamer. The use of borosilicate glass allows the activatmg radiation to pass from the hght sources to the lamps without any significant reduction mtensity Along with the heat barner 1260 and filter 1254, an opaque plate 1270, may be placed between the light sources and the mold assembly. The opaque plate is substantially opaque toward the activatmg light. Apertures are preferably disposed in the opaque plate to allow light to pass through the plate onto the mold assemblies.

In order to allow post cure and annealing procedures to be performed, a heating system 1250 is preferably disposed withm the cunng unit, as depicted in FIG. 52. The heatmg system 1250 may be a resistive heatmg system, a hot air system, or an mfrared heatmg system The heatmg system 1250 may be oriented along the back side of the cunng chamber. The heatmg system 1250 is preferably disposed at a position between the two filters, such that the heatmg system is partially insulated from the lamps 1214 and 1218 Preferably, the heating system is configured to heat the curmg chamber to a temperamre of about 200 °F to about 225 °F The incorporation of a heating system into a system which allows inadiation of a mold assembly from both sides will allow many of the above described operations to be performed in a single curmg unit The use of lamps m the front portion of the curing unit, while leaving the back portion of the curmg chamber substantially free of lamps, allows both activating light curing steps and annealmg steps to performed in the same unit at the same time. Thus the curing conditions descnbed m Table 11 may be performed m a smgle unit, rather than the two units as described above.

In another embodiment, the method of producing the lenses may be modified such that all of the mitial curing process is performed while heat is applied to the lens forrmng composition. Table 12 shows alternate cunng conditions which may be used to cure the lens forming compositions

Table 12

After the mold assembly is filled with the appropnate monomer solution the mold assemblies are placed in the mold assembly holders of the drawer of the cunng unit. The drawer is slid back mto the curmg unit. The curmg unit may be preheated to a temperature of about 225 °F pnor to placing the mold assemblies m the curmg unit. The curing conditions include applying activatmg light to one or both of the mold members while substantially simultaneously applying heat to the mold assemblies As shown in Table 12, the light curing conditions are similar to the previously described conditions However, the initial dose and the post-cure processes have been combined into a single process. Thus, for the formation of a photochromic lens having a sphere power of +1.50, the mold assemblies are placed in the lens curing unit and inadiated with activating light from the bottom of the unit for about 15 seconds. The curing unit is preferably at a temperamre of about 225 °F while the activating light is applied. After 15 seconds, the bottom light is turned off and the mold assemblies are tteated with activating light from the top lamps for about 13 mmutes This subsequent treatment with activatmg hght is also performed at a curing chamber temperamre of about 225 °F After the 13 minutes have elapsed, the lights may be turned off, the lens removed from the molds and an anneal process begun

The anneal process may be performed m the same unit that the cure process is performed The demolded lens is preferably placed in the lens holders of the curmg unit drawer. The curmg unit is preferably at a temperature of about 225 °F, when the lens are placed m the curing unit. Preferably, the lens holders are positioned away from the lamps, such that little activating light reaches the lenses when the lamps are on This allows anneal processed to be performed at the same time that curing processes are performed and within the same curmg unit. Lenses that have been formed with a mixture of heating and light typically exhibit crosslink density that are greater than lenses which are cured using combmations of light only curing with light and heat curmg.

It should be understood, that the above-descnbed improvements may be used m combination with any of the feamres of the previously described embodiments. Further modifications and alternative embodiments of various aspects of the invention will be apparent to those skilled in the art m view of this descπption. Accordingly, this description is to be construed as illustrative only and is for the purpose of teaching those skilled m the art the general manner of carrying out the invention It is to be understood that the forms of the mvention shown and descπbed herein are to be taken as the presently prefened embodiments. Elements and materials may be substituted for those illustrated and descπbed herem, parts and processes may be reversed, and certain feamres of the invention may be utilized independently, all as would be apparent to one skilled in the art after having the benefit of this descnption of the invention. Changes may be made in the elements described herein without departing from the spuit and scope of the invention as described m the followmg claims

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:

1 A method for makmg a plastic eyeglass lens comprising placing a liquid lens forming composition m a mold cavity of a mold assembly wherein the mold assembly comprises a front mold member and a back mold member, the lens forming composition comprising a monomer composition comprising an aromatic containing polyether polyethylenic functional monomer, a co-imtiator composition configured to activate curing of the monomer composition to form the eyeglass lens during use, the co-imtiator composition comprising an amine, and a photoinitiator configured to activate the co-initiator composition in response to being exposed to activating light dunng use, directing activating light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curing of the lens forming composition, and directing activating light and heat toward at least one of the mold members subsequent to initiating curing of the lens to form the eyeglass lens

2 The method of claim 1, wherem the aromatic containing polyethylenic polyether functional monomer comprises an ethoxylated bisphenol A contammg at least one group selected from acrylyl or methacrylyl

3 The method of claim 1, wherein the co-mitiator composition comprises an acrylyl amine

4 The method of claim 1 , wherein the co-imtiator composition comprises an acrylyl amine, the acrylyl amme comprising monoacrylated amines, diacrvlated ammes, or mixtures thereof

5 The method of claim 1 wherem the lens forming composition further comprises an activating light absorbmg compound

6 The method of claim 1 , wherein the lens forming composition further compnses a photochromic compound

7 The method of claim 1 , wherein the lens forming composition further comprises an ultraviolet absorbing compound for inhibiting at least a portion of ultraviolet light from being transmitted through the eyeglass lens during use

The method of claim 1 , wherein curmg of the lens forming composition is initiated by directing activating light tow ard at least one of the mold members for less than 30 seconds

The method of claim 1 , wherein curmg of the lens formmg composition is initiated bv directing activating light toward at least one of the mold members for less than 100 seconds

The method of claim 1, wherein curmg of the lens forrmng composition is initiated bv directing activating light toward both of the mold members

The method of claim 1, wherein curing of the lens formmg composition is initiated bv directing activating light toward the bottom mold member

The method of claiml, wherem treating the lens formmg composition with activating light and heat comprises directing activating light toward at least one of the mold members and applying heat to both mold members for a tune of up to about 15 minutes

The method of claim 1, further compnsmg applymg heat to the lens m the absence of activating light, subsequent to directing activating light and heat toward at least one of the mold members

The method of claim 1, further compnsmg heating the lens forming composition prior to placmg the lens forming composition m a mold cavity

The method of claim 1, further compnsmg removing the eyeglass lens from the mold cavity and applymg an abrasion resistant coatmg to a front surface of the eyeglass lens

The method of claim 1 , further comprising removing the eyeglass lens from the mold cavity and tmting the eyeglass lens

The method of claim 1, wherein the lens formmg composition exhibits a yellow color after the curmg is initiated, and wherein activating light and heat are directed toward the lens until the lens formmg composition is substantially free of the yellow color

The method of claim 1, wherem the eyeglass lens is an asphenc smgle vision lens

The method of claim 1, wherein the eyeglass lens is a flat-top bifocal lens

The method of claim 1, wherem the eyeglass lens is a progressive multifocal lens

The method of claim 1, wherem the eyeglass lens is an asphenc single vision lens, a flat-top bifocal lens or a progressive multifocal lens

The method of claim 1 , wherein directing activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curmg is performed in a curing chamber, and wherem directing activating light and heat toward at least one of the mold members subsequent to initiating curing is performed m a post-cure chamber and further compnsmg transfenmg the mold assembly to the post-cure chamber after the curing is initiated in the curmg chamber

The method of claim 1 , wherem directing activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members is preformed without coolmg of the mold assembly

The method of claim 1, wherem the eyeglass lens is a flat-top bifocal lens and wherein duectmg activating light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate cunng comprises directing activating light toward the front mold member prior to duectmg activatmg light toward the back mold member

The method of claim 1 , wherem the eyeglass is a flat top bifocal lens,, the flat-top bifocal lens compnsmg a near vision conection zone and a far vision conection zone, and wherem duectmg activating light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curing compnses duectmg activating light toward the back mold member prior to duectmg activating hght toward the front mold member, and further compπsmg duectmg activatmg light toward the front mold member before the lens formmg composition m the far vision conection zone proximate the front mold member is substantially gelled

The method of claim 1, wherem the eyeglass lens is a non-photochromic lens, and wherem directing activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curing comprises duectmg activatmg light toward both mold members for a time of less than about 2 mmutes, and wherem duectmg activating hght and heat toward at least one of the mold members compnses duectmg activating light toward the back mold member while heatmg the mold assembly to a temperature of between about 200 °F to about 225 °F for a time of up to about 15 minutes

The method of claim 1, wherein the eyeglass lens is a non-photochromic lens, and wherem duectmg activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curing comprises duectmg activatmg light toward the front mold member for a time of less than about 10 seconds, and wherein directing activatmg light and heat toward at least one of the mold members comprises duectmg activatmg light toward the back mold member while heatmg the mold assembly to a temperature of between about 200 °F to about 225 °F, for a time of up to about 15 mmutes

The method of claim 1, wherem the eyeglass lens is a photochromic lens, and wherem duectmg activating light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curmg comprises directing activating light toward both mold members for a time of less than about 2 mmutes, and wherein directing activatmg light and heat toward at least one of the mold members comprises duectmg activating light toward the back mold member while heatmg the mold assembly to a temperamre of between about 200 °F to about 225 °F for a time of up to about 15 mmutes The method of claim 1 , wherein the eyeglass lens is a photochromic lens, and wherem duectmg activating light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curmg comprises directmg activatmg light toward the front mold member for a time of less than about 25 seconds, and wherem directing acti atmg light and heat toward at least one of the mold members comprises directing activatmg light toward the back mold member while heatmg the mold assembly to a temperamre of between about 200 °F to about 225 °F, for a time of up to about 15 mmutes

The method of claim 1, wherem the eyeglass lens is a photochromic lens, and wherem duectmg activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members to mitiate cunng comprises directmg first activatmg light toward the back mold member for a tune of less than about 25 seconds and further compnsmg duectmg second activating light toward the front mold member for a time period of less than about 10 seconds after the directing of the first activatmg light is started, and wherem directing activating light and heat toward at least one of the mold members compnses duecting activating light toward the back mold member while heatmg the mold assembly to a temperamre of between about 200 °F to about 225 °F, for a time of up to about 15 mmutes

A method for making a plastic eyeglass lens, compnsmg placing a liquid lens forming composition in a mold cavity defined by at least a front mold member and a back mold member, the lens forming composition compnsmg a monomer composition compnsmg an aromatic contammg polyether polyethylenic functional monomer, a co-mitiator composition configured to activate cuπng of the monomer composition to form the eyeglass lens durmg use, the co-initiator composition compπsmg an amme; and a photomitiator configured to activate the co-imtiator composition m response to bemg exposed to activatmg light during use; and substantially simultaneously duecting light toward at least one of the mold members and heat toward both of the mold members to form the eyeglass lens

The method of claim 31, wherem the aromatic contammg polyethylenic polyether functional monomer compnses an ethoxylated bisphenol A contammg at least one group selected from acrylyl or methacrylyl

The method of claim 31 , wherem the co-mitiator composition comprises an acrylyl amme

The method of claim 31, wherem the co-initiator composition compnses an acrylyl amme, the acrylyl amme comprising monoacrylated ammes, diacrvlated ammes, or mixtures thereof

The method of claim 31, wherem the lens forming composition further comprises an activating light absorbmg compound 36 The method of claim 31, wherem the lens formmg composition further compnses a photochromic compound.

37 The method of claim 31, wherem the lens forming composition further compnses an ultraviolet absorbmg compound for inhibiting at least a portion of ultraviolet light from being transmitted through the eyeglass lens during use.

38 The method of claim 31, wherem tteatmg the lens forming composition with activating light and heat comprises duectmg activating light toward both of the mold members

39 The method of claun 31, wherem tteatmg the lens forming composition with activatmg light and heat compnses initially directing activating light toward the bottom mold member and subsequently duecting activatmg light toward both mold members.

40 The method of claim 31 , wherem tteatmg the lens formmg composition with activating light and heat compnses directing activating hght toward at least one of the mold members and applymg heat to both mold members for a time of up to about 15 mmutes

41. The method of claim 31, further compnsmg applymg heat to the lens m the absence of activating light, subsequent to duectmg activatmg light and heat toward at least one of the mold members.

42. The method of claim 31 , further compnsmg heating the lens formmg composition prior to placmg the lens forming composition in a mold cavity

43. The method of claim 31 , further compnsmg removmg the eyeglass lens from the mold cavity and applying an abrasion resistant coating to a front surface of the eyeglass lens.

44 The method of claim 31 , further compnsmg removing the eyeglass lens from the mold cavity and tmtmg the eyeglass lens.

45. The method of claim 31, wherem the lens forming composition exhibits a yellow color after the curmg is mitiated, and wherem activating light and heat are duected toward the lens until the lens forrmng composition is substantially free of the yellow color

46. The method of claim 31, wherem the eyeglass lens is an asphenc single vision lens.

47 The method of claim 31 wherem the eyeglass lens is a flat-top bifocal lens

48 The method of claim 31 , wherem the eyeglass lens is a progressive multifocal lens The method of claim 31 , wherem the eyeglass lens is an asphenc single vision lens, a flat-top bifocal lens or a progressive multifocal lens

The method of claim 31, wherem the eyeglass lens is a flat-top bifocal lens and wherem directmg activating light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curmg comprises directing activatmg light toward the front mold member prior to directing activatmg light toward the back mold member

The method of claim 31, wherein the eyeglass is a flat top bifocal lens,, the flat-top bifocal lens compnsmg a near vision conection zone and a far vision conection zone, and wherein directmg activating light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate cunng comprises directmg activatmg light toward the back mold member pπor to duectmg activating light toward the front mold member, and further compπsmg directmg activatmg light toward the front mold member before the lens forrmng composition in the far vision conection zone proximate the front mold member is substantially gelled

The method of claim 31. wherein the eyeglass lens is a non-photochromic lens, and wherem directmg activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curing comprises duectmg activatmg light toward both mold members for a time of less than about 2 minutes, and wherem directmg activatmg light and heat toward at least one of the mold members compnses directmg activating light toward the back mold member while heatmg the mold assembly to a temperature of between about 200 °F to about 225 °F for a tune of up to about 15 mmutes.

The method of claim 31, wherem the eyeglass lens is a non-photochromic lens, and wherem duectmg activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curmg comprises directmg activatmg light toward the front mold member for a tune of less than about 10 seconds, and wherem directing activatmg light and heat toward at least one of the mold members comprises directmg activating light toward the back mold member while heating the mold assembly to a temperamre of between about 200 °F to about 225 °F, for a time of up to about 15 minutes.

The method of claim 31 , wherem the eyeglass lens is a photochromic lens, and wherem directmg activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members to mitiate curmg comprises duectmg activatmg light toward both mold members for a tune of less than about 2 mmutes, and wherem duectmg activatmg light and heat toward at least one of the mold members compnses duectmg activatmg light toward the back mold member while heatmg the mold assembly to a temperature of between about 200 °F to about 225 °F, for a time of up to about 15 minutes

The method of claim 31 , wherem the eyeglass lens is a photochromic lens, and wherem directmg activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curing comprises directing activatmg light toward the front mold member for a time of less than about 25 seconds, and wherem duectmg activatmg light and heat toward at least one of the mold members comprises duectmg activating light toward the back mold member while heating the mold assembly to a temperamre of between about 200 °F to about 225 °F, for a time of up to about 15 mmutes

The method of claim 31, wherein the eyeglass lens is a photochromic lens, and wherem directing activating light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curing comprises directing first activating light toward the back mold member for a tune of less than about 25 seconds and further comprising directing second activating light toward the front mold member for a time period of less than about 10 seconds after the directing of the first activating light is started, and wherem directmg activatmg light and heat toward at least one of the mold members compnses directing activating light toward the back mold member while heatmg the mold assembly to a temperature of between about 200 °F to about

225 °F, for a time of up to about 15 mmutes

A computer software program for determining a front mold, a back mold and a gasket which together produce a mold cavity, the mold cavity being configured to hold a lens forrmng composition which is curable to produce an eyeglass lens having a predetermmed prescnption, the front mold member compnsmg a front mold identification markmg, the back mold member compnsmg a back mold identification markmg, the gasket member compnsmg a gasket identification marking, wherem the software program compnses a plurality of instructions configured to perform operations compnsmg collecting prescnption mformation which defines the eyeglass prescription, and analyzmg the prescnption information to determine the front mold identification markmg, the back mold identification markmg, and the gasket identification markmg of the appropnate front mold, back mold and gasket for producing the eyeglass lens

The computer software program of claun 57, wherein the prescnption information compnses a sphere power, a cylinder power, and a lens location

The computer software program of claim 57, wherem the prescnption mformation compnses a sphere power, a cylinder power and a lens location, and wherem the prescnption mformation is analyzed by coπelatmg the sphere power, cylinder power and the lens location to an record in an information database

The computer software program of claim 58, wherem the prescription mformation further compnses monomer type and lens type

The computer software program of claim 57, wherem the prescription information comprises a sphere power, a cylinder power, an add power and a lens location

The computer software program of claim 57 wherem the prescnption mformation comprises a sphere power, a cylinder power, an add power, and a lens location and wherein the prescnption information is analyzed by conelatmg the sphere power, the cylinder power, the add power, and the lens location to a record in an information database.

63 The computer software program of claim 61, wherein the prescription information further compnses monomer type and lens type

64 The computer software program of claim 57, wherem the front mold identification markmg comprises an alphanumeric sequence, and wherem the back mold identification markmg compnses an alphanumeric sequence, and wherein the gasket identification markmg comprises an alphanumeric sequence.

65 The computer software program of claim 57, wherem the operations further compnse producmg a visual display of the front mold identification number, the back mold identification number, and the gasket identification number subsequent to analyzmg the prescription data

66 The computer software program of claim 57, wherem the operations further comprise determining curing conditions for a lens based on the eyeglass prescription.

67. The computer software program of claim 57, wherein the operations further compnse controlling a cunng unit, the cunng unit being configured to cure the lens formmg composition.

68. The computer software program of claun 57, wherem the operations further compnse: determining curing conditions for a lens based on the eyeglass prescription; and controlling a cunng unit, the curing unit being configured to cure the lens formmg composition, wherem controlling the cunng unit comprises operating the controlling unit such that the cuπng conditions are produced

69 The computer software program of claim 57, wherem the operations further compnse allowing the eyeglass prescnption to be altered after the eyeglass prescription is collected.

70 The computer software program of claim 57, wherem the operations further compnse storing the eyeglass prescription on a computer readable media.

71 The computer software program of claim 57, wherem the operations further comprise controlling a coatmg umt, the coating unit being configured to cure the lens forming composition

72 A programmable logic controller for controlling a lens forming apparatus, the lens forming apparatus comprising a front mold member having a casting face, a non-castmg face and a front mold identification markmg; a back mold member having a casting face, a non-castmg face and a back mold identification mark, the back mold member being spaced apart from the front mold member by a gasket duπng use, the gasket compπsmg a gasket identification markmg, wherem the casting faces of the front mold member and the back mold member and an inner surface of the gasket at least partially define a mold cavity which defines a shape conespondmg to an eyeglass prescription, and a lens curing unit configured to direct activating light toward the mold members during use, the conttoller comprising an mput device for obtammg information from an user, and an output device for transmitting mformation to the user, wherem the controller is configured to determine the front mold identification markmg, the back mold identification marking and the gasket identification markmg in response to the eyeglass prescnption being entered through the input device, and wherein the conttoller is configured to transmit via the output device the front mold identification marking, the back mold identification markmg and the gasket identification marking, and wherem the conttoller is configured to conttol the operation of the lens curmg unit durmg use

The conttoller of claim 72, wherein the output device comprises a display screen

The controller of claun 72, wherem the output device compnses a display screen, and wherem the mput device compnses scrolling buttons and a selection knob

The conttoller of claun 72, wherem the output device compnses a display screen, and wherem the mput device comprises scrolling buttons and a selection knob, and wherein the selection knob is configured to be movable m a first direction such that data on the display screen is altered, and wherein the selection knob is configured to be movable in a second direction to select the data

The conttoller of claim 72, wherem the conttoller is configured to adjust lens curing conditions based on the eyeglass prescription

The conttoller of claim 72, wherein the apparatus further comprises a light sensor configured to measure the dose of light transmitted to the mold cavity, and wherem the light sensor is configured to communicate with the controller, and wherem the conttoller vanes the intensity or duration of light such that a predetermmed dose is transmitted to the mold cavity

The conttoller of claim 72, wherem the lens cuπng unit compnses a first light source and a second light source, and wherem the control umt is configured to individually control the first and second light sources 79 The conttoller of claim 72, wherem the controller is configured to perform system diagnostic checks

80 The controller of claim 72. wherem the controller is configured to notify the user when the system requires mamtenance

81 The conttoller of claim 72, wherem the conttoller is configured to transmit instructions to an operator duπng use

82 The conttoller of claim 72, wherein the controller is configured to mn a computer software program for determmmg the front mold identification markmg, the back mold identification marking and the gasket identification markmg, wherein the software program compnses a plurality of instructions configured to perform operations compπsmg collecting prescnption information which defines the eyeglass prescnption; and analyzmg the prescription information to determine the front mold identification markmg, the back mold identification markmg, and the gasket identification markmg of the appropπate front mold, back mold and gasket for producmg the eyeglass lens

83 The conttoller of claun 82, wherein the prescription mformation comprises a sphere power, a cylmder power and a lens location, and wherem the prescription mformation is analyzed by conelatmg the sphere power, cylmder power and the lens location to an record m an mformation database

84 The conttoller of claim 82, wherein the prescription mformation compnses a sphere power, a cylmder power, an add power, and a lens location and wherem the prescnption mformation is analyzed by conelatmg the sphere power, the cylinder power, the add power, and the lens location to a record in an mformation database

85 The conttoller of claim 82, wherein the prescnption mformation further compnses monomer type and lens type

86 The conttoller of claim 82, wherem the front mold identification markmg compnses an alphanumenc sequence, and wherem the back mold identification markmg compnses an alphanumeric sequence, and wherem the gasket identification markmg comprises an alphanumeric sequence

87 The controller of claim 82, wherein the output device is a display screen, and wherem the operations further comprise producing a visual display of the front mold identification number, the back mold identification number, and the gasket identification number on the output device subsequent to analyzmg the prescription data 88 The conttoller of claim 82, wherem the operations further comprise determining curmg conditions tor a lens based on the eyeglass prescnption.

89 The controller of claun 82, wherein the operations further comprise determmmg curmg conditions for a lens based on the eyeglass prescription, wherem the controller is configured to control the curing unit such that the curing conditions are produced

90 A system for preparing an eyeglass lens, compnsmg: a first mold member having a casting face and a non-casting face, a second mold member having a casting face and a non-castmg face, the second mold member being spaced apart from the first mold member during use such that the castmg faces of the first mold member and the second mold member at least partially define a mold cavity; a lens forming composition adapted to be disposed withm the mold cavity during use, compnsmg- a monomer composition comprising aη, aromatic contammg polyether polyethylenic functional monomer; a co-initiator composition configured to activate cunng of the monomer composition to form the eyeglass lens durmg use; and a photomitiator configured to activate the co-mitiator composition m response to bemg exposed to activatmg light dunng use; a lens curing unit configured to direct activatmg light and heat toward the mold members during use; and a coating unit for applying a coatmg to an eyeglass lens.

91. The system of claun 90, wherem the aromatic contammg polyethylenic polyether functional monomer compnses an ethoxylated bisphenol A contammg at least one group selected from acrylyl or methacrylyl

92 The system of claun 90, wherem the co-initiator composition compnses an acrylyl amme.

93 The system of claim 90, wherem the co-initiator composition compnses an acrylyl amme, the acrylyl amme compnsmg monoacrylated amines, diacrvlated ammes, or mixtures thereof.

94. The system of claim 90, wherem the lens forrmng composition further comprises an activatmg light absorbing compound.

95 The system of claim 90, wherem the lens forming composition further comprises a photochromic compound.

96 The system of claim 90, wherem the lens forming composition further comprises an ultraviolet absorbing compound for inhibiting at least a portion of ultraviolet light from being transmitted through the eyeglass lens duπnε use 97 The system of claim 90 wherem the apparatus is configured to form non-photochromic lenses and photochromic lenses

98 The system of claim 90, wherein the apparatus is configured to form asphenc smgle vision lenses, flat-top bifocal lenses and progressive multifocal lenses

99 The system of claim 90 wherem the apparatus is configured to substantially simultaneously apply a coatmg to an eyeglass lens disposed withm the coatmg unit and direct activating light and heat toward mold members disposed withm the lens curing unit

100 The system of claim 90, wherem the coatmg unit is a spm coatmg unit

101 The system of claim 90, wherem the coating unit compnses a holder for holding the eyeglass lens or at least one of the mold members, wherem the holder is configured to revolve during use, and a coating umt activating light source configured to direct activating light towards the coatmg unit dunng use

102 The system of claim 101, wherein the coatmg unit activating light source is an ultraviolet light source

103 The system of claim 101, wherein the coatmg unit activating light source has a peak light mtensity at a range of about 200 nm to about 300 nm

104 The system of claim 101, further compnsmg a cover for covering the coating unit, wherem the coatmg unit activating hght source is positioned on an inner surface of the cover

05 The system of claim 90, wherem the lens curing unit comprises a first light source configured to generate and direct activating light toward the first mold member, and wherein the lens cuπng unit further comprises a second light source configured to generate and direct activating light toward the second mold member

06 The system of claim 105, further compnsmg a first filter disposed between the first light source and the first mold member, and a second filter disposed between the second light source and the second mold member

07 The system of claim 105, wherem the first and second filters are configured to thermally isolate the first and second light sources from the lens curing chamber

14- 108 The system of claim 105, further compnsmg a first thermal banier disposed betw een the first light source and the first mold member, and a second thermal barner disposed between the second light source and the second mold member

109 The system of claim 105, wherem the first and second light sources comprise fluorescent light sources configured to emit light at a wavelength of about 385 nanometers to about 490 nanometers

110 The system of claim 90, wherem the lens curmg unit compnses a lens drawer for positioning the mold members withm the lens curing unit, the lens drawer bemg configurable to be inserted within and removed from an inadiation chamber of the lens curmg unit

111 The system of claim 90, wherein the lens curmg unit comprises a heater, the heater configured to heat the mtenor of the lens curing unit to a temperature of up to about 250 °F

112 The system of claim 90, wherem the lens cuπng unit comprises a conductive heating apparatus, the conductive heatmg apparatus being adapted to conductively apply heat to a face of at least one of the mold members during use

113 The system of claim 90, further compnsmg a programmable controller configured to substantially simultaneously control operation of the coatmg unit and the lens cunng unit dunng use

114 The system of claim 90, wherein the lens cunng unit compnses a first light source and a second light source, and further comprising a programmable conttoller configured to individually control the first and second lights

115 The system of claun 90, further comprising a programmable controller configured to conttol operation of the lens cuπng unit as a function of the eyeglass lens prescnption

116 An apparatus for preparmg an eyeglass lens, compnsmg a first mold member having a castmg face and a non-castmg face, a second mold member having a castmg face and a non-castmg face, the second mold member bemg spaced apart from the first mold member durmg use such that the casting faces of the first mold member and the second mold member at least partially define a mold cavity, a lens cunng unit configured to direct activatmg light and heat toward the mold members during use, and a coatmg unit for applying a coatmg to an eyeglass lens

17 The apparatus of claim 1 16, wherem the apparatus is configured to form non-photochromic lenses and photochromic lenses 118 T he apparams of claim 116, wherein the apparams is configured to form an asphenc smgle vision lens, a flat-top bifocal lens or a progressive multifocal lens

119 The apparams of claim 116, wherein the apparams is configured to substantially simultaneously apply a coatmg to an eyeglass lens disposed within the coatmg unit and direct activating light and heat toward mold members disposed withm the lens curing unit

120 The apparams of claim 116, wherein the coatmg umt is a spm coating unit

121 The apparams of claim 1 16, wherem the coatmg unit comprises a holder for holding the eyeglass lens or at least one of the mold members, wherem the holder is configured to revolve during use, and a coating unit activatmg light source configured to direct activatmg light towards the coatmg unit durmg use

122 The apparatus of claim 121, wherein the coatmg umt activatmg light source is an ultraviolet light source

123 The apparatus of claim 121, wherem the coatmg umt activating light source has a peak light intensity at a range of about 200 nm to about 300 nm

124 The apparatus of claun 121, further comprising a cover for covenng the coating unit, wherem the coatmg unit activating light source is positioned on an inner surface of the cover

125 The apparams of claim 1 16, wherem the lens curmg unit comprises a first light source configured to generate and direct activating light toward the first mold member, and wherem the lens curmg unit further comprises a second light source configured to generate and direct activating light toward the second mold member

26 The apparatus of claun 125, further comprising a first filter disposed between the first light source and the first mold member, and a second filter disposed between the second light source and the second mold member, the first and second filters being configured to diffuse the activating light directed toward the mold members during use

27 The apparatus of claim 125, wherem the first and second filters are configured to thermally isolate the first and second light sources from the lens curmg chamber

128 The s\ stem of claim 125 further comprising a first thermal bamer disposed between the first light source and the first mold member, and a second thermal banier disposed between the second light source and the second mold member 129 The apparatus of claim 125, wherem the first and second light sources comprise fluorescent light sources configured to emit light at a wavelength of about 385 nanometers to about 490 nanometers

130 The apparatus of claim 1 16, wherem the lens curmg umt comprises a lens drawer for positioning the mold members withm the lens curmg unit, the lens drawer bemg configurable to be inserted withm and removed from an inadiation chamber of the lens cunng unit

131 The apparatus of claim 116, wherem the lens cuπng unit comprises a heater, the heater configured to heat the mtenor of the lens curing unit to a temperamre of up to about 250 °F

132 The apparatus of claim 116, wherein the lens cuπng unit comprises a conductive heatmg apparams, the conductive heatmg apparatus being adapted to conductively apply heat to a face of at least one of the mold members during use

133 The apparatus of claim 116, further compnsmg a programmable conttoller configured to substantially simultaneously conttol operation of the coating unit and the lens curing unit during use

134 The apparatus of claun 116, wherein the lens curmg unit compnses a first light source and a second light source, and further compnsmg a programmable conttoller configured to individually control the first and second lights

135 The apparatus of claim 116, further compnsmg a programmable controller configured to control operation of the lens cunng unit as a function of the eyeglass lens prescnption

136 An apparatus for preparmg an eyeglass lens, compnsmg a front mold member havmg a casting face, a non-castmg face and a front mold identification markmg, a back mold member having a castmg face, a non-casting face and a back mold identification mark, the back mold member being spaced apart from the front mold member by a gasket dunng use, the gasket comprising a gasket identification markmg, wherem the castmg faces of the front mold member and the back mold member and an inner surface of the gasket at least partially define a mold cavity which defines a shape conespondmg to an eyeglass prescnption, a coatmg unit for applying a coatmg to the eyeglass lens during use, a lens curing umt configured to direct activatmg light and heat toward the mold members durmg use, a controller compnsmg an mput device for obtaining information from an user and an output device for transmitting information to the user, wherem the controller is configured to determine the front mold identification marking, the back mold identification markmg and the gasket identification markmg in response to the eyeglass prescription being entered through the input device, and wherem the conttoller is configured to transmit via the output device the front mold identification markmg, the back mold identification marking and the gasket identification markmg, and wherem the controller is configured to conttol the operation of the lens curing unit during use

137 The apparams of claim 136 wherem the apparams is configured to form non-photochromic lenses and photochromic lenses

138 The apparams of claim 136, wherein the apparams is configured to form an asphenc smgle vision lens, a flat-top bifocal lens or a progressive multifocal lens

139 The apparams of claim 136, wherem the apparatus is configured to substantially simultaneously apply a coatmg to an eyeglass lens disposed withm the coatmg unit and direct activating light and heat toward mold members disposed withm the lens curing unit

140 The apparams of claim 136, wherem the coatmg umt is a spm coating unit

141 The apparatus of claim 136, wherein the coatmg unit comprises a holder for holding the eyeglass lens or at least one of the mold members, wherem the holder is configured to revolve during use, and a coating unit activating light source configured to direct activating light towards the coating unit during use

142 The apparatus of claun 141, wherem the coatmg unit activating light source is an ultraviolet light source

143 The apparams of claim 141, wherem the coating unit activating light source has a peak light mtensity at a range of about 200 nm to about 300 nm

144 The apparams of claim 141, further compnsmg a cover for covering the coatmg umt, wherein the coating unit activating light source is positioned on an inner surface of the cover

145 The apparams of claim 136, wherem the lens curmg unit comprises a first light source configured to generate and direct activating light toward the front mold member, and wherem the lens curmg unit further comprises a second light source configured to generate and direct activating light toward the back mold member

146 The apparatus of claim 136, further compnsmg a first filter disposed between the first light source and the front mold member, and a second filter disposed between the second light source and the back mold member the first and second filters being configured to diffuse the activating light directed toward the mold members during use 147 The apparatus of claim 136 wherem the first and second filters are configured to thermally isolate the first and second light sources from the lens curing chamber

148 The system of claim 136, further comprising a first thermal bamer disposed between the first light source and the first mold member, and a second thermal barner disposed between the second light source and the second mold member

149 The apparatus of claim 136, wherem the first and second light sources comprise fluorescent light sources configured to emit light at a wavelength of about 385 nanometers to about 490 nanometers

150 The apparams of claim 136, wherem the lens cuπng unit comprises a lens drawer for positionmg the mold members withm the lens curing unit, the lens drawer bemg configurable to be mserted withm and removed from an inadiation chamber of the lens curing unit

151 The apparatus of claim 136, wherem the lens curing umt comprises a heater the heater configured to heat the mteπor of the lens curmg unit to a temperamre of up to about 250 °F

152 The apparatus of claim 136, wherein the lens curmg unit compnses a conductive heatmg apparatus, the conductive heating apparams being adapted to conductively apply heat to a face of at least one of the mold members during use

153 The apparatus of claun 136, wherein the output device compnses a display screen

154 The apparatus of claun 136, wherein the output device comprises a display screen, and wherem the input device comprises scrolling buttons and a selection knob

155 The apparatus of claim 136, wherein the output device comprises a display screen, and wherem the mput device comprises scrolling buttons and a selection knob, and wherein the selection knob is configured to be movable m a first direction such that data on the display screen is altered, and wherein the selection knob is configured to be movable in a second direction to select the data

156 The apparatus of claun 136, wherem the controller is configured to adjust lens curing conditions based on the eyeglass prescription

157 The apparatus of claim 136, wherein the apparams further comprises a light sensor configured to measure the dose of light transmitted to the mold cavity, and wherein the light sensor is configured to communicate with the controller, and wherem the controller vanes the mtensity or duration of light such that a predetermined dose is transmitted to the mold cavity 158 The apparatus of claim 136 wherem the lens curing umt compnses a first light source and a second light source, and wherem the control unit is configured to individually control the first and second light sources

159 The apparatus of claim 136. wherem the controller is configured to perform system diagnostic checks

160 The apparatus of claim 136, wherem the controller is configured to notify the user when the system requues maintenance

161 The apparatus of claim 136, wherein the controller is configured to transmit instmctions to an operator dunng use

162 The apparatus of claim 136, wherein the controller is configured to mn a computer software program for determmmg the front mold identification marking, the back mold identification markmg and the gasket identification markmg, wherem the software program compnses a plurality of instructions configured to perform operations compnsmg collecting prescription information which defines the eyeglass prescription; and analyzmg the prescnption information to determine the front mold identification markmg, the back mold identification markmg, and the gasket identification markmg of the appropriate front mold, back mold and gasket for producmg the eyeglass lens

163 The apparatus of claun 162, wherem the prescnption information comprises a sphere power, a cylmder power and a lens location, and wherem the prescnption mformation is analyzed by conelatmg the sphere power, cylmder power and the lens location to an record m an mformation database

164 The apparatus of claun 162, wherem the prescnption information comprises a sphere power, a cylmder power, an add power, and a lens location and wherem the prescription mformation is analyzed by conelatmg the sphere power, the cylinder power, the add power, and the lens location to a record m an information database

165 The apparams of claim 162, wherem the prescription mformation further comprises monomer type and lens type

166 The apparatus of claim 162, wherem the front mold identification marking compnses an alphanumeric sequence, and wherem the back mold identification marking comprises an alphanumeric sequence, and wherein the gasket identification marking comprises an alphanumeric sequence

167 The apparatus of claim 162 wherem the output device is a display screen, and wherem the operations further comprise producing a visual display of the front mold identification number, the back mold identification number, and the gasket identification number on the output device subsequent to analvzmg the prescription data

168 The apparatus of claim 162, wherem the operations further comprise determining curing conditions for a lens based on the eyeglass prescription

169 The apparatus of claim 162, wherein the operations further compnse determining curing conditions for a lens based on the eyeglass prescnption, wherem the conttoller is configured to conttol the curing unit such that the curmg conditions are produced

170 A system for dispensmg a heated polymenzable lens forming composition compnsmg a body, the body bemg configured to hold the lens forrmng composition, a heatmg system coupled to the body for heatmg the monomer solution, a conduit coupled to the bodv for transferring the lens forming composition out of the body, the conduit compnsmg an mlet and an outlet, the inlet being positioned proximate the body the outlet being positioned distal to the body, an elongated member positioned withm the conduit, wherem the elongated member is positionable within the conduit m a closed position, wherem the elongated member m the closed position inhibits flow of the lens formmg composition through the conduit, and wherem the elongated member is positionable withm the conduit m an open position, wherem the elongated member in an open position allows flow of the lens formmg composition flows through the conduit dunng use, an elastic member coupled to the elongated member, the elastic member being configured to exert a force on the elongated member such that the elongated member moves from the closed position positioned to the open position durmg use, and a movable member coupled to the conduit and the elongated member, wherein the elongated member contacts the movable member at a first position such that the elongated member is m the closed position, and wherem the elongated member contacts the movable member at a second position such that the elongated member is m the open position, and wherem the movable member is movable such that contact between the movable member and the elongated member can be varied from the first position to the second position

171 The system of claim 170, wherein the heatmg system is positioned withm the body

172 The system of claim 170, wherein the body further comprises a chamber positioned withm the body, and wherem the heating system is positioned withm the chamber, and wherein the chamber inhibits the lens formmg composition from contacting the heatmg system

173 The system of claim 170, wherem the heatmg system comprises a resistive heatmg system 174 The system of claim 170, wherem the body comprises stainless steel.

175 The system of claim 170. wherem the conduit comprises a variable inner width

176 The system of claim 170, wherem the conduit comprises a f st portion and a second portion, the first portion comprising a first width, the second portion comprising a second width, the first width being greater than the second width, wherem the first portion is proximate the inlet, and wherein the second portion is proximate the outlet.

177 The system of claim 170, wherein the conduit comprises a channel extending through the conduit, perpendicular to the longitudmal axis of the conduit, and wherein the elongated member is positioned withm the channel.

178 The system of claim 177, wherem the elongated member extends substantially completely through the conduit when the elongated member is m the closed position

179. The system of claim 177, wherem the elongated member extends partially into the conduit when the elongated member is an open position.

180. The system of claim 170, wherein the movable member comprises a groove, and wherem the elongated member is configured to extend from the conduit into the groove, and wherein the elongated ember moves along the groove when the movable member is moved from a first position to a second position.

181 The system of claim 180, wherein the height of the groove m the first position is substantially less than the height of the groove in the second position

182. The system of claun 180, wherein the groove comprises a substantially tapered inner surface.

183. The system of claim 180, wherein the elongated member further contacts the movable member at an intermediate position between the first and second position, and wherein the wherein the height of the groove m the first position is substantially less than the height of the groove m the second position, and wherem the height of the groove m the intermediate position is substantially less than the height of the groove m the second position, and wherem the height of the groove m the intermediate position is substantially greater than the height of the groove m the first position.

184 The system of claim 183, wherem the groove comprises a substantially tapered umer surface, and wherem the difference between the height of the groove at the second position and the intermediate position is substantially less than the difference between the height of the groove at the intermediate position and the first position. 185 The system of claim 183, wherem the elongated member is in an open position when contactmg the movable member at the intermediate position, and wherem moving the elongated member from the intermediate position to the second position causes the flow rate of lens formmg composition through the conduit to substantially increase

186 The system of claun 170, wherein the elongated member compnses stainless steel coated with a plastic covenng

187 The system of claim 170, wherein the elastic member is a spring

188 The system of claim 170, wherem the conduit is substantially flexible

189 The system of claim 170, further compπsmg a thermostat coupled to the body, the thermostat being configured to measure a temperature of the lens formmg composition

190 The system of claun 170, further comprising a thermostat coupled to the body, the thermostat bemg configured to measure a temperature of the lens formmg composition and a controller coupled to the thermostat and the heatmg system, the conttoller configured to control the heatmg system m response to the temperature measured by the thermostat

191 A method for makmg a flat-top bifocal eyeglass lens, the flat top bifocal eyeglass lens compnsmg a near vision conection zone and a far vision conection zone, compπsmg placmg a liquid lens forming composition m a mold cavity of a mold assembly, wherem the mold assembly comprises a front mold member and a back mold member, the front mold member comprising a near vision conection zone, duecting activating light toward at least one of the mold members to mitiate curmg of the lens formmg composition, wherein the curing is initiated such that the lens formmg composition m the near vision conection zone of the front mold is substantially gelled before the lens formmg composition m the far vision conection zone proximate the front mold member is substantially gelled, and duectmg activating light and heat toward at least one of the mold members subsequent to mitiatmg curmg of the lens to form the eyeglass lens

192 The method of claim 191, wherein directing activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members to mitiate cunng comprises directing activating light toward the front mold member prior to directmg activatmg light toward the back mold member

193 The method of claim 191, directing activating light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curing compnses directing activating light toward the back mold member prior to directing activating light toward the front mold member, and further comprising duectmg activating light toward the front mold member before the lens forming composition m the far vision conection zone proximate the front mold member is substantially gelled

194 The method of claun 191, wherein the lens forrmng composition comprises: a monomer composition compnsmg an aromatic contammg polyether polyethylenic functional monomer; a co-mitiator composition configured to activate curmg of the monomer composition to form the eyeglass lens during use, the co-initiator composition compnsmg an amine; and a photoinitiator configured to activate the co-imtiator composition m response to being exposed to activatmg light during use.

195. The method of claun 194, wherem the aromatic contammg polyethylenic polyether functional monomer compnses an ethoxylated bisphenol A contammg at least one group selected from acrylyl or methacrylyl

196 The method of claim 194, wherein the co-initiator composition compnses an acrylyl amme.

197 The method of claim 194, wherein the co-imtiator composition comprises an acrylyl amme, the acrylyl amme compnsmg monoacrylated amines, diacrylated ammes, or mixtures thereof.

198. The method of claim 194, wherem the lens formmg composition further compnses an activatmg light absorbing compound.

199 The method of claim 194, wherein the lens forrmng composition further compnses a photochromic compound

200. The method of claim 194, wherein the lens formmg composition further compnses an ultraviolet absorbing compound for inhibiting at least a portion of ultraviolet light from bemg transmitted through the eyeglass lens dunng use

201. The method of claun 191, wherein curmg of the lens forming composition is mitiated by duecting activating light toward at least one of the mold members for less than 30 seconds.

202. The method of claim 191, wherein curmg of the lens forrmng composition is initiated by duectmg activating light toward at least one of the mold members for less than 100 seconds.

203 The method of claim 191 , wherem curing of the lens formmg composition is initiated by directing activatmg light toward both of the mold members 204 The method of claim 191, wherem curmg of the lens forming composition is initiated by duecting activating light toward the bottom mold member

205 The method of claim 191, wherem tteatmg the lens forming composition with activating light and heat comprises directing activating light toward at least one of the mold members and applying heat to both mold members for a time of up to about 15 mmutes

206 The method of claim 191, further comprising applymg heat to the lens m the absence of activating light, subsequent to directing activatmg light and heat toward at least one of the mold members

207 The method of claim 191, further compnsmg heating the lens forming composition prior to placmg the lens forming composition m a mold cavity

208 The method of claim 191, further compnsmg removing the eyeglass lens from the mold cavity and applying an abrasion resistant coating to a front surface of the eyeglass lens

209 The method of claim 191, further compnsmg removing the eyeglass lens from the mold cavity and tinting the eyeglass lens

210 The method of claim 191, wherem the lens formmg composition exhibits a yellow color after the curmg is initiated, and wherem activating light and heat are directed toward the lens until the lens forrmng composition is substantially free of the yellow color

211 The method of claim 191, wherein duectmg activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curing is performed m a curing chamber, and wherem directing activating light and heat toward at least one of the mold members subsequent to initiating curmg is performed in a post-cure chamber, and further compnsmg transferring the mold assembly to the post-cure chamber after the curing is initiated in the curmg chamber

212 The method of claim 191, wherem duectmg activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members is preformed without cooling of the mold assembly

213 A method for makmg a plastic eyeglass lens, comprising placmg a liquid lens forming composition in a mold cavity of a mold assembly, wherem the mold assembly comprises a front mold member and a back mold member, and directmg activating light and heat toward at least one of the mold members to form the eyeglass lens 214 A computer software program for determmmg a mold cavity, the mold cavity bemg configured to hold a lens formmg composition which is curable to produce an eyeglass lens having a predetermined prescription, wherem the software program comprises a plurality of instructions configured to perform operations comprising: collecting prescription information; and analyzing the prescription information to determine the appropnate mold cavity for producmg the eyeglass lens.

215. A programmable logic conttoller for controlling a lens forming apparams, the conttoller compπsmg- an input device for obtaining information from an user; and an output device for transmitting information to the user; wherem the conttoller is configured to determine a mold cavity configuration in response to eyeglass prescription being entered through the input device, and wherem the controller is configured to transmit via the output device a mold cavity configuration, and wherem the conttoller is configured to conttol the operation of a lens curing unit during use

216. A system for preparing an eyeglass lens, compnsmg: a first mold member; a second mold member, the second mold member being spaced apart from the first mold member durmg use to at least partially define a mold cavity; a lens forming composition disposed withm the mold cavity during use; and a lens curmg unit.

217 An apparatus for preparmg an eyeglass lens, comprising- a first mold member; a second mold member, the second mold member being spaced apart from the first mold member duπng use to at least partially define a mold cavity; and a lens curing unit.

218. A system for dispensing a heated polymenzable lens forming composition compnsmg. a body; a heatmg system; and a conduit coupled to the body for transfenmg the lens formmg composition out of the body, the conduit compnsmg an mlet and an outlet, the mlet being positioned proximate the body the outlet bemg positioned distal to the body

219. A method for making a flat-top bifocal eyeglass lens, compnsmg- placmg a liquid lens formmg composition in a mold cavity of a mold assembly, directing activatmg light toward at least one of the mold members; and directing activating light and heat toward at least one of the mold members subsequent to initiating curing of the lens to form the eyeglass lens.

220 A lens comprising the solid reaction product of a liquid lens forming composition, the liquid lens forming composition bemg reacted by exposure to at least some activatmg light to form by the lens.